MINISTRY OF ELECTRICITY REPUBLIC OF IRAQ - ebeth.gr · MINISTRY OF ELECTRICITY REPUBLIC OF IRAQ ... Turnkey Tender for Supply, Shipment of (132kV) Underground Cables ... 7.2.1 132kV

MINISTRY OF ELECTRICITYREPUBLIC OF IRAQ

GENERAL DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICALTRANSMISSION PROJECTS

TENDER DOCUMENT

TENDER NO. P.C 35 /NT/2013Turnkey Tender for

Supply, Shipment of (132kV) Underground Cables & Accessories,Installation, Work Execution, Completion & Guarantee of the

Works for Joining Projects (Substations):-

AL Zawraa 132 kv Substation–AL Hurryia 132 kv Substation

AL Yarmook 132 kv substation – Al Rasheed 400 kv Substation

AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation

Issued in

TENDER NO. P.C 35 / NT/ 2013GENERAL DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION PROJECTS

MINISTRY OF ELECTRICITY, IRAQ

Contents 1-i

CONTENTSLETTER OF INVITATION 1SECTION 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ............................................................................................ 3SECTION 2: BID DATA SHEET (BDS) ................................................................................................... 24

2.1 A. INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................... 242.2 B. BIDDING DOCUMENTS............................................................................................... 25

2.3 C. PREPARATION OF BIDS............................................................................................. 252.4 D. SUBMISSION AND OPENING OF BIDS ..................................................................... 28

2.5 E. EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS ............................................................ 292.6 F. AWARD OF CONTRACT.............................................................................................. 29

SECTION 3: EVALUATION AND QUALIFICATION CRITERIA............................................................. 303.1 EVALUATION...................................................................................................................... 30

3.1.1 Technical Evaluation ........................................................................................................... 303.1.2 Economic Evaluation ........................................................................................................... 30

3.2 TECHNICAL ALTERNATIVES ............................................................................................ 313.3 QUALIFICATION................................................................................................................. 32

3.3.1 Eligibility............................................................................................................................... 323.3.2 Pending Litigation ................................................................................................................ 33

3.3.3 Experience........................................................................................................................... 353.3.4 Personnel ............................................................................................................................ 36

3.3.5 Equipment ........................................................................................................................... 363.3.6 Subcontractors .................................................................................................................... 37

SECTION 4: PRICE BID BIDDING FORMS............................................................................................ 384.1 LETTER OF PRICE BID...................................................................................................... 38

4.2 PRICE SCHEDULES........................................................................................................... 404.3 PRICE SCHEDULE NO 1:- MAJOR PROJECT & EQUIPMENT........................................ 42

4.3.1 Schedule No 1.1: 132kV Under Ground Cable System - Major Project & Equipment....... 424.3.2 Schedule No. 1.2..:- Fiber Optic Cable and Telecommunication - Major Project &

Equipment. .......................................................................................................................... 464.3.3 Schedule No 1.3:- Supply of Cable Protection Systems..................................................... 55

4.3.4 Schedule No 1.4:- Supply and Installation of GIS System.................................................. 564.4 PRICE SCHEDULE NO 2 :- MANDATORY SPARE MATERIALS ..................................... 57

4.5 SCHEDULE NO 3 - ( OMITTED )...................................................................................... 584.6 PRICE SCHEDULE NO. 4:- CIVIL WORKS, ELECTRICAL WORKS & INSTALLATION .. 59

4.6.1 Schedule No. 4.1.A. :- Civil Works ...................................................................................... 59Schedule No 4.1.. :- Civil Works.......................................................................................... 60

Schedule No 4.1 :- Civil Works............................................................................................ 614.6.2 Schedule No 4.2 - Electrical Works - Power Cable............................................................. 62

4.6.3 Schedule No. 4.3.: Fiber Optic Cable & Equipment ............................................................ 634.6.4 Schedule No. 4.4:- Installation of Cable Protection Systems.............................................. 64

4.7 PRICE SCHEDULE NO. 5:- OTHER SERVICES ............................................................... 65

TENDER NO. P.C 35 /NT/ 2013GENERAL DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION PROJECTS


Contents ii

4.7.1 Schedule No. 5.1:- Training................................................................................................. 65

4.7.2 Schedule No. 5.2:- Witness of Factory Tests & Type Tests ............................................... 664.8 PRICE SCHEDULE NO 6:- GRAND SUMMARY............................................................... 67

4.9 SCHEDULE NO. 8 - TOOLS AND APPLIANCES (PROVISIONAL)................................... 694.10 SCHEDULE NO. 9 - DAY WORKS (PROVISIONAL) ......................................................... 70

4.11 SCHEDULE NO. 10- SCHEDULE OF MAJOR ITEMS OF CONSTRUCTIONAL PROJECT............................................................................................................................................. 75

SECTION 5: BIDDING FORMS TECHNICAL BID .................................................................................. 765.1 LETTER OF TECHNICAL BID ............................................................................................ 765.2 BID SECURITY ................................................................................................................... 785.3 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL ................................................................................................... 79

5.3.1 Form PER – 1: Proposed Personnel ................................................................................... 805.4 TIME SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................... 85

5.5 BIDDERS QUALIFICATION................................................................................................ 865.5.1 Form ELI - 1: Bidder’s Information Sheet ............................................................................ 86

5.5.2 Form ELI - 2: JV Information Sheet..................................................................................... 875.5.3 Form LIT - Pending Litigation .............................................................................................. 88

5.5.4 Form FIN - 1: Financial Situation......................................................................................... 895.5.5 Form FIN - 2: Average Annual Turnover ............................................................................. 90

5.5.6 Form FIN – 3: Financial Resources.................................................................................... 915.5.7 Form FIN- 4: Current Contract Commitments .................................................................... 92

5.5.8 Form EXP – 1: General Experience................................................................................... 935.5.9 Form EXP – 2(a): Specific Experience............................................................................... 94

5.5.10 Form EXP - 2(b): Specific Experience in Key Activities ..................................................... 95SECTION 6: ELIGIBLE COUNTRIES...................................................................................................... 96SECTION 7: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS SCOPE OF WORKS .................................................... 97

7.1 TECHNICAL GENERAL CONDTIONS ............................................................................... 97

7.1.1 Basic design Criteria............................................................................................................ 977.1.2 Electrical Works................................................................................................................... 97

7.1.3 Civil Works........................................................................................................................... 987.1.4 Geographical Information System....................................................................................... 99

7.1.5 Electrical System and Engineering Works .......................................................................... 997.1.6 Civil System and Engineering Works .................................................................................. 99

7.1.7 Site Environmental Conditions .......................................................................................... 1007.1.8 HV & MV Equipment & Safety Clearances ..................................................................... 101

7.2 MAJOR PROJECT & EQUIPMENT INCLUDING SPARE PARTS (WHICH ARE NOTGIVEN SEPARATELY) ..................................................................................................... 103

7.2.1 132kV Al/XLPE Underground Cable System: ................................................................... 103

7.2.2 Fiber Optic Cable and Telecommunication - Major Project & Equipment......................... 1037.2.3 Supply of Cable Protection Systems................................................................................. 103

7.2.4 Supply of Geographical Information System..................................................................... 1037.3 MANDATORY SPARE MATERIALS................................................................................. 103



Contents iii

7.4 LIAISON SERVICES ......................................................................................................... 103

7.5 CIVIL WORKS, ELECTRICAL WORKS, INSTALLATION AND OTHER SERVICES ...... 1037.5.1 A. Civil Works : ................................................................................................................. 103

7.5.2 Electrical Works :............................................................................................................... 1047.5.3 Fiber Optic Cable & Equipment:........................................................................................ 104

7.5.4 Installation of Cable Protection Systems:.......................................................................... 1047.6 OTHER SERVICES........................................................................................................... 104

7.6.1 Training:............................................................................................................................. 1047.6.2 Witness of Factory Tests & Type Tests............................................................................. 104

7.7 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS. .................................................................................. 1047.8 CARAVAN TYPE HOUSES FOR JOINTING PURPOSES............................................... 104

7.9 MULTIPLE PRECAST MOULDING MACHINE SPECIFICATION................................... 106SECTION 8: 132KV UNDER GROUND CABLE INSTALLATION........................................................ 107

8.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................................ 1078.1.1 ELECTRICAL WORKS...................................................................................................... 107

8.1.2 Calculation of transmission capacity ................................................................................. 1078.1.3 Calculation of Electrical Losses......................................................................................... 108

8.1.4 Magnetic Field Strength on Surface.................................................................................. 1088.1.5 Cross-Bonding of Cable Sheath........................................................................................ 108

8.1.6 Cable Temperature Monitoring System (Not applicable) .................................................. 1098.1.7 Requirements for Installation and Commissioning............................................................ 109

8.2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OF 132KV XLPE CABLES ............................................ 1108.2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 110

8.2.2 Specifications of 132kV Power Cables.............................................................................. 1108.2.3 Technical Requirements of Cable Accessories................................................................. 110

8.2.4 Technical Requirements of Temperature Measurement (Not applicable) ........................ 1128.2.5 Technical Requirements of Cross-Bonding and Earthing of Cable Sheath ...................... 113

8.2.6 Installation of the 132kV Cable System............................................................................. 1158.3 OTHER REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................ 1188.3.1 Requirements on Operation and Instruction Manuals and Drawings................................ 118

8.3.2 Training and Familiarization of Project and Equipment..................................................... 119SECTION 9: 132KV UNDERGRUOND CABLES.................................................................................. 120

9.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 1209.2 TECHNICAL RULES ......................................................................................................... 120

9.2.1 IEC Recommendations ..................................................................................................... 1209.2.2 Standards .......................................................................................................................... 120

9.3 GENERAL WORKING CONDITIONS............................................................................... 1209.3.1 System Electrical Conditions............................................................................................. 120

9.3.2 Electrical Conditions Considering Metallic Sheath Earthing ............................................. 1209.3.3 Operating Temperature of Cables..................................................................................... 120

9.3.4 Climatic Conditions............................................................................................................ 1219.3.5 Soil Thermal Conditions .................................................................................................... 121



Contents iv

9.4 CABLES FEATURES ........................................................................................................ 121

9.4.1 Synthetic Insulation Cables ............................................................................................... 1229.4.2 Marking of Cables.............................................................................................................. 126

9.4.3 Accessories ....................................................................................................................... 1279.4.4 Shipment and Reels .......................................................................................................... 127

9.5 TESTS ON CABLES ......................................................................................................... 1289.5.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 128

9.5.2 Calibration ......................................................................................................................... 1299.5.3 Test Conditions.................................................................................................................. 129

9.5.4 Tests At Works .................................................................................................................. 1299.6 TESTS ON ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................. 133

9.6.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 1339.6.2 Pressure tanks................................................................................................................... 133

9.6.3 Alarm Pressure Gauges .................................................................................................... 1349.6.4 Dielectric Security Test (All Kinds of Cable)...................................................................... 134

9.6.5 Impulse Voltage Test ( All Kinds of Cable)........................................................................ 1349.7 TESTS AFTER INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 134

9.7.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 1349.7.2 High – Volt Age Test (All Kinds of Cable) ......................................................................... 134

9.7.3 Conductor Resistance Test (for information only)............................................................. 1349.7.4 High Voltage Test of The Protection Covering (all kinds of cable).................................... 134

9.8 TESTS CLASSIFICATION – QUALIFICATION – ACCEPTANCE.................................... 1349.8.1 Tests Classification............................................................................................................ 134

9.8.2 Qualification....................................................................................................................... 1359.8.3 Checking During Manufacture........................................................................................... 135

9.8.4 Acceptance........................................................................................................................ 135SECTION 10: STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND TELECOMMUNICATION

........................................................................................................................................... 13610.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 136

10.2 PDH/SDH (STM-1) OPTICAL FIBRE EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 13610.2.1 General Requirements ...................................................................................................... 136

10.2.2 General Conditions............................................................................................................ 13710.2.3 Requirements for Transport Level..................................................................................... 138

10.2.4 2 Mbit/s HDSL Desktop Terminal ...................................................................................... 13910.2.5 Arm Units........................................................................................................................... 139

10.2.6 Optical Amplifier ................................................................................................................ 14210.2.7 Summary of Standards...................................................................................................... 142

10.2.8 Synchronization Equipment............................................................................................... 14410.2.9 Test Equipment ................................................................................................................. 144

10.2.10 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................... 14410.3 UNDERGROUND OPTICAL FIBER CABLE SPCIFICATIONS........................................ 146

10.3.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................... 146



Contents v

10.3.2 SPECIFICATION OF FIBER OPTIC CABLES.................................................................. 152

10.4 CABLES ............................................................................................................................ 15510.5 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................ 156

10.5.1 Tools and Instruments....................................................................................................... 15610.5.2 Documentation .................................................................................................................. 156

10.5.3 Spare Parts........................................................................................................................ 15610.6 SUPERVISION, TRAINING AND TEST WITNESSING.................................................... 156

SECTION 11: CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS ........................................................................................ 16311.1 SCOPE OF CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS .................................................................... 163

11.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 16311.1.2 Deadlines.......................................................................................................................... 164

11.1.3 Description of installations ............................................................................................ 16411.1.4 General description of the cable route.......................................................................... 164

11.1.5 Cable routing ................................................................................................................... 16411.1.6 Information for the Contractor ....................................................................................... 165

11.1.7 Start-up and shutdown of existing installations .......................................................... 16611.1.8 Scope of supplies, sequence of installation by the Contractor ................................. 166

11.1.9 Documentation ................................................................................................................ 16711.2 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION WORKS ........................................................................ 168

11.2.1 Construction site mobilization ....................................................................................... 16811.2.2 Site supervision............................................................................................................... 168

11.2.3 Unforeseen interruptions to construction work........................................................... 16811.2.4 Cooperation with other contractors .............................................................................. 168

11.2.5 Surveying work................................................................................................................ 16911.2.6 Removal of non-foreseeable obstructions ................................................................... 169

11.2.7 Site security & Safety...................................................................................................... 16911.2.8 Breaking open the surface ............................................................................................. 171

11.2.9 Earthworks ....................................................................................................................... 17111.2.10 Laying of cables .............................................................................................................. 17811.2.11 Cable installation............................................................................................................. 178

11.2.12 Restoration of road surfaces, pedestrian surfaces and hard shoulders................... 17811.2.13 Method of Canal crossings ............................................................................................ 180

11.2.14 Cable route survey .......................................................................................................... 18211.3 DETAILS OF DESIGN WORKS ...................................................................................... 183

11.3.1 Standards and Codes of Practice .................................................................................. 18311.3.2 Structure Type of Cable Bridge ..................................................................................... 184

11.3.3 Design Criteria of Cable Bridge ..................................................................................... 18411.4 DETAILS OF TESTING REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 186

11.4.1 General on Testing .......................................................................................................... 18611.4.2 Particulars of Testing...................................................................................................... 187

11.5 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXECUTION OF CIVIL WORKS.......................... 18811.5.1 Sub-soil investigations ................................................................................................... 188



Contents vi

11.5.2 Site clearance, and earthworks...................................................................................... 189

11.5.3 Concrete ........................................................................................................................... 191SECTION 12: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION......................... 201

12.1 NOTES ON TECHNICAL SCHEDULES ........................................................................... 20112.2 TECHNICAL PERTICULARS AND GURANTEES............................................................ 201

12.2.1 Schedule A: General Description of Work......................................................................... 20112.2.2 Schedule B: Times for Delivery & Completion and Contract Completion Time ................ 202

12.2.3 Schedule C: Manufacturers and Places of Manufacture, Testing and Inspection ............ 20312.2.4 Schedule D 5: 132kV Power Cable – General Particulars and Guarantees .................... 205

12.2.5 Schedule D 6: Fiber Optic Cable....................................................................................... 21012.2.6 Schedule D 3: International Standards.............................................................................. 215

12.3 DEPARTURES FROM THE SPECIFICATION ................................................................. 21712.4 MANUFACTURER’S AND SUBCONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE...... 218

12.4.1 Site Organization ............................................................................................................... 21812.4.2 Details of Other Work In Hand & Contractual Commitments ............................................ 221

12.4.3 Schedule of Sub Contractors ............................................................................................ 22212.5 DOCUMENTS, DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE BID223

12.6 SUBMITTALS DURING CONTRACT PERIOD................................................................. 22412.6.1 Programme of submittals .................................................................................................. 224

12.7 DRAWING NUMBERS ...................................................................................................... 22412.7.1 Documents & Drawings to be submitted during the contract period ................................. 224

12.8 CONTRACT RECORD DRAWINGS................................................................................. 22512.9 SAMPLES.......................................................................................................................... 227

12.10 ADHERENCE TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL ACTS, REGULATIONS AND / ORGUIDELINES..................................................................................................................... 228

SECTION 13: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS: BANK GUARANTEES,. CERTIFICATES ................ 23013.1 BANK GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATES ................................................................... 230

13.1.1 Form of Performance Security (Performance Bond)......................................................... 23013.1.2 Form of Advance Payment Security (Not applicable as there is no Advance payment)... 232

13.1.3 Form of Completion Certificate.......................................................................................... 23313.1.4 Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate ..................................................................... 234

13.2 CHANGE ORDERS........................................................................................................... 23513.2.1 Change Order Procedure .................................................................................................. 236

13.2.2 References for Changes ................................................................................................... 23613.2.3 Change Order Forms......................................................................................................... 237

SECTION 14: CONTRACT FORMS ........................................................................................................ 24514.1 NOTIFICATION OF AWARD............................................................................................. 245

14.2 CONTRACT AGREEMENT............................................................................................... 24614.2.1 Appendix 1 - Terms and Procedures of Payment ........................................................... 249

14.2.2 Appendix 2 - Price Escalation ......................................................................................... 25014.2.3 Appendix 3 - Insurance Requirements............................................................................ 251

14.2.4 Appendix 4 - Time Schedule ........................................................................................... 253



Contents vii

14.2.5 Appendix 5 - List of Major Items of Project and Services and List of ApprovedSubcontractors .................................................................................................................. 254

14.2.6 Appendix 6 - Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer ........................................... 25514.2.7 Appendix 7 - List of Documents for Approval or Review................................................. 256

14.2.8 Appendix 8 - Functional Guarantees- Not Applicable ..................................................... 257SECTION 15: GENERAL CONDITONS OF CONTRACT....................................................................... 258

15.1 ATTACHED SEPARATELY .............................................................................................. 258SECTION 16: PERTICULAR CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ................................................................ 259

16.1 ATTACHED SEPARATELY .............................................................................................. 259SECTION 17: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS: DRAWINGS .............................................................. 260

17.1 CABLE ROUTE MAPS...................................................................................................... 261

17.1.1 AL Zawraa Substation–AL Hurryia Substation.................................................................. 26117.1.2 AL Yarmook substation – Al Rasheed Substation ............................................................ 271

17.1.3 AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation .......................................... 28017.2 DRAWING NO 001: TYPICAL DRAWING FOR FLAT FORMATION – GENERAL CABLE

ROUTE .............................................................................................................................. 285

17.3 DRAWING NO 002A: TYPICAL DRAWING FOR CROSS SECTION VIEW HORIZONTALDIRECTIONAL DRILLING................................................................................................. 286

17.4 DRAWING 002B TYPICAL DRAWING FOR HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRAWING 287

17.5 DRAWING NO 003: TYPICAL DRAWING FOR ROAD CROSSING (OPEN CUT) ......... 28817.6 DRAWING 004A POWER CABLE JOINT CHAIMBER..................................................... 289

17.7 DRAWING 004B POWER CABLE JOINT CHAIMBER PLAN .......................................... 29017.8 DRAWING R005 LINK BOX PIT ....................................................................................... 291

17.9 DRAWING 006 TYPICAL DRWING FOR FLAT FORMATION CONCRETE TROUGH... 29217.10 DRAWING R002 CARAVAN FOR CABLE JOINTING...................................................... 293

17.11 DRAWING 0011CRC JOINT CHAIMBER......................................................................... 29417.12 FIG (2) MULTIPLE PRECAST MOULDING MACHINE SPECIFICATION ....................... 295

17.13 DRAWING 021T – CONCRETE TROUGH & MARKER BLOCK1.................................... 29617.14 DRAWING 001M – CONCRETE TROUGH & MARKER BLOCK2................................... 29717.15 DRAWING F1: MARKER TAPE ....................................................................................... 298

17.16 DRAWING 0010F: FOUNDATION OF GANTRY STEEL STRUCTURE SUPPORTS FOR132KV CABLE SEALING ENDS ....................................................................................... 299

17.17 DRAWING 0010G: GANTRY STEEL STRUCTURE SUPPORTS FOR 132KV CABLESEALING ENDS................................................................................................................ 300

17.18 DRAWING CB: CROSS BONDING FOR LONG DISTANCE .......................................... 30117.19 TYPICAL CROSS SECTION OF A 132KV XLPE ALUMINIUM CABLE........................... 302



Letter of Invitation 1

LETTER OF TENDER

My Ref: P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013

Tender Date: xxxxxx

General Directorate ofElectrical Transmission Projects

Ministry of ElectricityBaghdad

Republic of Iraq

E-mail :[email protected]: 71_commercial .dept.mgr@moelc .gov.iq

[email protected]

Dear Sir,LETTER OF TENDER

I. The General Directorate for Electrical Transmission Projects (GDETP) of the Ministry Of Electricity(MOE), Government of Iraq has initiated the implementation of several electricity developmentprojects in order to improve electricity supply reliability and availability of the country by enhancingthe capacity of supply in the Iraq National Grid.

II. The GDETP / MOE invites sealed Bids from eligible Bidders for the , Supply, Shipment of 132kVUnderground Cables & Accessories, Installation, Work Execution, Completion & Guarantee of theWorks for joining projects (substations):-

AL Zawraa Substation–AL Hurryia Substation

AL Yarmook substation – Al Rasheed Substation

AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation

III. The GDETP/MOE intends to finance this project through funds received from the Government ofIraq, for which this Letter of Invitation is issued.

IV. MOE wishes to effect the contract payments by irrecoverable, letters of credit, deferred over 630days) period. Details of payment terms are given in the Appendix 1 of the Contract Agreement(Section 12: 13).

V. Two envelopes bidding procedure will be adopted. Bidders are required to submit simultaneouslytwo sealed envelopes, one containing the Technical Proposal and the other containing the FinancialProposal. Initially only the technical proposals are opened. Technical proposals which are notsubstantially responsive will be rejected. The substantially responsive technical proposals will beconsidered for further evaluation and discussion.

VI. Bidders are requested to fully aware of local conditions and take them into account in preparing theproposals.

VII. Bids containing Technical and Financial Proposals must be delivered to the address given in the BidData Sheet on or before (12.00 noon) (Baghdad, Iraq local time) on / / 2013. Bids received afterthis time and date shall not be considered and will be returned un-opened.

VIII. Technical Proposals will be opened immediately thereafter in the presence of Bidder’srepresentatives who choose to attend

IX. The Financial Proposals will be opened in the presence of the renderer’s representatives who



Contents 2

choose to attend. The time, date and the venue of the opening will be advised by the GDETP/MOE.

X. Please note that (i) the costs of preparing the proposals and of negotiating the contract, including avisit to the MOE, are not reimbursable as a direct cost of the Bid; and (ii) the MOE is not bound toaccept any of the proposals submitted.

XI. The Bid Document contains following sections;

Letter of Invitation

Section 1 – Instructions to Bidders

Section 2 – Bid Data Sheet

Section 3 – Evaluation and Qualification Criteria

Section 4 – Bidding Forms: Price

Section 5 – Bidding Forms: Technical

Section 6 – Eligible Countries

Section 7 – Employer’s Requirements: Scope of Work

Section 8 – Employer’s Requirements: 132kV Under Ground Cable Installation

Section 9 – Employer’s Requirements: 132kV Under Ground Cable

Section 10 – Employer’s Requirements: Standard Specification for Fiber Optic Cable andTelecommunication.

Section 11 – Employer’s Requirements: Civil Engineering Works

Section 12 – Employer’s Requirements: Supplementary Information

Section 13 – Employer’s Requirements: Bank Guarantees, Certificates and Change Orders

Section 14 – Contract Forms

Section 15 – General Conditions of Contract – On a separate Volume

Section 16 – Particular Conditions of Contract – On a Separate Volume

Section 17 - Employer’s Requirements: Drawings

The Tender Company should have a branch in Iraq. Please send your confirmation or / regrets (toparticipate in this Tender) to us in writing (by email or by post); upon receipt of the invitation.

Yours Sincerely,

Director General - Electricity Transmission ProjectsGeneral Directorate of Electricity Transmission ProjectsMinistry of ElectricityAl Mustinsiria SquareBaghdadRepublic of Iraq

Tel: +964 TBD



Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders 1-3

SECTION 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERSA. GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 5

1 SCOPE OF BID ..................................................................................................................... 52 SOURCE OF FUNDS............................................................................................................ 5

3 CORRUPT PRACTICES ....................................................................................................... 54 ELIGIBLE BIDDERS.............................................................................................................. 5

5 ELIGIBLE PROJECT AND SERVICES................................................................................. 6B. CONTENTS OF BIDDING DOCUMENT............................................................................... 7

6 SECTIONS OF BIDDING DOCUMENT ................................................................................ 77 CLARIFICATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENT, SITE VISIT, PRE-BID MEETING................. 8

8 AMENDMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENT ........................................................................... 8C. PREPARATION OF BIDS..................................................................................................... 9

9 COST OF BIDDING............................................................................................................... 910 LANGUAGE OF BID.............................................................................................................. 9

11 DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID................................................................................ 912 LETTER OF BID AND SCHEDULES.................................................................................. 10

13 ALTERNATIVE BIDS........................................................................................................... 1014 DOCUMENTS ESTABLISHING THE ELIGIBILITY OF PROJECT AND SERVICES ........ 10

15 DOCUMENTS ESTABLISHING THE ELIGIBILITY AND QUALIFICATIONS OF THEBIDDER ............................................................................................................................... 10

16 DOCUMENTS ESTABLISHING CONFORMITY OF THE PROJECT AND SERVICES .... 1117 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL, SUBCONTRACTORS.............................................................. 11

18 BID PRICES AND DISCOUNTS ......................................................................................... 1219 CURRENCIES OF BID AND PAYMENT............................................................................. 13

20 PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF BIDS ........................................................................................ 1421 BID SECURITY ................................................................................................................... 14

22 FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID ....................................................................................... 15D. SUBMISSION AND OPENING OF BIDS............................................................................ 15

23 SUBMISSION, SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS .......................................................... 1524 DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS........................................................................... 16

25 LATE BIDS .......................................................................................................................... 1626 WITHDRAWAL, SUBSTITUTION, AND MODIFICATION OF BIDS................................... 16

27 BID OPENING ..................................................................................................................... 16E. EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS................................................................... 18

28 CONFIDENTIALITY............................................................................................................. 1829 CLARIFICATION OF BIDS.................................................................................................. 18

30 DEVIATIONS, RESERVATIONS, AND OMISSIONS ......................................................... 1931 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION OF TECHNICAL BIDS .................................................... 19

32 RESPONSIVENESS OF TECHNICAL BID......................................................................... 1933 NONMATERIAL NONCONFORMATIES ............................................................................ 20




34 DETAILED EVALUATION OF TECHNICAL BIDS .............................................................. 20

35 ELIGIBILITY AND QUALIFICATION OF THE BIDDER...................................................... 2036 CORRECTION OF ARITHMETICAL ERRORS .................................................................. 21

37 CONVERSION TO SINGLE CURRENCY........................................................................... 2138 MARGIN OF PREFERENCE .............................................................................................. 21

39 EVALUATION OF PRICE BIDS .......................................................................................... 2140 COMPARISON OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 22

EMPLOYER’S RIGHT TO ACCEPT ANY BID, AND TO REJECT ANY OR ALL BIDS ..... 22F. AWARD OF CONTRACT ................................................................................................... 22

42 AWARD CRITERIA ............................................................................................................. 2243 NOTIFICATION OF AWARD............................................................................................... 22

44 SIGNING OF CONTRACT .................................................................................................. 2345 PERFORMANCE SECURITY ............................................................................................. 23




A. General

For Detailed scope of the project please refer Section 7: Employer’s Requirements, Scope of Work andfor Definitions of the words please refer to Section 14: General Conditions of the Contract: Clause 1

1 Scope of Bid 1.1 In connection with the Invitation for Bids indicated in the Bid Data Sheet(BDS), the Employer, as indicated in the BDS, issues this BiddingDocument for the procurement of Project and services as specified inSections on Employer’s Requirements. The name, identification, andnumber of lots (contracts) of the International Competitive Bidding (ICB)or Bidding Process, are provided in the BDS.

1.2 Unless otherwise stated, throughout this Bidding Document definitionsand interpretations shall be as prescribed in Section 14: (GeneralConditions of Contract).

1.3 The successful Bidder will be expected to complete the overall scope ofworks, within the period indicated in the BDS.

2 Source ofFunds

2.1 The Employer intends to finance this Bid through funds received from theGovernment of Iraq.

3 CorruptPractices

3.1 Refer General Condition of Contract ,(a) corrupt Practice is defined as follows

“corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting,directly or indirectly, anything of value to influence improperly theactions of another party;“fraudulent practice” means any act or omission, including amisrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attemptsto mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid anobligation;“coercive practice” means impairing or harming, or threatening toimpair or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of theparty to influence improperly the actions of a party;“collusive practice” means an arrangement between two or moreparties designed to achieve an improper purpose, includinginfluencing improperly the actions of another party;

(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the bidderrecommended for award has, directly or through an agent, engagedin corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing forthe Contract; and

(c) will sanction a firm or an individual, at any time, , if it at any timedetermines that the firm or individual has, directly or through anagent, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive or otherprohibited practices.

4 Eligible Bidders 4.1 A Bidder may be a private entity or a government-owned entity - subjectto ITB 4.5- or any combination of such entities with the intent to enter intoan agreement supported by a letter of intent or under an existingagreement in the form of a joint venture, consortium, or association (JV).In the case of a JV:

(a) all partners shall be jointly and severally liable, and(b) the JV shall nominate a Representative who shall have the authority




to conduct all business for and on behalf of any and all the partners ofthe JV during the bidding process and, in the event the JV is awardedthe Contract, during contract execution.

4.2 A Bidder, and all partners constituting the Bidder, shall have a nationalityof an eligible country, in accordance with Section 5: (Eligible Countries).A Bidder shall be deemed to have the nationality of a country if the Bidderis a national or is constituted, incorporated, or registered and operates inconformity with the provisions of the laws of that country. This criterionshall also apply to the determination of the nationality of proposedsubcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract including relatedservices.

4.3 A conflict of interest is a situation in which a party has interests that couldimproperly influence that party’s performance of official duties orresponsibilities, contractual obligations, or compliance with applicablelaws and regulations, and that such conflict of interest may contribute toor constitute a prohibited practice. if it determines that a conflict ofinterest has flawed the integrity of any procurement process.Consequently all Bidders found to have a conflict of interest shall bedisqualified. A Bidder may be considered to be in a conflict of interestwith one or more parties in this bidding process if, including but not limitedto:

(a) they have controlling shareholders in common; or(b) they receive or have received any direct or indirect subsidy from any

of them; or(c) they have the same legal representative for purposes of this bid; or(d) they have a relationship with each other, directly or through common

third parties, that puts them in a position to have access toinformation about or influence on the bid of another Bidder, orinfluence the decisions of the Employer regarding this biddingprocess; or

(e) a Bidder participates in more than one bid in this bidding process.Participation by a Bidder in more than one Bid will result in thedisqualification of all Bids in which it is involved. However, this doesnot limit the inclusion of the same subcontractor, not otherwiseparticipating as a Bidder, in more than one bid; or

(f) a Bidder or any of its affiliates participated as a consultant in thepreparation of the design or technical specifications of the Projectand services that are the subject of the bid.

4.4 A firm shall not be eligible to participate in any procurement activities if itis banned in Iraq.

4.5 Bidders shall provide such evidence of their continued eligibilitysatisfactory to the Employer, as the Employer shall reasonably request.

4.6 Firms of a country shall be excluded if UN prohibits any import of goodsfrom that country or any payments to persons or entities in that country.

4.7 In case a prequalification process has been conducted prior to the biddingprocess, this bidding is open only to prequalified Bidders.

5 Eligible Projectand Services

5.1 The Project and services to be supplied under the Contract shall havetheir origin in eligible source countries as defined in ITB 4.2 above (unlessotherwise stated) and all expenditures under the Contract will be limited tosuch Project and services.




5.2 For purposes of ITB 5.1 above, “origin” means the place where theProject, or component parts thereof are mined, grown, produced ormanufactured, and from which the services are provided. Projectcomponents are produced when, through manufacturing, processing, orsubstantial or major assembling of components, a commerciallyrecognized product results that is substantially in its basic characteristicsor in purpose or utility from its components.In this case, the design Services means, tasks covered under the scope ofwork and all project related services including design servicesThe materials to be supplied under the Contract shall have their originclearly indicated in the Bid proposal. At the Employer’s request, Biddersmay be required to provide evidence of the origin of materials. Refer BDSfor countries allowed for various items of the project.

All certification of origin should be issued from the commercial andindustrial chambers in the country of manufactured company and certifiedfrom the Iraqi commercial attached (in that country) not from suppliercountry and shall be submitted by the contractor to E.T.P before enteringof material to the Iraqi border taking in consideration that certification oforigin issued from one of the Arabic, market cooperation and officiallycertified in country of origin are accepted

Mission FacilitateThe contractor should ask for (mission facilitate) letter from the first partywithin a period not less than (45) days prior to arrival of shipment to theIraqi border, otherwise employer will not be responsible for delay incustom clearance.

B. Contents of Bidding Document

6 Sections ofBiddingDocument

6.1 The Bidding Document consists of Parts 1, 2, and 3, which include all theSections indicated below, and should be read in conjunction with anyAddenda issued in accordance with ITB 8.

PART I Bidding ProceduresSection 1 - Instructions to Bidders (ITB)Section 2 - Bid Data Sheet (BDS)Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (EQC)Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF):PriceSection 5 - Bidding Forms (BDF):TechnicalSection 6 - Eligible Countries (ELC)

PART II RequirementsSection 7,8,9,10,11,12,13 & 17 - Employer’s Requirements

(ERQ)

PART III Conditions of Contract and Contract FormsSection 15 - General Conditions of Contract (GCC)Section 16 - Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC)Section 14 - Contract Forms (COF)

6.2 The Invitation for Bids issued by the Employer is not part of the BiddingDocument.

6.3 The Employer is not responsible for the completeness of the BiddingDocument and its addenda, if they were not obtained directly from thesource stated by the Employer in the Invitation for Bids.




6.4 The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms, andspecifications in the Bidding Document. Failure to furnish all informationor documentation required by the Bidding Document may result in therejection of the bid.Bids which are not substantially responsive to the requirements of the Biddocument will be rejected.

7 Clarification ofBiddingDocument, SiteVisit, Pre-BidMeeting

7.1 A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification of the Bidding Documentshall contact the Employer in writing at the Employer’s address indicatedin the BDS or raise his enquiries during the pre-bid meeting if providedfor in accordance with ITB 7.4. The Employer will respond to any requestfor clarification, provided that such request is received no later thantwenty-one (21) days prior to the deadline for submission of bids. TheEmployer’s response shall be in writing with copies to all Bidders whohave acquired the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 6.3,including a description of the inquiry but without identifying its source.Should the Employer deem it necessary to amend the Bidding Documentas a result of a request for clarification, it shall do so following theprocedure under ITB 8 and ITB 24.2.

7.2 The Bidder is advised to visit and examine the site where the Project is tobe installed and its surroundings and obtain for itself on its ownresponsibility all information that may be necessary for preparing the bidand entering into a contract for the provision of Project and services. Thecosts of visiting the site shall be at the Bidder’s own expense.

7.3 The Bidder and any of its personnel or agents will be granted permissionby the Employer to enter upon its premises and lands for the purpose ofsuch visit, but only upon the express condition that the Bidder, itspersonnel, and agents will release and indemnify the Employer and itspersonnel and agents from and against all liability in respect thereof, andwill be responsible for death or personal injury, loss of or damage toproperty, and any other loss, damage, costs, and expenses incurred as aresult of the inspection.

7.4 The Bidder’s designated representative is invited to attend a pre-bidmeeting, if provided for in the BDS. The purpose of the meeting will beto clarify issues and to answer questions on any matter that may beraised at that stage.

7.5 The Bidder is requested, as far as possible, to submit any questions inwriting, to reach the Employer not later than one week before the pre-bidmeeting.

7.6 Minutes of the pre-bid meeting, including the text of the questions raised,without identifying the source, and the responses given, together with anyresponses prepared after the meeting, will be transmitted promptly to allBidders who have acquired the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB6.3. Any modification to the Bidding Document that may becomenecessary as a result of the pre-bid meeting shall be made by theEmployer exclusively through the issue of an Addendum pursuant to ITB8 and not through the minutes of the pre-bid meeting.

7.7 Nonattendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause fordisqualification of a Bidder.

8 Amendment ofBidding

8.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids, the Employermay amend the Bidding Document by issuing addenda.




Document

8.2 Any addendum issued shall be part of the Bidding Document and shall becommunicated in writing to all who have obtained the Bidding Documentfrom the Employer in accordance with ITB 6.3. Bidders shallacknowledge receipt of each addendum by email to the Employer

8.3 To give prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to take anaddendum into account in preparing their bids, the Employer may, at itsdiscretion, extend the deadline for the submission of bids, pursuant to ITB24.2

C. Preparation of Bids

9 Cost of Bidding 9.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation andsubmission of its Bid, and the Employer shall not be responsible orliable for those costs, regardless of the conduct or outcome of thebidding process.

10 Language ofBid

10.1 The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the bidexchanged by the Bidder and the Employer, shall be written in the Englishlanguage. Supporting documents and printed literature that are part ofthe Bid may be in another language provided they are accompanied by anaccurate translation of the relevant passages into the English language, inwhich case, for purposes of interpretation of the Bid, such translation shallgovern.

11 DocumentsComprising theBid

11.1 The Bid shall comprise two envelopes submitted simultaneously, onecalled the Technical Bid containing the documents listed in ITB 11.2 andthe other the Price Bid containing the documents listed in ITB 11.3, bothenvelopes enclosed together in an outer single envelope.

11.2 The Technical Bid submitted by the Bidder shall comprise the following:

(a) Letter of Technical Bid;(b) Bid Security or Bid Securing Declaration, in accordance with ITB 21;(c) alternative bids, if permissible, in accordance with ITB 13;(d) written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Bid to commit the

Bidder, in accordance with ITB 22.2;(e) documentary evidence establishing in accordance with ITB 14.1 that

the Project and services offered by the Bidder in its bid or in anyalternative bid, if permitted, are eligible;

(f) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 15 establishing theBidder’s eligibility and qualifications to perform the contract if its Bid isaccepted;

(g) Technical Proposal in accordance with ITB 17.(h) documentary evidence establishing in accordance with ITB 16 that

the Project and services offered by the Bidder conform to the BiddingDocument;

(i) in the case of a bid submitted by a JV, JV agreement, or letter ofintent to enter into a JV including a draft agreement, indicating atleast the parts of the Project to be executed by the respectivepartners;

(j) List of subcontractors, in accordance with ITB 17.2; and(k) any other document required in the BDS.




11.3 The Price Bid submitted by the Bidder shall comprise the following:

(a) Letter of Price Bid;(b) completed schedules as required, including Price Schedules, in

accordance with ITB 12 and 18;;(c) alternative price bids, if permissible, in accordance with ITB 13; and(d) any other document required in the BDS

12 Letter of Bidand Schedules

12.1 The Letters of Technical Bid and Price Bid, and the Schedules, and alldocuments listed under ITB 11, shall be prepared using the relevantforms furnished in Section 4: & Section 5: (Bidding Forms). The formsmust be completed without any alterations to the text, and no substitutesshall be accepted. All blank spaces shall be filled in with the informationrequested.

13 AlternativeBids

13.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the BDS, alternative bids shall not beconsidered. If they are allowed, the BDS will also indicate whether theyare permitted in accordance with ITB 13.3, or invited in accordance withITB 13.2 and/or ITB 13.4.

13.2 When alternatives to the Time Schedule are explicitly invited, a statementto that effect will be included in the BDS, and the method of evaluatingdifferent time schedules will be described in Section 3: (Evaluation andQualification Criteria).

13.3 Except as provided under ITB 13.4 below, Bidders wishing to offertechnical alternatives to the Employer’s requirements as described in thebidding document must also provide: (i) a price at which they areprepared to offer a Project meeting the Employer’s requirements; and (ii)all information necessary for a complete evaluation of the alternatives bythe Employer, including drawings, design calculations, technicalspecifications, breakdown of prices, and proposed installationmethodology and other relevant details. Only the technical alternatives, ifany, of the lowest evaluated Bidder conforming to the basic technicalrequirements shall be considered by the Employer.

13.4 When bidders are invited in the BDS to submit alternative technicalsolutions for specified parts of the facilities, such parts shall be describedin Section 7: to Section 12: & Section 16: (Employer’s Requirements).Technical alternatives for the specific parts of the facilities that complywith the performance and technical criteria specified for the Project andservices shall be considered by the Employer on their own merits,pursuant to ITB 32.

14 DocumentsEstablishingthe Eligibility ofProject andServices

14.1 To establish the eligibility of the Project and services in accordance withITB 5, Bidders shall complete the country of origin declarations in thePrice Schedule Forms, included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms).

15 DocumentsEstablishingthe EligibilityandQualifications

15.1 To establish its eligibility and qualifications to perform the Contract inaccordance with Section 3: (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria), theBidder shall provide the information requested in the correspondinginformation sheets included in Section 4: (Bidding Forms).




of the Bidder

15.2 Domestic Bidders, individually or in joint ventures, applying for eligibilityfor domestic preference shall supply all information required to satisfy thecriteria for eligibility as described in ITB 38.

16 DocumentsEstablishingConformity ofthe Project andServices

16.1 The documentary evidence of the conformity of the Project and servicesto the Bidding Document may be in the form of literature, drawings anddata, and shall furnish:

(a) a detailed description of the essential technical and performancecharacteristics of the Project and services, including the functionalguarantees of the proposed Project and services, in response to theSpecification;

(b) a list giving full particulars, including available sources, of all spareparts and special tools necessary for the proper and continuingfunctioning of the Project for the period named in the BDS, followingcompletion of Project and services in accordance with provisions ofcontract; and

(c) a commentary on the Employer’s Specification and adequateevidence demonstrating the substantial responsiveness of the Projectand services to those specifications. Bidders shall note thatstandards for workmanship, materials and equipment designated bythe Employer in the Bidding Document are intended to be descriptive(establishing standards of quality and performance) only and notrestrictive. The Bidder may substitute alternative standards, brandnames and/or catalogue numbers in its bid, provided that itdemonstrates to the Employer’s satisfaction that the substitutions aresubstantially equivalent or superior to the standards designate datedin the Specification.

16.2 In order to facilitate evaluation of Technical Bids, deviations, if any, fromthe terms and conditions or Specification shall be listed as indicated inITB 18.2.

17 TechnicalProposal,Subcontractors

17.1 The Bidder shall furnish a Technical Proposal including a statement ofwork methods, equipment, personnel, schedule and any other informationas stipulated in Section 4: (Bidding Forms), in sufficient detail todemonstrate the adequacy of the Bidders’ proposal to meet the workrequirements and the completion time.

17.2 For major items of Project and services as listed by the Employer inSection 3: (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria), which the Bidderintends to purchase or subcontract, the Bidder shall give details of thename and nationality of the proposed Subcontractors, includingmanufacturers, for each of those items. In addition, the Bidder shallinclude in its bid information establishing compliance with therequirements specified by the Employer for these items. Bidders are freeto list more than one Subcontractor against each item of the Project andservices. Quoted rates and prices will be deemed to apply to whicheverSubcontractor is appointed, and no adjustment of the rates and prices willbe permitted.

17.3 The Bidder shall be responsible for ensuring that any Subcontractorproposed, complies with the requirements of ITB 4, and that any Project,or services to be provided by the Subcontractor comply with therequirements of ITB 5 and ITB 15.1




18 Bid Prices andDiscounts

18.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS and/or Section 7: to Section 12:& Section 16: (Employer’s Requirements), bidders shall quote for theentire Project and services on a “single responsibility” basis such that thetotal bid price covers all the Contractor’s obligations mentioned in or to bereasonably inferred from the bidding document in respect of themanufacture, including procurement and subcontracting (if any), delivery,construction, installation and completion of the Project. This includes allrequirements under the Contractor’s responsibilities for testing, pre-commissioning and commissioning of the Project and, where so requiredby the bidding document, the acquisition of all permits, approvals andlicenses, etc.; the operation, maintenance and training services and suchother items and services as may be specified in the Bidding Document, allin accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions. Itemsagainst which no price is entered by the Bidder will not be paid for by theEmployer when executed and shall be deemed to be covered by theprices for other items.

18.2 Bidders are required to quote the price for the commercial, contractualand technical obligations outlined in the bidding document. If a Bidderwishes to make a deviation, such deviation shall be listed in the relevantform in Section 4: & Section 5: (Bidding Forms). The Bidder shall alsoprovide the additional price if any, for withdrawal of the deviation.

18.3 Bidders shall give a breakdown of the prices in the manner and detailcalled for in the Price Schedules included in Section 4: (Bidding Forms).Where no different Price Schedules are included in the BiddingDocument, bidders shall present their prices in the following manner:Separate numbered Schedules included in Section 4: (Bidding Forms)shall be used for each of the following elements. The total amount fromeach Schedule (1 to 5) shall be summarized in a Grand Summary(Schedule 6) giving the total bid price(s) to be entered in the Bid Form.

Schedule No. 1: Major Project and Equipment

Schedule No. 2: Mandatory Spare Materials

Schedule No. 3: Services

Schedule No. 4: Civil, Electrical Works & Installation

Schedule No. 5 Other Services

Schedule No. 6 Grand Summary (Schedule Nos. 1 to 5)

Schedule No. 7: Recommended Spare Parts

Bidders shall note that the Project and equipment included in ScheduleNos. 1 and 2 above exclude materials used for civil, building and otherconstruction works. All such materials shall be included and priced underSchedule No. 4, , Electrical Works & Installation.

18.4 In the Schedules, bidders shall give the required details and a breakdownof their prices as follows:

(a) Major Project and Equipment (Schedule No. 1):- the price of the Project shall be quoted as per Incoterms specified

in the BDS- the total price for the Project

(b) Mandatory Spare Materials (Schedule No. 2):- The price of the Project shall be quoted as per Incoterms




specified in the BDS,- The total price for the Project.

(c) Services. (Schedule No. 3).(d) Civil, Electrical Works & Installation (Schedule No. 4) shall be quoted

separately and shall include rates or prices for local transportation,insurance and other services incidental to delivery of the Project, alllabor, contractor’s equipment, temporary works, materials,consumables and all matters and things of whatsoever nature,including operations and maintenance services, the provision ofoperations and maintenance manuals, staff training, etc. , whereidentified in the Bidding Document, as necessary for the properexecution of the installation and other services, including all taxes,duties, levies and charges payable in the Employer’s country as oftwenty-eight (28) days prior to the deadline for submission of bids.

(e) Other Services (Schedule No. 5) Shall be quoted separately forTraining and Factory Acceptance Tests.

(f) Recommended spare parts shall be quoted separately (Schedule 7)as specified in either subparagraph (a) or (b) above in accordancewith the origin of the spare parts.

18.5 The current edition of Incoterms, published by the International Chamberof Commerce shall govern.

18.6 The prices shall be either fixed or adjustable as specified in the BDS.

(a) In the case of Fixed Price, prices quoted by the Bidder shall be fixedduring the Bidder’s performance of the contract and not subject tovariation on any account. A bid submitted with an adjustable pricequotation will be treated as non-responsive and rejected.

(b) In the case of Adjustable Price, prices quoted by the Bidder shall besubject to adjustment during performance of the contract to reflectchanges in the cost elements such as labor, material, transport andcontractor’s equipment in accordance with the procedures specified inthe corresponding Appendix to the Contract Agreement. A bidsubmitted with a fixed price quotation will not be rejected, but theprice adjustment will be treated as zero. Bidders are required toindicate the source of labor and material indices in the correspondingForm in Section 4: (Bidding Forms).

18.7 If so indicated in BDS 1.1, bids are being invited for individual lots(contracts) or for any combination of lots (packages). Bidders wishing tooffer any price reduction (discount) for the award of more than onecontract shall specify in their Letter of Price Bid the price reductionsapplicable to each package, or alternatively, to individual contracts withinthe package, and the manner in which the price reductions will apply.

19 Currencies ofBid andPayment

19.1 The currency(ies) of the bid shall be, as specified in the BDS.

19.2 Bidders shall indicate in the Schedule of Prices and the Letter of Bid theportion of the bid price that corresponds to expenditures incurred in thecurrency of the Employer’s country.

19.3 Bidders expecting to incur expenditures in other currencies for inputs tothe Facilities supplied from outside the Employer’s country and wishing tobe paid accordingly may indicate in the Schedule of Prices and the Letterof Bid up to three foreign currencies of their choice.




20 Period ofValidity of Bids

20.1 Bids shall remain valid for the period specified in the BDS after the bidsubmission deadline date prescribed by the Employer. A bid valid for ashorter period shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive.

20.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the bid validityperiod, the Employer may request Bidders to extend the period of validityof their bids. The request and the responses shall be made in writing. Ifa bid security is requested in accordance with ITB 21, it shall also beextended for a corresponding period. A Bidder may refuse the requestwithout forfeiting its bid security. A Bidder granting the request shall notbe required or permitted to modify its bid.

21 Bid Security 21.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, the Bidder shall furnish as part ofits bid, in original form, either a Bid Securing Declaration or a bid securityas specified in the BDS. In the case of a bid security, the amount shall beas specified in the BDS.

21.2 The bid security shall be a demand guarantee, at the Bidder’s option, inany of the following forms:

(a) an unconditional bank guarantee; or(b) an irrevocable letter of credit; or(c) a cashier’s or certified check;

Through the Trade Bank of Iraq. The bid security shall be submittedeither using the Bid Security Form included in Section 5: (BiddingForms), in the case of a bank guarantee, or in another substantiallysimilar format approved by the Employer prior to bid submission. Ineither case, the form must include the complete name of the Bidder. Thebid security shall be valid for One hundred and twenty days (120) beyondthe original validity period of the bid, or beyond any period of extension ifrequested under ITB 20.2.

21.3 If a bid security is specified, any bid not complying with ITB 21.1 and ITB21.2, shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive.

21.4 If a bid security is specified pursuant to ITB 21.1, the bid security of thesuccessful Bidder shall be returned as promptly as possible once thesuccessful Bidder has signed the Contract and furnished the requiredperformance security.

21.5 If a bid security is specified pursuant to ITB 21.1, the bid security ofunsuccessful Bidders shall be returned as promptly as possible upon thesuccessful Bidder’s furnishing of the performance security pursuant to ITB43.

21.6 The bid security may be forfeited:

(a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid validity specifiedby the Bidder on the Letter of Bid Form, except as provided in ITB20.2 or

(b) if the successful Bidder fails to:- sign the Contract in accordance with ITB 42;- Furnish a performance security in accordance with ITB 43; or- Furnish a domestic preference security if so required.

21.7 The Bid Security of a JV shall be in the name of the JV that submits thebid. If the JV has not been legally constituted at the time of bidding, the




Bid Security shall be in the names of all future partners as named in theletter of intent referred to in ITB 4.1.

21.8 If a bid securing declaration is executed in accordance with ITB 21.1, theEmployer will declare the Bidder ineligible to be awarded a contract by theEmployer for the period of time stated in the Form of Bid SecuringDeclaration.

22 Format andSigning of Bid

22.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the Technical Bid and oneoriginal of the Price Bid comprising the Bid as described in ITB 11 andclearly mark it “ORIGINAL - TECHNICAL BID” and “ORIGINAL - PRICEBID”. Alternative bids, if permitted in accordance with 13 13, shall beclearly marked “ALTERNATIVE”. In addition, the Bidder shall submitcopies of the bid, in the number specified in the BDS and clearly markeach of them “COPY.” In the event of any discrepancy between theoriginal and the copies, the original shall prevail.

22.2 The original and all copies of the Bid shall be typed or written in indelibleink and shall be signed by a person duly authorized to sign on behalf ofthe Bidder. This authorization shall consist of a written confirmation asspecified in the BDS and shall be attached to the bid. The name andposition held by each person signing the authorization must be typed orprinted below the signature. All pages of the bid where entries oramendments have been made shall be signed or initialled by the personsigning the bid.

22.3 A bid submitted by a JV shall be signed so as to be legally binding on allpartners.

22.4 Any interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid only if they aresigned or initialled by the person signing the bid.

D. Submission and Opening of Bids

23 Submission,Sealing andMarking of Bids

23.1 Bidders may submit their bids by mail or by hand. When so specified inthe BDS, bidders shall have the option of submitting their bidselectronically. Procedures for submission, sealing and marking are asfollows:

(a) Bidders submitting bids by mail or by hand shall enclose the originaland each copy of the Bid, including alternative bids, if permitted inaccordance with ITB 13, in separate sealed envelopes, duly markingthe envelopes as “ORIGINAL”, “ALTERNATIVE” and “COPY.” Theseenvelopes containing the original and the copies shall then beenclosed in one single envelope. The rest of the procedure shall bein accordance with ITB sub-Clauses 23.2 and 23.3.

(b) Bidders submitting bids electronically shall follow the electronic bidsubmission procedures specified in the BDS.

23.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall:

(a) bear the name and address of the Bidder;(b) be addressed to the Employer in accordance with ITB 24.1; and(c) bear the specific identification of this bidding process indicated in the

BDS 1.1.

23.3 The outer envelopes and the inner envelopes containing the TechnicalBid shall bear a warning not to open before the time and date for theopening of Technical Bid, in accordance with ITB Sub-Clause 27.1.




23.4 The inner envelopes containing the Price Bid shall bear a warning not toopen until advised by the Employer in accordance with ITB Sub-Clause27.7.

23.5 Alternative Bids, if permissible in accordance with ITB Clause 13, shall beprepared, sealed, marked, and delivered in accordance with theprovisions of ITB Clauses 20 and 21, with the inner envelopes marked inaddition “ALTERNATIVE NO. …. ” as appropriate.

23.6 If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required, the Employer willassume no responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening ofthe bid.

24 Deadline forSubmission ofBids

24.1 Bids must be received by the Employer at the address and no later thanthe date and time indicated in the BDS.

24.2 The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for thesubmission of bids by amending the Bidding Document in accordancewith ITB 8, in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer andBidders previously subject to the deadline shall thereafter be subject tothe deadline as extended.

25 Late Bids 25.1 The Employer shall not consider any bid that arrives after the deadline forsubmission of bids, in accordance with ITB 24. Any bid received by theEmployer after the deadline for submission of bids shall be declared late,rejected, and returned unopened to the Bidder.

26 Withdrawal,Substitution,andModification ofBids

26.1 A Bidder may withdraw, substitute, or modify its bid after it has beensubmitted by sending a written notice, duly signed by an authorizedrepresentative, and shall include a copy of the authorization inaccordance with ITB 22.2, (except that withdrawal notices do not requirecopies). The corresponding substitution or modification of the bid mustaccompany the respective written notice. All notices must be:

(a) prepared and submitted in accordance with ITB 22 and ITB 23(except that withdrawals notices do not require copies), and inaddition, the respective envelopes shall be clearly marked“Withdrawal,” “Substitution,” “Modification;” and

(b) Received by the Employer prior to the deadline prescribed forsubmission of bids, in accordance with ITB 24.

26.2 Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB 26.1 shall bereturned unopened to the Bidders.

26.3 No bid may be withdrawn, substituted, or modified in the interval betweenthe deadline for submission of bids and the expiration of the period of bidvalidity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Technical Bid or anyextension thereof.

27 Bid Opening 27.1 The Employer shall conduct the opening of Technical Bids in thepresence of Bidders` designated representatives who choose to attend,and at the address, date and time specified in the BDS. Any specificelectronic bid opening procedures required if electronic bidding ispermitted in accordance with ITB Sub-clause 23.1, shall be as specified inthe BDS. The Price Bids will remain unopened and will be held in custody




of the Employer until the specified time of their opening. If the TechnicalBid and the Price Bid are submitted together in one envelope, theEmployer may reject the entire Bid. Alternatively, the Price Proposal maybe immediately resealed for later evaluation.

27.2 First, envelopes marked “WITHDRAWAL” shall be opened and read outand the envelope with the corresponding bid shall not be opened, butreturned to the Bidder. No bid withdrawal shall be permitted unless thecorresponding withdrawal notice contains a valid authorization to requestthe withdrawal and is read out at bid opening.

27.3 Second, outer envelopes marked “SUBSTITUTION” shall be opened.The inner envelopes containing the Substitution Technical Bid and/orSubstitution Price Bid shall be exchanged for the correspondingenvelopes being substituted, which are to be returned to the Bidderunopened. Only the Substitution Technical Bid, if any, shall be opened,read out, and recorded. Substitution Price Bid will remain unopened inaccordance with ITB Sub-Clause 27.1. No envelope shall be substitutedunless the corresponding Substitution Notice contains a validauthorization to request the substitution and is read out and recorded atbid opening.

27.4 Next, outer envelopes marked “MODIFICATION” shall be opened. NoTechnical Bid and/or Price Bid shall be modified unless the correspondingModification Notice contains a valid authorization to request themodification and is read out and recorded at the opening of TechnicalBids. Only the Technical Bids, both Original as well as Modification, areto be opened, read out, and recorded at the opening. Price Bids, bothOriginal as well as Modification, will remain unopened in accordance withITB Sub-Clause 27.1.

27.5 All other envelopes holding the Technical Bids shall be opened one at atime, and the following read out and recorded:

(a) the name of the Bidder;

(b) whether there is a modification or substitution;

(c) the presence of a Bid Security, if required; and

(d) any other details as the Employer may consider appropriate.

27.6 Only Technical Bids and alternative Technical Bids read out and recorded atbid opening shall be considered for evaluation. No Bid shall be rejected atthe opening of Technical Bids except for late bids, in accordance with ITBSub-Clause 25.1.

27.7 The Employer shall prepare a record of the opening of Technical Bids thatshall include, as a minimum: the name of the Bidder and whether there isa withdrawal, substitution, or modification; and alternative proposals; andthe presence or absence of a bid security or a bid securing declaration, ifone was required. The Bidders’ representatives who are present shall berequested to sign the record. The omission of a Bidder’s signature on therecord shall not invalidate the contents and effect of the record. A copy ofthe record shall be distributed to all Bidders who submitted bids in time,and posted online when electronic bidding is permitted.

27.8 At the end of the evaluation of the Technical Bids, the Employer will invitebidders who have submitted substantially responsive Technical Bids andwho have been determined as being qualified for award to attend theopening of the Price Bids. The date, time, and location of the opening ofPrice Bids will be advised in writing by the Employer. Bidders shall begiven reasonable notice of the opening of Price Bids.




27.9 The Employer will notify Bidders who have been rejected in writing on thegrounds of their Technical Bids being substantially non-responsive to therequirements of the Bidding Document and return their Price Bidsunopened.

27.10 The Employer shall conduct the opening of Price Bids of all Bidders whosubmitted substantially responsive Technical Bids, in the presence ofBidders` representatives who choose to attend at the address, date andtime specified by the Employer. The Bidder’s representatives who arepresent shall be requested to sign a register evidencing their attendance.The omission of a Bidder’s signature on the record shall not invalidate thecontents and effect of the record.

27.11 All envelopes containing Price Bids shall be opened one at a time and thefollowing read out and recorded:

(a) the name of the Bidder;(b) whether there is a modification or substitution;(c) the Bid Prices, including any discounts and alternative offers; and(d) any other details as the Employer may consider appropriate.

Only Price Bids, discounts, and alternative offers read out and recordedduring the opening of Price Bids shall be considered for evaluation. No Bidshall be rejected at the opening of Price Bids.

27.12 The Employer shall prepare a record of the opening of Price Bids thatshall include, as a minimum: the name of the Bidder, the Bid Price (per lotif applicable), any discounts, and alternative offers. The Bidders’representatives who are present shall be requested to sign the record.The omission of a Bidder’s signature on the record shall not invalidate thecontents and effect of the record. A copy of the record shall be distributedto all Bidders who submitted bids in time, and posted online whenelectronic bidding is permitted.

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

28 Confidentiality 28.1 Information relating to the evaluation of bids and recommendation ofcontract award, shall not be disclosed to Bidders or any other persons notofficially concerned with such process until information on Contract awardis communicated to all Bidders.

28.2 Any attempt by a Bidder to influence the Employer in the evaluation of thebids or Contract award decisions may result in the rejection of its bid.

28.3 Notwithstanding ITB 28.2, from the time of bid opening to the time ofContract award, if any Bidder wishes to contact the Employer on anymatter related to the bidding process, it should do so in writing.

29 Clarification ofBids

29.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of the Technicaland Price Bids, and qualification of the Bidders, the Employer may, at itsdiscretion, ask any Bidder for a clarification of its bid. Any clarificationsubmitted by a Bidder that is not in response to a request by theEmployer shall not be considered. The Employer’s request forclarification and the response shall be in writing. No change in thesubstance of the Technical Bid or prices in the Price Bid shall be sought,offered, or permitted, except to confirm the correction of arithmetic errorsdiscovered by the Employer in the evaluation of the bids, in accordancewith ITB 36.




29.2 If a Bidder does not provide clarifications of its bid by the date and timeset in the Employer’s request for clarification, its bid may be rejected.

30 Deviations,Reservations,and Omissions

30.1 During the evaluation of bids, the following definitions apply:

(a) “Deviation” is a departure from the requirements specified in theBidding Document;

(b) “Reservation” is the setting of limiting conditions or withholding fromcomplete acceptance of the requirements specified in the BiddingDocument; and

(c) “Omission” is the failure to submit part or all of the information ordocumentation required in the Bidding Document.

31 PreliminaryExaminationof TechnicalBids

31.1 The Employer shall examine the Technical Bid to confirm that alldocuments and technical documentation requested in ITB Sub-Clause11.2. have been provided, and to determine the completeness of eachdocument submitted. If any of these documents or information is missing,the Bid may be rejected.

31.2 The Employer shall confirm that the following documents and informationhave been provided in the Technical Bid. If any of these documents orinformation is missing, the offer shall be rejected.

(a) Letter of Technical Bid;(b) written confirmation of authorization to commit the Bidder;(c) Bid Security, if applicable; and(d) Technical Proposal in accordance with ITB 17.

32 Responsivenessof TechnicalBid

32.1 The Employer’s determination of a bid’s responsiveness is to be basedon the contents of the bid itself, as defined in ITB 11.

32.2 A substantially responsive Technical Bid is one that meets therequirements of the Bidding Document without material deviation,reservation, or omission. A material deviation, reservation, or omission isone that,

(a) if accepted, would:- affect in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of

the Project and services specified in the Contract; or- limit in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding

Document, the Employer’s rights or the Bidder’s obligations underthe proposed Contract; or

(b) if rectified, would unfairly affect the competitive position of otherBidders presenting substantially responsive bids.

32.3 The Employer shall examine the technical aspects of the Bid submitted inaccordance with Technical Proposal, in particular to confirm that allrequirements of Section 7: to Section 12: & Section 16: (Employer’sRequirements) have been met without any material deviation orreservation.

32.4 If a bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of the BiddingDocument, it shall be rejected by the Employer and may not subsequentlybe made responsive by correction of the material deviation, reservation,




or omission.

33 NonmaterialNonconformities

33.1 Provided that a Bid is substantially responsive, the Employer may waiveany nonconformity in the bid that do not constitute a material deviation,reservation or omission.

33.2 Provided that a Bid is substantially responsive, the Employer may requestthat the Bidder submit the necessary information or documentation, withina reasonable period of time, to rectify nonmaterial nonconformities in theBid related to documentation requirements. Requesting information ordocumentation on such nonconformities shall not be related to any aspectof the Price Bid. Failure of the Bidder to comply with the request mayresult in the rejection of its Bid.

33.3 Provided that a Bid is substantially responsive, the Employer shall rectifynonmaterial nonconformities related to the Bid Price. To this effect, theBid Price shall be adjusted, for comparison purposes only, to reflect theprice of a missing or non-conforming item or component. The adjustmentshall be made using the method indicated in Section 3: (Evaluation andQualification Criteria).

34 DetailedEvaluation ofTechnical Bids

34.1 The Employer will carry out a detailed technical evaluation of the bids notpreviously rejected as being substantially non-responsive, in order todetermine whether the technical aspects are in compliance with theBidding Document. In order to reach such a determination, the Employerwill examine and compare the technical aspects of the bids on the basisof the information supplied by the bidders, taking into account thefollowing:

(a) overall completeness and compliance with the Employer’sRequirements; deviations from the Employer’s Requirements;conformity of the Project and services offered with specifiedperformance criteria; suitability of the Project and services offered inrelation to the environmental and climatic conditions prevailing at thesite; and quality, function and operation of any process control conceptincluded in the bid. The bid that does not meet minimum acceptablestandards of completeness, consistency and detail will be rejected fornon-responsiveness;

(b) type, quantity and long-term availability of mandatory andrecommended spare parts and maintenance services; and

(c) other relevant factors, if any, listed in Section 3: Evaluation andQualification Criteria).

34.2 Where alternative technical solutions have been allowed in accordancewith ITB 13, and offered by the Bidder, the Employer will make a similarevaluation of the alternatives. Where alternatives have not been allowedbut have been offered, they shall be ignored.

35 Eligibility andQualification ofthe Bidder

35.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction during the evaluation ofTechnical Bids whether a Bidder meets the eligibility and qualifyingcriteria specified in Section 3: (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).

35.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination of thedocumentary evidence of the Bidder’s qualifications submitted by theBidder, pursuant to ITB 15.

35.3 An affirmative determination shall be a prerequisite for the opening and




evaluation of a Bidder’s Price Bid. A negative determination shall resultinto the disqualification of the Bid, in which event the Employer shallreturn the unopened Price Bid to the Bidder.

35.4 The capabilities of the manufacturers and subcontractors proposed in itsBid to be used by the Bidder will also be evaluated for acceptability inaccordance with Section 3: (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria). Theirparticipation should be confirmed with a letter of intent between theparties, as needed. Should a manufacturer or subcontractor bedetermined to be unacceptable, the Bid will not be rejected, but the Bidderwill be required to substitute an acceptable manufacturer or subcontractorwithout any change to the bid price. Prior to signing the Contract, thecorresponding Appendix to the Contract Agreement shall be completed,listing the approved manufacturers or subcontractors for each itemconcerned.

36 Correction ofArithmeticalErrors

36.1 During the evaluation of Price Bids, the Employer shall correctarithmetical errors on the following basis:

(a) where there are errors between the total of the amounts given underthe column for the price breakdown and the amount given under theTotal Price, the former shall prevail and the latter will be correctedaccordingly;

(b) where there are errors between the total of the amounts of ScheduleNos. 1 to 5 and the amount given in Schedule No. 6 (GrandSummary), the former shall prevail and the latter will be correctedaccordingly; and

(c) if there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the amount inwords shall prevail, unless the amount expressed in words is related toan arithmetical error, in which case the amount in figures shall prevailsubject to (a) and (b) above.

36.2 If the Bidder that submitted the lowest evaluated bid does not accept thecorrection of errors, its bid shall be disqualified and its bid security may beforfeited or its bid securing declaration executed.

37 Conversion toSingleCurrency

37.1 For evaluation and comparison purposes, the currency(ies) of the bidshall be converted into a single currency as specified in the BDS.

38 Margin ofPreference

38.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, a margin of preference shall notapply.

39 Evaluation ofPrice Bids

39.1 The Employer shall use the criteria and methodologies listed in thisClause. No other evaluation criteria or methodologies shall be permitted.

39.2 To evaluate a Price Bid, the Employer shall consider the following:

(a) the bid price, excluding provisional sums and the provision, if any, forcontingencies in the Price Schedules;

(b) price adjustment for correction of arithmetical errors in accordancewith ITB 36.1;

(c) price adjustment due to discounts offered in accordance with ITB 18.7;(d) converting the amount resulting from applying (a) to (c) above, if

relevant, to a single currency in accordance with ITB 37; and




(e) the evaluation factors indicated in Section 3: (Evaluation andQualification Criteria).

39.3 If price adjustment is allowed in accordance with ITB 18.6, the estimatedeffect of the price adjustment provisions of the Conditions of Contract,applied over the period of execution of the Contract, shall not be takeninto account in bid evaluation.

39.4 If this Bidding Document allows Bidders to quote separate prices fordifferent lots (contracts), and the award to a single Bidder of multiple lots(contracts), the methodology to determine the lowest evaluated price ofthe lot (contract) combinations, including any discounts offered in theLetter of Price Bid, is specified in Section 3: (Evaluation andQualification Criteria).

39.5 If the bid, which results in the lowest Evaluated Bid Price, is seriouslyunbalanced or front loaded in the opinion of the Employer, the Employermay require the Bidder to produce detailed price analyses for any or allitems of the Price Schedules, to demonstrate the internal consistency ofthose prices with the methods and time schedule proposed. Afterevaluation of the price analyses, taking into consideration the terms ofpayments, the Employer may require that the amount of the performancesecurity be increased at the expense of the Bidder to a level sufficient toprotect the Employer against financial loss in the event of default of thesuccessful Bidder under the Contract.

40 Comparison ofBids

40.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive Bids todetermine the lowest evaluated bid, in accordance with ITB 39.2.

41 Employer’sRight to AcceptAny Bid, and toReject Any orAll Bids

41.1 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any bid, and to annulthe bidding process and reject all bids at any time prior to contract award,without thereby incurring any liability to Bidders. In case of annulment, allbids submitted and specifically, bid securities, shall be promptly returnedto the Bidders.

F. Award of Contract

42 Award Criteria 42.1 The Employer shall award the Contract to the Bidder whose offer hasbeen determined to be the lowest evaluated bid and is substantiallyresponsive to the Bidding Document, provided further that the Bidder isdetermined to be eligible and qualified to perform the Contractsatisfactorily.

42.2 The Employer reserves the right to accept any of the deviations submittedin accordance with ITB 18.2 by the lowest evaluated bidder, at the priceshown for the deviation in the bid.

43 Notification ofAward

43.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of bid validity, the Employer shallnotify the successful Bidder, in writing, that its bid has been accepted.The notification letter (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract andContract Forms called the “Letter of Acceptance”) shall specify the sumthat the Employer will pay the Contractor in consideration of the executionand completion of the Project and services (hereinafter and in theConditions of Contract and Contract Forms called “the Contract Price”).

43.2 The winning Bidder and the unsuccessful Bidders will be informed in




writing

43.3 Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, the notification of awardshall constitute a binding Contract.

43.4 The Employer shall promptly respond in writing to any unsuccessfulBidder who, after notification of award in accordance with ITB 43.1,requests in writing the grounds on which its bid was not selected.

44 Signing ofContract

44.1 Promptly after notification, the Employer shall send the successful Bidderthe Draft Contract Agreement.

44.2 Within Fourteen (14) days of receipt of the Contract Agreement, thesuccessful Bidder shall sign the Contract Agreement in the presence ofboth parties

45 PerformanceSecurity

45.1 Within fourteen (14) days of the receipt of notification of award from theEmployer, the successful Bidder shall furnish the performance security inaccordance with the conditions of contract, subject to ITB 39.5, using forthat purpose the Performance Security Form included in Section 13:(Contract Forms), or another form acceptable to the Employer. Theperformance bond shall be from any reliable bank via the Trade Bank ofIraq (TBI). The performance bond shall be released at the successfulcompletion and the end of the warranty period.

45.2 Failure of the successful Bidder to submit the above-mentionedPerformance Security or sign the Contract shall constitute sufficientgrounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the bid securityor execution of the bid securing declaration. In that event the Employermay award the Contract to the next lowest evaluated Bidder whose offeris substantially responsive and is determined by the Employer to bequalified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.

45.3 The above provision shall also apply to the furnishing of a domesticpreference security if so required.



Section 2 - Bid Data Sheet 2-24

SECTION 2: BID DATA SHEET (BDS)This section consists of provisions that are specific to each procurement and supplement the information orrequirements included in Section 1: - Instructions to Bidders.

2.1 A. INTRODUCTION

ITB 1.1The number of the Invitation for Bids is : P.C.35 /NT/ 2013

The Employer is: General Directorate of Electrical Transmission Projects, ETP

The name of the ICB is: Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, WorkExecution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining projects (substations):-

AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation

The identification number of the ICB is: P.C..35 /NT/2013The number and identification of lots (contracts) comprising this ICB is: one(01)

ITB 1.3 Overall Completion Period: Maximum 630 days from the Contract Effective Date

Penalties for delayed shipments shall be charged as per the PCC 37

ITB 4 This invitation to Bid is open to all the prospective Bidders

ITB 5.2 The major equipment & materials are specified in Appendix 5 (List of Major Items ofSupply and Services and List of Approved Subcontractors) to the ContractAgreement.

Optical Fibre Cable is to be from West Europe, USA & Japan

XLPE power cables 132 kV shall be from USA , JAPAN , SOUTH KOREA , WESTEUROPE , SAUDI ARABIA , TURKEY , EGEPT , IRAN , MALAYSIA

straight Joints, cross bonding Joints, Outdoor type conventional terminations forXLPE power cables shall be from ABB (SWITZERLAND) , NEXANS(SWITZERLAND) , BRUGG (SWITZERLAND) , PRYSMIAN (ITALY) ,ELASTIMOLD (USA) PFISTERER(SWITZERLAND)

Employer reserves the rights to accept or reject other countries of origin of otherProject and equipment, after careful evaluation based on the details provided in theBid proposal.




2.2 B. BIDDING DOCUMENTS

ITB 7.1 For clarification purposes only, the Employer’s address is:

Attention: Mr.Mohammed Fawzi AL-Zaidi

Director General – Electrical Transmission Projects

General Directorate of Electrical Transmission Projects

Ministry of Electricity

Al Mustinsiria Sq,

Baghdad

Republic of Iraq

Telephone: +964 TBD _____________

Facsimile number: +964 TBD _______________

Electronic mail address: [email protected]

ITB 7.4 A Pre-Bid meeting will not take place.

7.2 Site Visits: Site visits are required, contractor may arrange by himself

2.3 C. PREPARATION OF BIDS

ITB 11.2 (k) The Bidder shall submit with its Technical Bid the following additional documents:

1. Place of registration and principal place of business.

2. Legal Status

3. Written power of attorney

All mandatory documents listed in the Schedule 6 of Section 11: – Employer’s

requirements, Part D-Supplementary Information. including

1. Schedule of manufacturers, place of manufacture and testing2. Schedule of technical particulars and guarantees3. Schedules of departures from specifications4. Schedule of manufacturers’ and subcontractors’ statement of

experience.5. Schedule of other documents and drawings to be submitted with the Bid.6. Any other material required to be completed and submitted by Bidders

in accordance with these instructions to Bidders.7. Bids shall include the details of their local agent.




ITB 13.1 Alternative bids are not permitted in accordance with ITB 13.3

ITB 13.2 Alternatives to the Time Schedule shall not be permitted.

ITB 13.4 Alternative technical solutions shall be permitted for the following parts of theProject and services: Not Permitted.

ITB 15.1 This Bid is open to all the prospective bidders and are required to provide detaileddocuments for this purpose.

ITB 16.1(b) The period following completion of Project and services in accordance withprovisions of contract shall be 360 days.

ITB 18.1 Bidders shall quote for the entire Project and services on a single responsibilitybasis.

Bidders are also advised to consider the cost of environmental compliance requiredunder this project.

ITB 18.4(a)(i) The Inco term for quoting Project to be supplied from abroad is: CIP

ITB 18.4(a)(ii) The following is added to item (ii)

All taxes and fees subjected to laws and regulations in Iraq.

ITB 18.4(b)(i) The Inco term for quoting Project manufactured within the Employer’s country is:

EXW.

ITB 18.6 The prices quoted by the Bidder shall be adjustable. The price adjustment will bespecified in the Appendix 2 to the Contract Agreement - Price Escalation ( Section13: -Contract Forms)

Contract payments will be made on actual measured quantities and based on ratesgiven in Section 4: - Bidding Forms-Price Schedules.

ITB 19.1 The prices shall be quoted Euro or United States Dollars (USD) only. .

For purposes of payment: A Bidder shall identify the portion of the bid price thatcorresponds to expenditures incurred in the currency of the Employer’s country,which shall be paid in this currency;

ITB 20.1 The bid validity period shall be 120 days.

ITB 21.1 The Bidder is required to Furnish a Bid Security. Value of the Bid Security is 1% ofBid Price

ITB 22.1 In addition to the original of the Bid, the number of copies is: 3 (Three)




Marking the envelopes of bids as “ORIGINAL”, “FIRST COPY” and “SECONDCOPY” and “THIRD COPY”.

ITB 22.2 The written confirmation of authorization to sign on behalf of the Bidder shall consistof Power of Attorney properly attested by a notary.




2.4 D. SUBMISSION AND OPENING OF BIDS

ITB 23.1 Bidders shall not have the option of submitting their bids electronically.

ITB 23.1(b) Electronic Bids Not Permitted.

ITB 24.1 For bid submission purposes only, the Employer’s address is

Commercial Department



Al Mustinsiria Sq,

Baghdad

Republic of Iraq

Telephone: +964 TBD _____________

Facsimile number: +964 TBD _______________

Electronic mail address: 71_DG@moelc. gove. iqThe deadline for bid submission isDate: / / 2013Time: xx. xx hrs

ITB 27.1 The bid opening of Technical Bids shall take place at:



Al Mustinsiria Sq.

Baghdad

Republic of Iraq

Date: On the date of submission as same as in ITB 24.1

Time: Immediately after the time in ITB 24.1




2.5 E. EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS

ITB 37.1 The currency that shall be used for bid evaluation and comparison purposes toconvert all bid prices expressed in various currencies into a single currency is:Currency of United States Dollars (USD)

The source of exchange rate shall be: Selling exchange rate determined by theCentral Bank of Iraq.

The date for the exchange rate shall be: Date of opening of the Bids

ITB 38.1 A margin of preference shall not be applied

If a margin of preference applies, the application methodology will be as specified inSection 3:

2.6 F. AWARD OF CONTRACT

ITB 44 Signing of contract 14 days from the receipt of Notification of Award and ContractAgreement.

ITB 45 Performance Security 10% of the Bid (Bid or Contract) price. (5% for the supply ofmaterial and 5% for all other works: civil and execution works)

Shall be from any reliable bank via the Trade Bank of Iraq (TBI) and to be submittedto the Employer within 14 days from the contract award, before signing of theContract Agreement.



Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria 3-30

SECTION 3: EVALUATION AND QUALIFICATION CRITERIAThis Section contains all the criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids and qualify Bidders. Inaccordance with ITB 34 and ITB 35, no other methods, criteria and factors shall be used. The Bidder shallprovide all the information requested in the forms included in Section 4: & Section 5: (Bidding Forms).

3.1 EVALUATION

3.1.1 Technical EvaluationIn addition to the criteria listed in ITB 34.1(a) – (c) the following factors shall apply:Criteria given in ITB 28 to ITB 35

3.1.2 Economic EvaluationAny adjustments in price that result from the procedures outlined below shall be added, for purposes ofcomparative evaluation only, to arrive at an “Evaluated Bid Price” Bid prices quoted by bidders shall remainunaltered.

3.1.2.1 Quantifiable Deviations and Omissions

Quantifiable Deviations and Omissions from the contractual obligations: the evaluation shall be based on theevaluated cost of fulfilling the contract in compliance with all contractual obligations under this biddingdocument. The Employer will assess the cost of such a deviation for the purpose of ensuring faircomparison of bids.

3.1.2.2 Time Schedule

Time to complete the Project and services from the effective date specified in Article 3 of the ContractAgreement for determining time for completion of pre-commissioning activities is:As specified in PCCNo credit will be given for earlier completion.

3.1.2.3 Operating and Maintenance Cost

Not Applicable

3.1.2.4 Functional Guarantees of the facilities

Guarantees specified in the Appendix (Functional Guarantees) to the Contract Agreement

3.1.2.5 Work, services, facilities, etc. , to be provided by the Employer

As specified in GCC

3.1.2.6 Specific additional criteria

Nil




3.1.2.7 Domestic Preference: Domestic Preference is not applicable

A margin of preference will be granted to eligible domestically produced Project and Equipment inaccordance with the following provisions:

a. The preference margin shall not be applied to the whole facilities but only to the eligible domesticallyproduced Project and Equipment within the contract;

b. Project and Equipment offered from outside the Purchaser’s country shall be quoted CIP (Section 4:, Bidding Forms, Schedule No. 1) and Project and Equipment offered locally shall be quoted EXW(ex-works, ex-factory, ex warehouse, ex showroom, or off the-shelf, as applicable) free of sales andsimilar taxes

c. all other cost components for services and works such as costs for , local handling, transportation,storage, installation, and commissioning shall be quoted separately (Section 4: :, Bidding Forms,Schedule No. 3 - Services and Schedule No. 4 - Installation and Other Services);

d. in the comparison of Bids, only the CIP price component of each Bid for the Project and Equipmentoffered from outside the Purchaser’s country shall be increased by the applicable duty and othertaxes payable by a non-exempt importer or by fifteen per cent(15%) whichever is less;

e. if duties vary from item to item within the contract, the appropriate tariff for each item of Project andEquipment shall apply;

f. no margin of preference shall be applied to any of the services or works included in the contract; and

g. Bidders shall not be permitted or required to modify the mix of local and foreign Project andEquipment after bid opening.

3.2 TECHNICAL ALTERNATIVESTechnical alternatives, if permitted under ITB 13.4, will be evaluated as follows:Technical Alternatives are not permitted.




3.3 QUALIFICATION

3.3.1 Eligibility

Criteria Compliance Requirements Documents

Requirement Single Entity

Joint VentureSubmission

RequirementsAll PartnersCombined

EachPartner

At LeastOne

Partner

3.3.1.1 Nationality

Nationality in accordance withITB Sub-Clause 4.2.

must meetrequirement



notapplicable

FormsELI - 1; ELI - 2

with attachments

3.3.1.2 Conflict of Interest

No conflicts of interest inaccordance with ITB Sub-Clause4.3.




notapplicable

Letter of TechnicalBid

3.3.1.3 Eligibility in Iraq regarding a Firm

Not having been declaredineligible by Republic of Iraq, asdescribed in ITB Sub-Clause 4.4




notapplicable

Letter of TechnicalBid

3.3.1.4 Government-owned Entity

Bidder required to meetconditions of ITB Sub-Clause4.5.




notapplicable

Forms ELI - 1;ELI - 2

with attachments

3.3.1.5 UN Eligibility Regarding a Country

Not having been excluded by anact of compliance with UNSecurity Council resolution inaccordance with ITB Sub-Clause4.6.




notapplicable

Letter ofTechnical Bid




3.3.2 Pending Litigation

Criteria Compliance Requirements Documents

Requirement Single Entity

Joint Venture

SubmissionRequirementsAll Partners

CombinedEach

PartnerOne

Partner

3.3.2.1 Pending Litigation

All pending litigation shallbe treated as resolvedagainst the Bidder and soshall in total not representmore than hundred (100)per cent of the Bidder’s networth.

must meetrequirementby itself or aspartner topast orexisting JV

notapplicable

must meetrequirementby itself oras partnerto past orexisting JV

notapplicable

Form LIT – 1




Financial SituationCriteria Compliance Requirements Documents

Requirement SingleEntity

Joint Venture SubmissionRequirementsAll Partners

CombinedEach

PartnerOne

Partner

3.3.2.2 Historical Financial Performance

Submission of audited balancesheets or, if not required by thelaw of the Bidder’s country,other financial statementsacceptable to the Employer, forthe last one (630 days) todemonstrate the currentsoundness of the Biddersfinancial position and itsprospective long-termprofitability.


notapplicable


notapplicable

Form FIN - 1 withattachments

\

3.3.2.3 Average Annual Turnover

Minimum average annualturnover of US$ 19.8 millions.Calculated as total certifiedpayments received for contractsin progress or completed, withinthe last three(03) years



must meet25%

of therequirement

must meet40%

of therequirement

Form FIN – 2

3.3.2.4 Financial Resources

Using Forms FIN – 3 and FIN -4 in Section 4: Section 5:(Bidding Forms) the Biddermust demonstrate access to, oravailability of, financialresources such as liquidassets, unencumbered realassets, lines of credit, and otherfinancial means, other than anycontractual advance paymentsto meet:(1) the following cash-flowrequirement, US $3. 85 million ,and(2) the overall cash flowrequirements for this contractand its current workscommitment.



must meet25%of the

requirement

must meet40%of the

requirement

Form FIN – 3




3.3.3 ExperienceCriteria Compliance Requirements Documents

Requirement SingleEntity

Joint VentureSubmission

RequirementsAll

PartnersCombined

EachPartner One Partner

3.3.3.1 General Experience

Experience under contracts in therole of contractor, subcontractor,or management contractor for atleast the last five (05) years priorto the bid submission deadline.


notapplicable


notapplicable

Form EXP – 1

3.3.3.2 Specific Experience

(a) Contracts of Similar Size and NatureParticipation as contractor,management contractor, or mainsubcontractor, in at least. . onecontract within the last ten(10)years, each with a value of atleast US$ 12 million that havebeen successfully or aresubstantially completed and thatare similar to the proposedProject and services. Thesimilarity shall be based on thephysical size, complexity,methods, technology or othercharacteristics as described inSections on (Employer’sRequirements)



notapplicable

notapplicable

Form EXP -2(a)

(b) Experience in Key ActivitiesFor the above or other contractsexecuted during the periodstipulated in 3.3.3.2(a) above, aminimum experience in thefollowing key activities:

must meetall

requirements

must meetall

requirements

notapplicable

notapplicable

Form EXP -2(b)

,construction & Commission of……………………………………

must meetall

requirements

must meetall

requirements

notapplicable

notapplicable

EXP - 2(b)




3.3.4 PersonnelThe Bidder must demonstrate that it has the personnel for the key positions that meet the followingrequirements:

The Bidder shall provide details of the proposed personnel and their experience records in the relevantInformation Forms included in Section 5: (Bidding Forms).

3.3.5 EquipmentThe Bidder must demonstrate that it has the key equipment listed hereafter:

No. Equipment Type and Characteristics Min. Number Required

1 Equipment for civil construction Adequate

2 Equipment for electrical construction Adequate

3 Cable Pulling Equipment Adequate (Own or rented)

4 Equipment for testing and commissioning Adequate

The Bidder shall provide further details of proposed items of equipment using the relevant Form in Section 4:& Section 5: (Bidding Forms)

No. PositionTotal WorkExperience

[years]

Experience InSimilar Work

[years]

1 Project Manager 10 05

2 Office Engineers 10 05

3 Site Engineers 05 05

4 Construction supervisors 05 05




3.3.6 SubcontractorsSubcontractors/manufacturers for the following major items of supply or services must meet the followingminimum criteria, herein listed for that item. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in rejection ofthe subcontractor.

Item No. Description of Item Minimum Criteria to be met

1

Manufacturers of eachmain equipment listed inChapter SupplementaryInformation, Section 11:– Employer’srequirement

Manufacturers shall have a minimum of fifteen (15) yearssuccessful experience in manufacturing comparableequipment, of rated voltage and capacity, to the equipmentoffered under the contract.In respect of each main equipment offered under this bid, thebidder shall ensure that equipment identical in design hadbeen in service for a minimum period of five years. If theoffered equipment is manufactured under license, the serviceexperience of equipment manufactured by the parentcompany shall not be counted as service experience of thelicensee’s equipment

2 Subcontractors – Civil Five year experience in similar works

3 Subcontractors –Electrical Five year experience in similar works

4 Subcontractors –Mechanical Five years’ experience in similar works

In the case of a Bidder who offers to supply and install major items of supply under the contract that theBidder did not manufacture or otherwise produce, the Bidder shall provide the manufacturer’s authorization,using the form provided in Section 4: & Section 5: (Bidding Forms), showing that the Bidder has been dulyauthorized by the manufacturer or producer of the related Project and equipment or component to supplyand install that item in the Employer’s country. The Bidder is responsible for ensuring that the manufactureror producer complies with the requirements of ITB 4 and 5 and meets the minimum criteria listed above forthat item.

TENDER NO. PC 35 /NT/ 2013GENERAL DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION PROJECTS


Section 4 - Bidding Forms Price Bid 4 -38

SECTION 4: PRICE BID BIDDING FORMSThis Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.

4.1 LETTER OF PRICE BID

Letter of Price Bid[Bidder’s Letterhead]

Date: ..................................................

ICB No.: ............. P.C.35 /NT/ 2013

Invitation for Bid No.: .........................

To: Director General – Electric Transmission ProjectsGeneral Directorate of Electric Transmission ProjectsMinistry of ElectricityAl Mustinsiria Sq.BaghdadRepublic of Iraq

We, the undersigned, declare that:

a. We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Document, including Addenda issued inaccordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) 8;

b. We offer to manufacture, test, deliver, install, pre-commission and commission in conformity with theBidding Document the following Project and Services

c. P.C.35 /NT/2013 Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, WorkExecution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining projects (substations):-

• AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation

• AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation

• AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation

d. The total price of our Bid, excluding any discounts offered in item (d) below is the sum of: xxxxxxxx

e. The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are: xxxxxxxx

f. Our bid shall be valid for a period of... 120 (one hundred and twenty) days from the date fixed for thesubmission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain binding upon usand may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;

g. If our bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a performance security in accordance with the BiddingDocument;

h. We have paid, or will pay the following commissions, gratuities, or fees with respect to the biddingprocess or execution of the Contract: **




Name of Recipient Address Reason Amount

......................................... ....................................... ................................ ......................

......................................... ....................................... ................................ ......................

i. We understand that this bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in your notificationof award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal contract is prepared andexecuted; and

j. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other bid that youmay receive.

Name .................................................................................................................................................

In the capacity of ...............................................................................................................................

Signed ...............................................................................................................................................

Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of .........................................................................

Date ...................................................................................................................................................

** If none has been paid or is to be paid, indicate “none”




4.2 PRICE SCHEDULES

PREAMBLEGeneral

1. The Price Schedules are divided into separate Schedules as follows:

Schedule No. 1: Major Project & Equipment

Schedule No. 2: Mandatory Spare Parts

Schedule No. 3: Design Services (not applicable)

Schedule No. 4: Civil Works, Electrical Works & Installation

Schedule No. 5: Other Services

Schedule No. 6: Grand Summary

Schedule No. 7: Recommended Tools and Spare Parts

Schedule No. 8: Tools and Appliances (Provisional)

Schedule No. 9: Day Works (Provisional)

Schedule No. 10: Schedule of Major Items of Constructional Project

2. The Schedules do not generally give a full description of the Project to be supplied and the services tobe performed under each item. Bidders shall be deemed to have read the Employer’s Requirementsand other sections of the Bidding Document and reviewed the Drawings to ascertain the full scope ofthe requirements included in each item prior to filling in the rates and prices. The entered rates andprices shall be deemed to cover the full scope as aforesaid, including overheads and profit.

3. If bidders are unclear or uncertain as to the scope of any item, they shall seek clarification inaccordance with ITB 7 prior to submitting their bid.

Pricing

4. Prices shall be filled in indelible ink, and any alterations necessary due to errors, etc., shall be initialledby the Bidder.As specified in the Bid Data Sheet and Special Conditions of Contract, prices shall be fixed and firm forthe duration of the Contract, or prices shall be subject to adjustment in accordance with thecorresponding Appendix (Price Adjustment) to the Contract Agreement.

5. Bid prices shall be quoted in the manner indicated and in the currencies specified in the Instructions toBidders in the Bidding Document.For each item, bidders shall complete each appropriate column in the respective Schedules, giving theprice breakdown as indicated in the Schedules.Prices given in the Schedules against each item shall be for the scope covered by that item as detailedin Section 7: to Section 12: & Section 16: (Employer’s Requirements) or elsewhere in the BiddingDocument.

6. Payments will be made to the Contractor in the currency or currencies indicated under each respectiveitem.

7. When requested by the Employer for the purposes of making payments or part payments, valuingvariations or evaluating claims, or for such other purposes as the Employer may reasonably require, theContractor shall provide the Employer with a breakdown of any composite or lump sum items includedin the Schedules.




8. These quantities are only estimated values. However the payment will be made on actual quantities onmeasure and pay basis.

9. Where a nil quantity is shown a rate shall nevertheless be entered.

10. Items left blank will be deemed to have been included in other items. The TOTAL for each Scheduleand TOTAL of the Grand summery shall be deemed to be the total for executing the facilities andsections thereof in complete accordance with the contract.

11. These schedules can also be used as a basis to value variations of work done under the ProvisionalSum.

12. The Bidders shall submit editable soft copies of the filled schedules in addition to the signed copies

Note: Bidders are requested to check the given schedules carefully against the requirements/ designs and notifythe Employer immediately if there are any missing major items and/or modifications to the items given below. Onlymajor items/works are indicated in the price schedules. Any other associated minor items/works deem to beincluded in the total price.




4.3 PRICE SCHEDULE NO 1:- MAJOR PROJECT & EQUIPMENTP.C. 35 /NT/ 2013, Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, WorkExecution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining (substations)

4.3.1 Schedule No 1.1: 132kV Under Ground Cable System - Major Project &Equipment.

Schedule 1.1 A. :- (AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation route length (13 km)

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

r EU

RO

)

Tota

lPric

e(U

SD o

rO

nEU

RO

)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

1.

XLPE power cables, Rated Voltage 132kV round Aluminumconductor (1×2000) mm2 cross section, Copper Wire & LeadMetallic sheathed to verify (40 kA/1 sec), HDPE coveringaccording to IEC standard , with drum length (500 m).

86 km

2

Premoulded (prefabricated) earthing Straight Through Jointfor XLPE power cables , Rated Voltage 132kV roundAluminum conductor (1 x 2000 ) mm2 cross section suitablefor the above cable with armoring according to requirementnecessary and all necessary elements to complete thejoints. and The semi conductive region of the stress conemust be ( massive semi conductive /electrode) (not coated).

55 Pcs

3.

Premoulded (prefabricated) Cross Bonding Joint with suitablecable for cross bonding & earthing, for XLPE power cables ,rated voltage 132kV round aluminum conductor (1×2000)mm2 cross section suitable for the above cable with suitablefor cable specifications above armoring and all according torequirement necessary components to complete the jointsaccording to requirement necessary .and The semiconductive region of the stress cone must be ( massive semiconductive /electrode) (not coated).

110 Pcs

. 4

Outdoor sealing end type Conventional Termination for XLPEpower cables, Rated Voltage 132 kV round aluminumconductor (1×2000) mm2 cross section suitable for the abovecable with all necessary components to complete the joint thecreepage distance must be not less than 4000 mm and Thesemi conductive region of the stress cone must be ( massivesemi conductive /electrode) (not coated).

15 Pcs.

5 Suitable accessories for earthing system as shown in item(8.2.5.4) 1 Lot.

6 Grillage LDPE with suitable width and the Wight for onemeter not less than (400 g). 30 km

7 Marking tape LDPE as shown in fig.( 1) 55 km

8 Cross Bonding Boxes suitable for C.B joints and cable. 36 No.

9 Earthing system Link Boxes suitable for joints and cable. 18 No.

Sub Total of Price Schedule 1.1 A (To Grand Summary)

Note : only major items are indicated in the above list. Any other associated material/ works deem to be includedin these items.




P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013, Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, WorkExecution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining(substations) :

Schedule 1.1:- 132kV Under Ground Cable System - Major Project & Equipment

Schedule 1.1 B. AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation (route length (18.250 km)

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

r EU

RO

)

Tota

l Pric

e(U

SD o

r‘O

n EU

RO

)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

1.


121 km

2

Premoulded (prefabricated) earthing Straight Through Jointfor XLPE power cables , Rated Voltage 132kV roundAluminum conductor(1 x 2000 ) mm2 cross section suitable forthe above cable with armoring according to requirementnecessary and all necessary elements to complete thejoints. And The semi conductive region of the stress conemust be ( massive semi conductive /electrode) (not coated).

80 Pcs.

3.

Premoulded (prefabricated) Cross Bonding Joint with suitablecable for cross bonding & earthing, for XLPE power cables ,rated voltage 132kV round aluminum conductor (1×2000)mm2 cross section suitable for the above cable with suitablefor cable specifications above armoring and all according torequirement necessary components to complete the jointsaccording to requirement necessary . And The semiconductive region of the stress cone must be ( massive semiconductive /electrode) (not coated).

160 Pcs.

. 4

Outdoor sealing end type Conventional Termination for XLPEpower cables, Rated Voltage 132 kV round aluminumconductor (1×2000) mm2 cross section suitable for the abovecable with all necessary components to complete the joint thecreepage distance must be not less than 4000 mm. and Thesemi conductive region of the stress cone must be( massivesemi conductive /electrode) (not coated).

15 Pcs.


6 Grillage LDPE with suitable width and the Wight for onemeter not less than (400 g). 40 km




Sub Total of Price Schedule 1.1 B (To Grand Summary)

Note : only major items are indicated in the above list. Any other associated works/Material deem to be included in these items




P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013, Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, WorkExecution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining(substations) :

Schedule 1.1 :- 132kV Under Ground Cable System - Major Project & Equipment

Schedule 1.1 C. :- (AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation ) route length(16.250km)

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

r EU

RO

)

Tota

l Pric

e(U

SD o

r‘O

n EU

RO

)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

1.


108 km

2

Premoulded (prefabricated) earthing Straight Through Jointfor XLPE power cables , Rated Voltage 132kV roundAluminum conductor(1 x 2000 ) mm2 cross section suitable forthe above cable with armoring according to requirementnecessary and all necessary elements to complete thejoints. and The semi conductive region of the stress conemust be ( massive semi conductive /electrode) (not coated).

72 Pcs.

3.

Premoulded (prefabricated) Cross Bonding Joint with suitablecable for cross bonding & earthing, for XLPE power cables ,rated voltage 132kV round aluminum conductor (1×2000) mm2

cross section suitable for the above cable with suitable forcable specifications above armoring and all according torequirement necessary components to complete the jointsaccording to requirement necessary . and The semiconductive region of the stress cone must be ( massive semiconductive /electrode) (not coated).

144 Pcs.

. 4

Outdoor sealing end type Conventional Termination for XLPEpower cables, Rated Voltage 132 kV round aluminumconductor (1×2000) mm2 cross section suitable for the abovecable with all necessary components to complete the joint thecreepage distance must be not less than 4000 mm and Thesemi conductive region of the stress cone must be( massivesemi conductive /electrode) (not coated).

15 Pcs.


6 Grillage LDPE with suitable width and the Wight for one meternot less than (400 g). 40 km




Sub Total of Price Schedule 1.1 C (To Grand Summary)

Note : only major items are indicated in the above list. Any other associated material /worksdeem to be included in these items




P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013, Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories,Installation, Work Execution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining

Schedule 1.1 D. :- 132kV Under Ground Cable System - Major Project & Equipment

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)To

tal P

rice

(USD

or

‘On

EUR

O)

Cou

ntry

of

Orig

in

10

Multiple Precast Moulding Machine Specification

- Multiple Productions within the same mould Themachinery is self-moving and puts down the item on thefloor after the mould overturn. The filling drawer allows arapid feeding of the mould The vibration is made byinverter-controlled vibrators for the beast concretecompaction . Moulds are provided separately , they areeasily interchangeable and shall allow to change theproduction size also daily. Approx. Maximum size of theproduced item :- 400 x 200 x H 110 cmApprox. Storage hopper height:-240 cm production line asshown in fig (2)

- Including two models ( two cast for each model ) Firstmodel as shown in drawing( 001M )& ( 1,2,3) Secondmodel as shown in drawing (005)

Notice:The origin of manufacturing must be from Japan or USA orfrom western EuropeThe machine shall consist of all the necessary accessories

1 No.

Sub Total of Price Schedule 1.1 D (To Grand Summary)




4.3.2 Schedule No. 1.2..:- Fiber Optic Cable and Telecommunication - Major Project & Equipment.

Schedule No 1.2 A (AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation) route length (13km)

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)To

talP

rice

(USD

or

EUR

O)

Cou

ntry

of

Orig

in

1.

Optical FiberSingle mode non-zero dispersion shifted fiber according toITU-T G655 containing 24 optical fiber, it is to be directly buriedinside suitable non-metallic pipes, and can withstand severesoil environment like water increase, temperature fluctuations,type of armoring is (PE). Optical fiber cable to be lay with thepower cable.

Optical Fiber drum shall be not less than 2 km.

32 km

2. Optical fiber cable joint with enclosures 15 Pcs.

3.

Optical fiber accessories (including non metallic protectivepipes)

Dura Line.- Outer diameter = 40 (mm)- Inner diameter = 34 (mm)- Minimum pressure 15 barDurra line drum not less than 2 km

32 km

4

Accessories materials for optical fiber cable:a- Coupling Parts :-

PE couplers:Different dimensions according to different duct diameters,pressure tolerance up to 16 bar, used to connect Siliconeducts.

b- Simplex plug :-Different dimensions according to different duct diameters.Used to seal the duct after the placement of (Optical fiber)cables to prevent dust and water from getting in.

c- Blank plug :-Different dimensions according to different duct diameters.Used to seal the duct before the placement of (Optical fiber)cables to prevent dust and water from getting in.

d- Repairing duct :-Different dimensions according to different duct diameters.Used to repair broken ducts after the placement of (Opticalfiber) cables.

10

10

10

10

No.

No.

No.

No.

5

Typical cable jetFor installation of long section of fiber optic. Cables jacketed withPE material, their outside diameter ranging between 10-22 mm(with all required accessories). PE ducts (HDPE) with anexternal diameter 40 mm

2 Pcs.

6

ODF: Optical Distributed Frame cabinet type to distribute andconnect the pig tails with all connectors required to connectthe ODF to the Mux .

(Cabinet type). (96 optical interfaces)2 Pcs.




7

Multiplexer :To be used for transmitting speech , data signal andprotection signals of 2 Mbps transmission rate. The linedistance up to 100 km

The Multiplexer should have the capability to operate onpilot cable and optical fiber (single mode non-zero

dispersion shifted fiber according to ITU-T G655). i.e.equipped with all necessary interfaces to be connected to

copper wire and optical fiber, at the same time , theMultiplexer should include the following interfaces :.

2 Pcs.

- 4 wire interface E&M

16

Interfaces ineachMUX.

- 2 wire interface exchange side

12


- 2 wire interface subscriber side

12


- Ethernet / TCP / IP modules

4


- Data transmission for MUX.

8


- E1 ( 2 Mb/s).

8


- Hot line with telephone

1

piecein

eachMUX.

SDH (equipment or card) with STM-1 S1+1 optical interface and21x2 Mb/s tributaries.. 1

piecein

eachMUX.

Protection Signaling Equipment (PSE) to be operate with

1. Digital Protection relays , G.703 (64 Kbit)

2. Analog Protection relays ,4 teleprotection commands(PSE should be internal card )

The supplier should guarantee that the signal transmittedon optical fiber will be received on the other side within theallowed margin of attenuation .- All required accessories for installation and connecting theMUX to MDF should be provided.

2 Pcs.

8 port

4 port

ineachMUX.




8

Cabinet for Multiplexer should be provided for the Multiplexers inthe station as well as in opposite station to accommodate allMultiplexer links. Cabinets could be used fully i.e. commandingtwo Multiplexers. Cabinet specification: (Internal swing door,Front door should notcontain glass, plate thickness is 2 mm , 42 U height, Fanunit,Internal light, AC plug with fuse and Cabinet dimension :2 m height , 80 cm width and 60 cm depth .

2 Cabinet.

9

Instruments & Commissions equipment:

- Optical talk set 2 Pcs. - fusion splicer 1 pcs. - OTDR 1 pcs. - Complete Optical Fiber preparation tool kit. 1 pcs. - Portable computer I7 (CPU 2GHz or higher ,RAM 2G.byte or

higher, serial port RS 232) including software packages forMUX. Programming

2 pcs.

10Installation, Commissioning, Operational and MaintenanceManuals in English language for all the above items (Hard andSoft copy)

3 Copies

11

Spare parts for Multiplexer: List of all recommend spare partsare to be provided with break down prices.

- Card 4 wire interface E&M 2 Pcs.- Card 2 wire interface exchange side 2 Pcs.- Card 2 wire interface subscribe side 2 Pcs.- Card Ethernet / TCP/IP modules 2 Pcs.- Card data transmission 2 Pcs.- Card E1 (2Mb/s) 2 Pcs.

- SDH with STM-1 2 Pcs.

- Power supply 2 Pcs.- CPU 2 Cards.

Subtotal of Price Schedule 1.2 A (To Grand Summary)

Note : only major items are indicated in the above list. Any other associated works deem to be included inthese items




Schedule No. 1.2. .:- Fiber Optic Cable and Telecommunication - Major Project &Equipment .

Schedule No. 1.2. B AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation) route length (18.250 km)

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

r EU

RO

)

Tota

l Pric

e(U

SD o

r EU

RO

)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

1

Optical FiberSingle mode non-zero dispersion shifted fiber according toITU-T G655 containing 24 optical fiber, it is to be directlyburied inside suitable non-metallic pipes, and can withstandsevere soil environment like water increase, temperaturefluctuations, type of armoring is (PE). Optical fiber cable to belay with the power cable.Optical Fiber drum shall be not less than 2 km.

40 km

2 Optical fiber cable joint with enclosures 19 Pcs.

3

Optical fiber accessories(including non-metallic protectivepipes)

Dura Line.- Outer diameter = 40 (mm)- Inner diameter = 34 (mm)- Minimum pressure 15 bar

Durra line drum not less than 2 km

40 km

4

Accessories materials for optical fiber cable:e- Coupling Parts :-

PE couplers:Different dimensions according to different ductdiameters, pressure tolerance up to 16 bar, used toconnect Silicone ducts.

f- Simplex plug :-Different dimensions according to different ductdiameters. Used to seal the duct after the placement of(Optical fiber) cables to prevent dust and water fromgetting in.

g- Blank plug :-Different dimensions according to different ductdiameters. Used to seal the duct before the placement of(Optical fiber) cables to prevent dust and water fromgetting in.

h- Repairing duct :-Different dimensions according to different ductdiameters. Used to repair broken ducts after theplacement of (Optical fiber) cables.

10

10

10

10

No.

No.

No.

No.

5

Typical cable jet For installation of long section of fiber optic.Cables jacketed with PE material, their outside diameterranging between 10-22 mm (with all required accessories). PEducts (HDPE) with an external diameter 40 mm

2 Pcs.

6

ODF: Optical Distributed Frame to distribute and connect thebig tails with all connectors required to connect the ODF to theMux .

(Cabinet type). (96 optical interfaces)2 Pcs.




7

Multiplexer :To be used for transmitting speech , data signal andprotection signals of 2 Mbps transmission rate. The linedistance up to 100 km The Multiplexer should have thecapability to operate on pilot cable and optical fiber (singlemode non-zero dispersion shifted fiber according to ITU-TG655). i.e. equipped with all necessary interfaces to beconnected to copper wire and optical fiber, at the same time ,the Multiplexer should include the following interfaces :.

2 Pcs.

- 4 wire interface E&M

16Interfaces

in eachMUX.

- 2 wire interface exchange side12

Interfacesin eachMUX.

- 2 wire interface subscriber side12


- Ethernet / TCP / IP modules4


- Data transmission for MUX.8


- E1 ( 2 Mb/s).8


- Hot line with telephone1 in each

MUX.SDH (equipment or card) with STM-1 S1+1 optical interfaceand 21x2 Mb/s tributaries.. 1 in each

MUX.

Protection Signaling Equipment (PSE) to be operate with


2. Analog Protection relays ,4 teleprotection commands(PSE should be internal card )The supplier should guarantee that the signal transmittedon optical fiber will be received on the other side withinthe allowed margin of attenuation .- All required accessories for installation and connecting theMUX to MDF should be provided.

2 Pcs.

8 port

4 port

in eachMUX.

8

Cabinet for Multiplexer should be provided for the Multiplexersin the station as well as in opposite station to accommodate allMultiplexer links. Cabinets could be used fully i.e. commandingtwo Multiplexers. Cabinet specification: (Internal swing door,Front door should not contain glass, plate thickness is 2mm , 42 U height, Fan unit, Internal light, AC plug with fuseand Cabinet dimension : 2 m height , 80 cm width and 60cm depth .

2 Cabinet.




9


- Optical talk set 2 Pcs.

- fusion splicer 1 pcs.

- OTDR 1 pcs.

- Complete Optical Fiber preparation tool kit. 1 pcs.

- Portable computer I 7 (CPU 2GHz or higher ,RAM 2G.byteor higher, serial port RS 232) including software packagesfor MUX. Programming

2 pcs.

10Installation, Commissioning, Operational and MaintenanceManuals in English language for all the above items (Hardand Soft copy)

3 Copies

11


- Card 4 wire interface E&M 2 Pcs.

- Card 2 wire interface exchange side 2 Pcs.

- Card 2 wire interface subscribe side 2 Pcs.

- Card Ethernet / TCP/IP modules 2 Pcs.

- Card data transmission 2 Pcs.

- Card E1 (2Mb/s) 2 Pcs.


- Power supply 2 Pcs.

- CPU 2 Cards

Subtotal of Price Schedule 1.2 B (To Grand Summary)

Note : only major items are indicated in the above list. Any other associated works deem to be included in theseitems




Schedule No. 1.2. .:- Fiber Optic Cable and Telecommunication - Major Project &Equipment.

Schedule No. 1.2. C (AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation) route length (16.250km)

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

r EU

RO

)

Tota

l Pric

e(U

SD o

r EU

RO

)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

1.

Optical FiberSingle mode non-zero dispersion shifted fiber according toITU-T G655 containing 24 optical fiber, it is to be directlyburied inside suitable non-metallic pipes, and can withstandsevere soil environment like water increase, temperaturefluctuations, type of armoring is (PE). Optical fiber cable to belay with the power cable.

Optical Fiber drum shall be not less than 2 km.

50 km

2. Optical fiber cable joint with enclosures 28 Pcs.

3.

Optical fiber accessories(including non-metallic protectivepipes)

Dura Line.- Outer diameter = 40 (mm)- Inner diameter = 34 (mm)- Minimum pressure 15 bar

Durra line drum not less than 2 km

50 km

4

Accessories materials for optical fiber cable:i- Coupling Parts :-

PE couplers:Different dimensions according to different ductdiameters, pressure tolerance up to 16 bar, used toconnect Silicone ducts.

j- Simplex plug :-Different dimensions according to different ductdiameters. Used to seal the duct after the placement of(Optical fiber) cables to prevent dust and water fromgetting in.

k- Blank plug :-Different dimensions according to different ductdiameters. Used to seal the duct before the placement of(Optical fiber) cables to prevent dust and water fromgetting in.

l- Repairing duct :-Different dimensions according to different ductdiameters. Used to repair broken ducts after theplacement of (Optical fiber) cables.

10

10

10

10

No.

No.

No.

No.

5

Typical cable jet For installation of long section of fiber optic.Cables jacketed with PE material, their outside diameterranging between10-22 mm(with all required accessories). PE ducts (HDPE)with an external diameter 40 mm

2 Pcs.




6

ODF: Optical Distributed Frame to distribute and connect thebigtails with all connectors required to connect the ODF to theMux .

(Cabinet type). (96 optical interfaces)

2 Pcs.

7

Multiplexer : To be used for transmitting speech , datasignal and protection signals of 2 Mbps transmission rate.The line distance up to 100 km The Multiplexer should havethe capability to operate on pilot cable and optical fiber (singlemode non-zero dispersion shifted fiber according to ITU-TG655). i.e. equipped with all necessary interfaces to beconnected to copper wire and optical fiber, at the same time ,the Multiplexer should include the following interfaces :.

2 Pcs.

- 4 wire interface E&M16


- 2 wire interface exchange side12


- 2 wire interface subscriber side12


- Ethernet / TCP / IP modules4


- Data transmission for MUX.8


- E1 ( 2 Mb/s).8


- Hot line with telephone1 in each

MUX.SDH (equipment or card) with STM-1 S1+1 optical interfaceand 21x2 Mb/s tributaries.. 1 in each

MUX.Protection Signaling Equipment (PSE) to be operate with


2. Analog Protection relays ,4 The supplier should guaranteethat the signal transmitted on optical fiber will be receivedon the other side within the allowed margin of attenuationteleprotection commands PSE (should be internal card )- All required accessories for installation and connecting theMUX to MDF should be provided.

2 Pcs.

8 port

4 port

in eachMUX.

8

Cabinet for Multiplexer should be provided for the Multiplexersin the station as well as in opposite station to accommodate allMultiplexer links. Cabinets could be used fully i.e. commandingtwo Multiplexers. Cabinet specification: (Internal swing door,Front door should not contain glass, plate thickness is 2mm , 42 U height, Fan unit, Internal light, AC plug with fuseand Cabinet dimension : 2 m height , 80 cm width and 60cm depth .

2 Cabinet.




9


- Optical talk set 2 Pcs.

- fusion splicer 1 pcs.

- OTDR 1 pcs.

- Complete Optical Fiber preparation tool kit. 1 pcs.

- Portable computer I7 (CPU 2GHz or higher ,RAM 2G.byte orhigher, serial port RS 232) including software packages forMUX. Programming

2 pcs.

10Installation, Commissioning, Operational and MaintenanceManuals in English language for all the above items (Hardand Soft copy)

3 Copies

11


- Card 4 wire interface E&M 2 Pcs.

- Card 2 wire interface exchange side 2 Pcs.

- Card 2 wire interface subscribe side 2 Pcs.

- Card Ethernet / TCP/IP modules 2 Pcs.

- Card data transmission 2 Pcs.

- Card E1 (2Mb/s) 2 Pcs.


- Power supply 2 Pcs.

- CPU- 2 Cards.

Subtotal of Price Schedule 1.2 C (To Grand Summary)

Note : only major items are indicated in the above list. Any other associated works deem to be included in theseitems




4.3.3 Schedule No 1.3:- Supply of Cable Protection SystemsAL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation) route length (13km)

AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation) route length (18.250 km)

AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation) route length (16.250 km)

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

tPr

ice

(USD

or

EUR

O)

Tota

lpr

ice

(USD

or

EUR

O)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

1

Supply of total Cable Protection Systems – for 2 circuits includingpanels, interfacing with existing systems (It should include DifferentialProtection Relay for two line ends with Software and connection cables:quantity 4 nos.) And the specification of Protection Relay as bellow:Protection function: Differential Protection for universal use with power lines and cables onall voltage levels with phase-segregated measurement (87 L) Two line ends capability Suitable for transformers in protected zones (87 T) Restricted earth-fault protection (87N) if a transformer is within the

protection zone Well-suited for serial compensated lines Two independent differential stages:

One stage for sensitive measuring for high resistance faults andfast fault clearance

Breaker-failure protection (50 BF) Phase and earth overcurrent protection with directional element

(50,50N,51,51N,67,67N) Ohase-selective inter tripping (85) Overload protection (49) Over/under voltage protection (59/27) Over/under frequency protection (81O/U) Auto-reclosure single/three-pole (79)Control function: Command and inputs for ctrl. Of CB and disconnectors (isolators)Monitoring functions: self – supervision of the relay trip circuit supervision (74TC) 8 oscillographic fault records CT-secondary current supervision Event logging /fault logging Switching statisticsFront User – friendly local operation PC front port for convenient relay setting Function keys and 8 LEDs f. local alarmCommunication interfaces: Serial protection data (R2R) interface Front interface for PC connection System interface

IEC 61850 Ethernet IEC 60870-5-103 protocol PROFIBUS-DP, DNP 3.0 and MODBUS Service / modem interface (rear)Time synchronization via IRIG-B , DCF77 or system interfaceFeatures: Browser –based commissioning tool Direct connection to digital

12relay

(4 Relayx 3)

No.




communication networksSub Total of Price Schedule 1.3(To Grand Summary)

4.3.4 Schedule No 1.4:- Supply and Installation of GIS System

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

Tota

l Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

1 GIS System Including

a) A0 Color Printer 1 No.

b) A0 Color scanner 1 No.

c) A3 Color Printer 1 No.

d) A4 Color Laser Printer 1 No.

e) Garmin 276 GPS (Latest version with 5” TFT display,800 x 480 pixels, multi-touch, glass, dual-orientation,WVGA color TFT with white backlight ) ,Shall includeSatellite image and map display in backgroundcapability with sufficient built in memory: Coordinatesystems shall be built in or programed to include Iraqlocal coordinate systems also.

3 No.

f) Entering the cable route and end substation data andfully configuring and establishing the GIS System onall work stations and integrating GPS units with theworkstations for data transfer. Should include thecost of any experts if required for the total Job.it isdeemed to be include in the Price.

1 Lot

(For all the above items the employer shall approve the specification at the time of the supply toinclude the latest versions available)

Sub Total of Price Schedule 1.4(To Grand Summary)




Price schedule No 2 :- MANDATORY SPARE MATERIALSPC 35 /NT/ 2013 , Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, Work Execution,Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining(substations):

• (AL Zawraa Substation–AL Hurryia Substation ) ,• ( AL Yarmook substation – Al Rasheed Substation ) ,• ( AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation)

The items given in this mandatory spare materials are brand new items and quantities are as specified.

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)To

tal P

rice

(USD

or

EUR

O)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

1XLPE power cables, Rated Voltage 132kV round Aluminum conductor (1×2000) mm2

cross section, Copper Wire & Lead Metallic sheathed to verify (40 kA/1 sec), HDPEcovering according to IEC standard , with drum length (500 m)

30 km

2

Premoulded (prefabricated) earthing Straight Through Joint for XLPE power cables ,Rated Voltage 132kV round Aluminum conductor(1 x 2000 ) mm2 cross section suitable for the above cable with armoring according

to requirement necessary and all necessary elements to complete the joints.20 No.

3

Premoulded (prefabricated) Cross Bonding Joint with suitable cable for cross bonding& earthing, for XLPE power cables , rated voltage 132kV round aluminum conductor(1×2000) mm2 cross section suitable for the above cable with suitable for cablespecifications above armoring and all according to requirement necessarycomponents to complete the joints according to requirement necessary .

40 No.

4Outdoor type Conventional Termination for XLPE power cables , Rated Voltage132kV round aluminum conductor 1×2000 mm2 cross section suitable for the abovecable with all necessary elements to complete the joint. The creepage distance notless than 4000 mm.

4 No.

5Brand new Special tools complete for jointing and terminating 132kV power cablesinclusive of all the necessary items. 6 Sets

6

Brand new Caravan Houses used at Joining of cables. (the houses are equippedwith suitable air-conditioning, outdoor generator, crane unit inside and all otherfacilities with dust proof environment inside. To be used for joining cables, can be reused and relocated easily at another location anywhere on the cable route)

6 No.

7Brand new Cable Pulling Machine suitable for the pulling of 2000mm2 AL/XLPE

Cable 4 No.

8Brand new Cable Drum holder and Payoff machine suitable for (1 x 2000 mm2 ) AL

/XLPE cable payoff with Automatic breaks and smooth jerk free controlled tension. 4 No.

9Brand new Suitable steel rollers for 1 x 2000 mm2 AL/XLPE for

a. Straight runsb. Corners and the Adjustable rollers near cable drum

750250

No.No.

10 Brand new Grips for pulling at middle and at ends with any suitable shackles ropesand all accessories as required 20 Pcs.

11

Optical Fiber Single mode non -zero dispersion shifted fiber according to ITU-TG655 containing 24 optical fiber, it is to be directly buried inside suitable non-metallicpipes, and can withstand severe soil environment like water increase, temperaturefluctuations. Type of armoring is (PE). Optical fiber cable to be lay with the powercable. Optical Fiber drum shall be not less than 2 km, 2 Optical Fiber cables along theroute length (measurements will be based on route length)

122 km

12 Optical fiber accessories (including non-Metallic protective pipes) HDPE line (Outer

diameter - 40 (mm) , Inner diameter - 34 (mm), Minimum pressure - 15 bar , DurraLine Drum not less than 2km

122 km

Sub Total of Price Schedule 2 (To Grand Summary)




4.4 SCHEDULE NO 3 - ( OMITTED )




4.5 PRICE SCHEDULE NO. 4:- CIVIL WORKS, ELECTRICAL WORKS & INSTALLATIONP.C. 35 /NT/ 2013, Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, Work Execution,Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining(substations):

4.5.1 Schedule No. 4.1.A. :- Civil Works

Schedule 4.1A AL Zawraa substation – AL Hurryia substation (Route length= 13 km)

Tot

al p

rice

Uni

t Pri

ce

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Activity DescriptionID

11800Length/meterProduction of reinforced concrete (trough +cover),( according to drawings 006), whateverworks required.

1

11800Length/meter

Excavate, suction ground water, Supplycompacted sub base layer, (including anyimprovement of soil if necessary, site specificchanges where necessary, Installation ofconcrete 132 kV power cable trough(Accordingto drawing no.001), whatever works required .

2

After Laying Power Cable 132 kV

11800Length/meter

Supply &Backfill with selected sand .Installationof concrete trough cover and Backfilling withCompacted Clean soil (according to drawingno.001), whatever works required.

3

1000Length/meterImplementation Horizontal directional drilling(HDD) (according to drawing no.002A, 002B),whatever works required

4

200Length/meterImplementation open cut _method for roadcrossing (according to drawing no.003),whatever works required

5

54J.C. RoomConstruction of Joint chamber for power cable132kV (according to drawings no.004A, 004B),whatever works required.

6

27J.C. RoomConstruction installation pit for link box(according to drawing no.005) , whatever worksrequired .

7

27Nos.Construction installation of communicationjointing room according to drawing no.(0011CRC) , whatever works required .

8

12set

Implementation and construction of foundationand steel structure for terminations accordingto drawing no ( 0010G ) & ( 0010F) [ foundation+ steel structure = set ] , whatever worksrequired .

9




Schedule No 4.1.. :- Civil Works

Schedule 4.1B AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation (Route length= 18.250 km

Tota

lpr

ice

Uni

tPr

ice

Qua

ntity

Uni

t


15500Length/meterProduction of reinforced concrete (trough + cover),(according to drawing no.006), whatever worksrequired.

1

15500Length/meter

Excavate, suction ground water, Supplycompacted sub base layer, (including anyimprovement of soil if necessary, site specificchanges where necessary, Installation of concrete132 kV power cable trough(According to drawingno.001), whatever works required .

2


15500Length/meter

Supply &Backfill with selected sand .Installation ofconcrete trough cover and Backfilling withCompacted Clean soil (according to drawingno.001), whatever works required .

3

2000Length/meterImplementation Horizontal directional drilling(HDD) (according to drawing no.002A, 002B),whatever works required.

4

750Length/meterImplementation open cut _method for roadcrossing (according to drawing no.003), whateverworks required

5

74J.C. RoomConstruction of Joint chamber for power cable132kV (according to drawings no.004A, 004B),whatever works required.

6

37J.C. RoomConstruction installation pit for link box andcross bonding (according to drawing no.005) ,whatever works required .

7

37Nos.Construction installation of communication jointingroom according to drawing no. (0011CRC) ,whatever works required .

8

12set

Implementation and construction of foundationand steel structure for terminations according todrawing no ( 0010G ) & ( 0010F) [ foundation +steel structure = set ] , whatever works required .

9




Schedule No 4.1 :- Civil Works

Schedule 4.1C Kazale 132 kV substation – AL Amean 400 kV substation) (Route length= 16.250 km)

Tot

al p

rice

Uni

t Pri

ce

Qua

ntity

Uni

t


14500Length/meterProduction of reinforced concrete (trough + cover),(according to drawing no.006), whatever worksrequired.

1

14500Length/meter

Excavate, suction ground water, Supply compactedsub base layer, (including any improvement of soil ifnecessary, site specific changes where necessary,Installation of concrete 132 kV power cabletrough(According to drawing no.001), whatever works

required.

2


14500Length/meter

Supply &Backfill with selected sand .Installation ofconcrete trough cover and Backfilling withCompacted Clean soil (according to drawing no.001),whatever works required.

3

1000Length/meterImplementation Horizontal directional drilling (HDD)(according to drawing no.002A,002B), whateverworks required

4

750Length/meterImplementation open cut _method for road crossing(according to drawing no.003), whatever worksrequired

5

66J.C. RoomConstruction of Joint chamber for power cable 132kV(according to drawings no.004A, 004B), whateverworks required.

6

33J.C. RoomConstruction installation pit for link box (according todrawing no.005), whatever works required.

7

33Nos.Construction installation of communication jointingroom according to drawing no. (0011CRC) , whateverworks required .

8

12setImplementation and construction of foundation andsteel structure for terminations according to drawingno ( 0010G ) & ( 0010F) [ foundation + steelstructure = set ] , whatever works required .

9




4.5.2 Schedule No 4.2 - Electrical Works - Power Cable

Schedule 4.2 A AL Zawraa substation –AL Hurryia substation (Route length= 13 km)

Schedule No 4.2 :- Electrical Works - Power Cable

Schedule 4.2 B AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation (Route length = 18.250 km)

Tota

lpr

ice

Uni

tPr

ice

Uni

t

QuantityActivity DescriptionID

km(2×1×3×13)≈ 80

Execution laying work for power cable (1×2000mm2) 132 kVcables with the test required according to IEC standard,whatever works required , (Double Circuit , single cable (13)km route length) , ( Rot. No. 2 AL Zawraa substation – ALHurryia substation) including joining to substations andcommissioning & configuring automation systems insubstations

1

Pcs174Execution of all straight joints ( earthing joints and crossbonding joints ) and terminations … etc, whatever worksrequired )

2

Pcs.54Installation of earthing system as shown in drawing no. (001CB), whatever works required

3

lot1Testing and commissioning for all project according to IECstandard

4

Tota

lpr

ice

Uni

tPr

ice

Uni

t


km(2×1×3×18.250)≈112

Execution laying work for power cable (1×2000mm2) 132 kVcables with the test required according to IEC standard,whatever works required , (Double Circuit , single cable(18.250) km route length( Rot No.1 AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation)including joining to substations and commissioning &configuring automation systems in substations

1

Pcs.234Execution of all straight joints ( earthing joints and crossbonding joints ) and terminations … etc , whatever worksrequired

2

Pcs.74

Installation of earthing system as shown in drawing no. (001CB), whatever works required (the Contractor shall ensurethe earthing method is safe with number of transpositions andselect surge arrestor and equipment accordingly and getapproved from the employer)

3

lot1Testing and commissioning for all project according to IECstandard4




Schedule No 4.2 .:- Electrical Works - Power CableSchedule 4.2 C Kazale 132 kV substation – AL Amean 400 kV substation) (Route length = 16.250 km)

4.5.3 Schedule No. 4.3.: Fiber Optic Cable & Equipment

Schedule 4.3 A AL Zawraa substation –AL Hurryia substation (Route length = 13 km)

Schedule No. 4.3.: Fiber Optic Cable & Equipment

Schedule 4.3 B AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation (Route length = 18.250 km)

Tota

lpr

ice

Uni

tPr

ice

Uni

t


km(2×1×3×16.250)≈100

Execution laying work for power cable (1×2000mm2) 132 kVcables with the test required according to IEC standard,whatever works required, (Double Circuit , single cable(16.250) km route length)( Rot No. 3 Kazale 132 kV substation – AL Amean 400 kVsubstation) including joining to substations and commissioning& configuring automation systems in substations

1

Pcs.210Execution of all straight joints ( earthing joints and crossbonding joints ) and terminations … etc , whatever worksrequired

2

Pcs.66Installation of earthing system as shown in drawing no. (001CB), whatever works required

3

lotTesting and commissioning for all project according to IECstandard

4

Tota

lpr

ice

Uni

tPr

ice

Uni

t


km32 km Dura line + 32kmoptical fiber cable

Execution laying work for Dura line and optic fiber cablesinside it and execution of all joints of fiber optic cableincluding joining to substations and commissioning

1-

pcs

2 ODF(one in AL Zawraa s/s

and another in AL Hurryias/s)

Installation of ODF cabinet in communication room in eachstation terminate the cables. Connect the cable to ODF withtest and commission of optical cable link

2-

pcs

2 cabinet2 Multiplexers(1 Links)(one in AL Zawraa s/sand another in AL Hurryias/s)

- installation cabinet of Multiplexers in each station- Installation , Commissioning and operation ofMultiplexers and connected to PABX (4 wire ,2W, 2M /Q-sic) , Scada or RTU (port data) and differential protection(protection signal) in each station

3-

Tota

lpr

ice

Uni

tPr

ice

Uni

t



Execution laying work for Dura line and opticfiber cables inside it and execution of all jointsof fiber optic cable

1-




Schedule No. 4.3.: Fiber Optic Cable & EquipmentSchedule 4.3 C Kazale 132 kV substation – AL Amean 400 kV substation (Route length = 16.250 km)

4.5.4 Schedule No. 4.4:- Installation of Cable Protection SystemsAL Zawraa substation –AL Hurryia substation (Route length = 13 km)AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation (Route length = 18.250 km)Kazale 132 kV substation – AL Amean 400 kV substation (Route length = 16.250 km)

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

Tota

l Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

1

Installation of Cable Protection System for bothPower Cable circuits & connect with existingsystem at the substations to be fully functionalincluding all related works

1 lot


pcs

2 ODF(one in Yarmook s/s and

another in AL Rasheed s/s)

Installation of ODF cabinet in communicationroom in each station terminate the cables.Connect the cable to ODF with test andcommission of optical cable link

2-

pcs

2 cabinet2 Multiplexers(1 Links)(one in Yarmook sls andanother in AL Rasheed sls)

-Installation cabinet of Multiplexers in eachstation

-Installation , Commissioning and operation ofMultiplexers and connected to PABX (4 wire,2W, 2M /Q-sic) , Scada or RTU (port data)and differential protection (protection signal) ineach station

3-

Tota

lpr

ice

Uni

tPr

ice

Uni

t



Execution laying work for Dura line and optic fibercables inside it and execution of all joints of fiberoptic cable

1-

pcs2 ODF(one in AL Kazale s/s and

another in AL Amean s/s)

Installation of ODF cabinet in communication room ineach station terminate the cables. Connect the cableto ODF with test and commission of optical cable link

2-

pcs2 cabinet2 Multiplexers(1 Links)( one in AL Kazale s/s andanother in AL Amean s/s)

- Installation cabinet of Multiplexers in each station

-Installation , Commissioning and operation ofMultiplexers and connected to PABX (4 wire ,2W,2M /Q-sic) , Scada or RTU (port data) anddifferential protection (protection signal) in eachstation

3-




4.6 PRICE SCHEDULE NO. 5:- OTHER SERVICES

P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013, Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, WorkExecution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining projects(substations) :

(AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation) ,(AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation) ,(AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation) .

4.6.1 Schedule No. 5.1:- Training

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)To

talP

rice

(USD

or

EUR

O)

Cou

ntry

ofTr

aini

ng

1Training 132 kV Outdoor Sealing Ends & Straight Jointin two delegations in synchronized with the shipments,each delegation of six persons.

12 persons14 working days

2 Training on Multiple Precast Moulding MachineSpecification

2 persons7 working days

3

Training for engineers & technicians test andcommission with certification for :

-Optical Fiber (OTDP, Splicer, Cable jet)

-MUX.

2 persons7 working

days

2 persons7 working

days

4

Electrical System design and Engineering WorksComprehensive Training on Cable design calculationsincluding internal structure of the cable, RatingCalculation, Voltage drop and loss calculation bothmanual methods & Software based, general training forall similar power cables, with the cable used for thisproject as an example. A comprehensive training atcable manufacturer’s.

2 ElectricalEngineers

(14) Workingdays

5

Civil System design and Engineering Works Civilaspects of cable lying, different methods, includingeffect on ratings and other issues, typical problemsencountered in the site, new methods in cable layingsuch as horizontal drilling technology and methods usedin this project. A comprehensive training at cablemanufacturer’s

2 CivilEngineers

(14) Workingdays

Sub Total of Price Schedule 5.1 (To Grand Summary)

Notes- The training should be in the manufacturing factory.- The bidder should provide training course details in the offer.- Schedule of training appointment should be sent at least 2 months before the training date.




4.6.2 Schedule No. 5.2:- Witness of Factory Tests & Type Tests

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

Tota

lPric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

Cou

ntry

ofTr

aini

ng

1Tests on the 132kV power cable in twodelegations in synchronized with theshipments. Each delegation of threeEngineers.

6 Engineers7 working days

2 132kV Outdoor or Indoor Sealing Ends &Straight Joint


3

Engineers :

- MUX.

- Optical Fiber







4.7 PRICE SCHEDULE NO 6:- GRAND SUMMARYP.C. 35 /NT/ 2013 Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, Work Execution,Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining projects(substations) :

( AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation) ,( AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation) ,( AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation).

Price Sch.No. Description Sub-Total Price

(USD or EURO)Total Price

(USD or EURO)

1 Major Project & Equipment

1.1 132kV Under Ground Cable System (A , B , C, D )

1.2 Fiber Optic Cable and Telecommunication & ScadaSystem (A , B , C )

1.3 Supply of Cable Protection Systems

1.4 Supply and Installation of the GIS System

Total of Schedule 1: Major Project and Equipment

2 Mandatory Spare Materials

3 Design Services(Not Applicable)

4 Civil Works Electrical Works & Installation

4.1 Civil Works (A , B , C )

4.2 Electrical Works - Power Cable (A , B . C )

4.3 Electrical Works – F.O. Cable & Equipment( A, B , C)

4.4 Installation of Cable Protection Systems

Total of Schedule 4: Civil Works Electrical Works & Installation

5 Other Services

5.1 Training

5.2 Witness of Factory Tests & Type Tests

Total of Schedule 5: Other Services

6 Grand Summary




Schedule No. 7 - Recommended Spare Parts

P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013 Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, Work Execution,Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining projects(substations) :

( AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation ),(AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation) ,( AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation).

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

Tota

l Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

Total

Name of Bidder

Signature of Bidder

Specify currency in accordance with Bid Data Sheet 19.1.




4.8 SCHEDULE NO. 8 - TOOLS AND APPLIANCES (PROVISIONAL)

P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013 Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, WorkExecution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining projects (substations):

( AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation ),(AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation ),(AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation).

Items enumerated below are to be priced unless they have been elsewhere included and the total carried to thesummary. The prices set against individual items in the schedule may be used during the currency of the Contractas a basis for adjustment of the contract price for any variation in quantity order by the Engineer and will not beincluded for bid evaluation. The bidder shall list the individual equipment.

No. Description

Qua

ntity

Uni

t

Uni

t Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

Tota

l Pric

e(U

SD o

rEU

RO

)

Cou

ntry

of O

rigin

12345

TotalMinimum Time for Delivery of Above Tools




4.9 SCHEDULE NO. 9 - DAY WORKS (PROVISIONAL)

P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013, Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, WorkExecution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining projects(substations):

(AL Zawraa Substation - AL Hurryia substation) ,( AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation ),( AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation)

No works whatsoever may be executed as day works, nor will payment be made for any Dayworksexcept in accordance with provisions of of the Conditions of Contract.

Labour

1. The contractor shall be entitled to the following payments in respect of labour employed on Day works:

a) The aggregate amount of wages for such labour calculated on the actual hours worked atthe wage rates set out in this Schedule up to the grade of charge hand or overseer workingwith the men (time for foremen is to be included in the percentage under 2(b) below).

b) 10 Percent of aggregate amount of wages calculated according to sub paragraph 2(a)above.

2. The percentage addition provided in sub paragraph 2(b) above shall cover Contractor’s profit, on cost,superintendence, insurance and all allowances to labour, time keeping and all clerical and office work aswell as the use of tools, timber, light equipment and non-mechanical equipment and all incidental chargeswhatever.

3. The “Normal working Day” as hereinafter referred to shall be taken to be of eight hours excluding mealbreaks and rest periods.

4. In calculating the sums due to the Contractor for the execution of Day works, the hours for which paymentshall be made for all personnel and the hire of all equipment shall be reckoned from the time of starting theparticular item of day work, either at the beginning of or during the course of a normal working day to theend of the normal working day or the time of completion of the particular item of Day work, whichever maybe sooner. No payment shall be made for personnel or Project for hours outside the normal working dayunless the said personnel and Project are employed on Day works outside the Normal Working Day on thewritten instruction of the Employer’s Representative. The same Day work rate shall apply for works doneboth during and outside the Normal Working Day.

5. On completion of any authorised Day works, a written statement shall be issued by the Employer’sRepresentative who shall sign it together with the Contractor and which shall state the number of workmenand their grades involved in the Day work, the number of hours worked and a detailed description of theMaterial used and the work carried out. A copy of this signed statement shall retained by the Employer’sRepresentative and the Contractor and shall be the sole basis upon which payment for Day works will bemade.




Day Work Rate for Labour

Class of Labour Normal working Day of 8 HoursLocal Iraq Dinnar / Day

Local LabourUnskilled LabourerSkilled LabourerDriverSteel ErectorLinesman / ForemanCharge hand/OverseerSurveyor (on survey work only)Engineer

Average :

Foreign Currency (……/Day) Average

Expatriate Labour

Linesman / ForemanCharge hand / OverseerSteel ErectorSurveyor (on survey work only)Junior EngineerSenior Engineer

Average :

6. Any other class of labour envisaged by Contractors for the execution of any Day works, except thatcovered by Paragraph 3 above, i.e. superintendence, etc. , shall be entered above together with theappropriate labour rates, and such rates shall be the only rates considered in any Day works claim.

7. The labour rates to be entered above shall include all other benefits or contributions made by the employersuch as contributions to Social Insurance Schemes, Annual Leave, Termination of Employment andRedundancy Law, Provident Fund, Health Schemes, etc. , which are imposed either by Law or byagreement with Trade Unions.

Equipment and Transport

8. The rates for hire of equipment and transport shall apply only to equipment, which the Contractor has onsite, and are to apply for the actual running hours for which the equipment is employed on work.

9. The rates shall include service, operators and necessary attendants, fuel, lubricants and other consumable.

10. The contractor may insert additional items and quantities provided that such are extended and added intothe total of the Schedule.

Materials

11. The rates for materials shall apply to the net amount of materials actually provided, erected and formingpart of the works and shall include for delivery to the site of operations.

12. The contractor may insert additional items and quantities provided that such are extended and added intothe total of the schedule.




Item Qty Description Unit

Local Transport & Erection

Foreign Local

Rate Total RateTotal

1.00 -

Labour

Provisional sum for labour as described in paragraph 2

(a) above

1.01 10 Local Days

1.02 10 Expatriate Days

2.00 - Equipment

2.01 25 Welding set for two welders hr.

2.02 25 Acetylene cutting equipment hr.

2.03 25 Air compressor (180 m3 / hr. at 7 atmospheres)

complete with hoses and toolshr.

2.04 20 Cable pulling equipmentweek

2.05 25 Tractor with winch hr.

2.06 25 Tractor without winch hr.

2.07 25 5-tonne lorry hr.

2.08 25 2-tonne lorry hr.

2.09 10 5-seater saloon car (or similar) hr.

2.10 20

20

a)Bulldozer (D6 or similar)

b)JCB

hr.

hr.

2.11 50 2 wheel trailer (for use with tractor or lorry). hr.

2.12 10 Unimong hr.




Item Qty Description Unit

Local Transport & Erection

Foreign Local

Rate Total RateTotal

2.13 50 Landrover, jeep or similar hr.

2.14 50 Pick-up Truck hr.

2.15 10 Mobile crane up to 6 tonne lift hr.

3.00 Material

3.01 400 Cement (50 kg bags) Nos.

3.02 50 Sand at site m3

3.03 50 Crushed stone (3/4” metal) m3

3.04 10 Reinforcing steel tonnes

3.05 10 Structural ungalvanised mild steel sections tonnes

3.06 30 Welding rods kg

3.07 20 Sawn timber m2

3.08 100 Imported material for backfill (supply at site)

Compactedm3

3.09 150 Rubble stones for foundation work (150-300mm dia.) m3

Total




SUPERVISORY STAFF RATES

The following rates shall apply where, by agreement with the Employer’s Representative, supervisory staff areemployed on day works in a direct capacity, i.e. other in their normal supervisory capacity.

The rates also be used as a basis for assessing any legitimate claims for extra costs in accordance with theprovisions of the Conditions of Contract, where these have not been claimed as day works.

No payment shall be made without the prior written authority of the Employer’s Representative, and the provisionsof the conditions of Contract shall apply to any claim for payment.

The Contractor shall insert in the following Schedule descriptions and rates for any clause of supervisory staffenvisaged which are not already included.

Class of supervisory staff Normal working Day of 8 HoursExpatriate

Senior EngineerJunior EngineerSurveyorForeman

Local

SurveyorForeman

Foreign Currency / Day

Foreign Currency./Day




4.10 SCHEDULE NO. 10- SCHEDULE OF MAJOR ITEMS OF CONSTRUCTIONAL PROJECT

P.C. 35 /NT/2013, Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories, Installation, WorkExecution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining projects(substations): (AL ZawraaSubstation - AL Hurryia substation) , (AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation) ,(AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation)

As stated in the conditions of contract (Section 1: ) - Customs, the Employer shall pay Custom Duties notonly for materials and equipment which is to form part or Contractual Project but also all transport,machinery, erection equipment and materials, testing equipment which are necessary to construct andcommission the Project including intermediate Temporary works.

To enable the Employer to assess value of custom duties for the cash-flow purpose and evaluation of thefinal contract cost to the Employer, the Contractor is requested to fill the following Schedule.

The total value of all equipment, tools etc. as mentioned above, declared by the Contractor for custompurpose if exceed the value stated hereinafter shall be at the Contractor’s own expense with reference to thepayable custom duties.

The Contractor shall enter any other equipment not listed in the foregoing Schedules which no tools isnecessary for construction or commissioning purpose. For those items which the Contractor intends to hirelocally no value shall be stated.

Description (Type,Model, Make)

No. ofEach

Year ofManufacture

Newor

Used

Owned (O)or

Leased (L)CIF Value Est. Power

Rating

CapacityTonnes or

m3

TENDER NO. : PC. 35 /NT/ 2013GENERAL DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION PROJECTS


Section 5 –Bidding Forms Technical 5-76

SECTION 5: BIDDING FORMS TECHNICAL BID

This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.Table of Forms

5.1 LETTER OF TECHNICAL BID

Letter of Technical Bid

[Bidder’s Letterhead]

Date: ..................................................

ICB No.: P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013

To: Director General – Electric Transmission ProjectsGeneral Directorate of Electric Transmission ProjectsMinistry of ElectricityAl Mustinsiria Sq.BaghdadRepublic of Iraq

We, the undersigned, declare that:

(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including Addendaissued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) 8;

(b) We offer to , manufacture, test, deliver, install, pre-commission and commission in conformitywith the Bidding Document the following Project and Services:

P.C. 35 /NT/ 2013 Supply, Shipment of 132kV Underground Cables & Accessories,Installation, Work Execution, Completion & Guarantee of the Works for joining projects(substations): AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation

(c) Our Bid consisting of the Technical Bid and the Price Bid shall be valid for a period of 120 daysfrom the date fixed for the bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents,and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration ofthat period




(d) We, including any subcontractors or manufacturers for any part of the contract , have or willhave nationalities from eligible countries, in accordance with ITB-4.2;

(e) We, including any subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the contract, do not have anyconflict of interest in accordance with ITB 4.3;

(f) We are not participating, as a Bidder or as a subcontractor, in more than one bid in this biddingprocess in accordance with ITB 4.3, other than alternative offers submitted in accordance withITB 13;

(g) Our firm, its affiliates or subsidiaries, including any Subcontractors or Suppliers for any part ofthe contract, has not been declared ineligible, under the Employer’s country laws or officialregulations or by an act of compliance with a decision of the United Nations Security Council;

(h) *We are not a government owned entity / We are a government owned entity but meet therequirements of ITB 4.5; *

Name .................................................................................................................................................

In the capacity of ...............................................................................................................................

Signed ...............................................................................................................................................

Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of .........................................................................

Date ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

* Use one of the two options as appropriate




5.2 BID SECURITY

Bank Guarantee

.................................................... Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing Branch or Office ....................................................

Beneficiary: ................................................ Name and Address of Employer ...................................................................

Date: ..........................................................................................................................................................................................

Bid Security No.: ................................................................................................................................................................

We have been informed that . . . . . name of the Bidder. . . . . (hereinafter called "the Bidder") hassubmitted to you its bid dated . . . . . . . . . (hereinafter called "the Bid") for the execution of . . . . . . . .name of contract . . . . . . . under Invitation for Bids No. . . . . . . . . . (“the IFB”).

Furthermore, we understand that, according to your conditions, bids must be supported by a bidguarantee.

At the request of the Bidder, we . . . . . name of Bank. . . . . hereby irrevocably undertake to pay youany sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of . . . . . . . . . .amount in figures . . . . . . . . . (. . . . . ..amount in words . . . . . . . ) upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a writtenstatement stating that the Bidder is in breach of its obligation(s) under the bid conditions, because theBidder:

(a) has withdrawn its Bid during the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder in the Form of Bid;or

(b) does not accept the correction of errors in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders(hereinafter “the ITB”); or

(c) having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Employer during the period of bidvalidity, (i) fails or refuses to execute the Contract Agreement, or (ii) fails or refuses to furnishthe Performance Security, in accordance with the ITB.

This guarantee will expire: (a) if the Bidder is the successful Bidder, upon our receipt of copies of theContract Agreement signed by the Bidder and the performance security issued to you upon theinstruction of the Bidder; and (b) if the Bidder is not the successful Bidder, upon the earlier of (i) ourreceipt of a copy your notification to the Bidder of the name of the successful Bidder; or (ii) twenty-eight days after the expiration of the Bidder’s bid.

Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at the office onor before that date.

This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 458.

. . . . . . . . . . . .Bank’s seal and authorized signature(s) . . . . . . . . . .

Note: All italicized text is for use in preparing this form and shall be deleted from the final document




5.3 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL

Site Organization

Method Statement

Mobilization Schedule

Construction Schedule

Personnel

Equipment

Proposed Subcontractors for Major Items of Project and Services

Time Schedule

Site Organization (To be included by the Bidder)

Method Statement (Approach and Methodology)

(To be included by the Bidder)

Mobilization Schedule (To be included by the Bidder)

Construction Schedule (To be included by the Bidder)




Project Personnel & Resume

Bidders should provide the names of suitably qualified personnel to meet the requirements specified inSection 3: (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria). The data on their experience should be suppliedusing the Form below for each candidate.

The Bidder must demonstrate that it has the personnel for the key positions that meet the followingrequirements:

No. Position Total Work Experience In Similar Work[years]

1 Project Manager 08

2 Engineers 08

3 Site Engineers 05

4 Construction supervisors 05

5.3.1 Form PER – 1: Proposed Personnel1. Title of position*

Name

2. Title of position*

Name


Name


Name

*As listed in Section 3: : (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).




Form PER – 2: Resume of Proposed PersonnelPosition

Personnelinformation

Name Date of birth

Professional qualifications

Presentemployment

Name of employer

Address of employer

Telephone Contact (manager / personnel officer)

Fax E-mail

Job title Years with present employer

Summarize professional experience in reverse chronological order. Indicate particular technical andmanagerial experience relevant to the project.

From To Company / Project / Position / Relevant technical and management experience




Equipment

The Bidder shall provide adequate information to demonstrate clearly that it has the capability to meetthe requirements for the key equipment listed in Section 3: : (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria). Aseparate Form shall be prepared for each item of equipment listed, or for alternative equipmentproposed by the Bidder.

Item of Equipment

EquipmentInformation

Name of manufacturer Model and power rating

Capacity Year of manufacture

CurrentStatus

Current location

Details of current commitments

Source Indicate source of the equipment

Owned Rented Leased Specially manufactured

Omit the following information for equipment owned by the Bidder.

Owner Name of owner

Address of owner

Telephone Contact name and title

Fax Telex

Agreements Details of rental / lease / manufacture agreements specific to the project




Proposed Subcontractors/Manufacturers for Major Items of Project and Services

The following Subcontractors and/or manufacturers are proposed for carrying out the item of thefacilities indicated. Bidders are free to propose more than one for each item

Major Items of Project and Services ProposedSubcontractors/Manufacturers Nationality




Manufacturer's Authorization

[The Bidder shall require the Manufacturer to fill in this Form in accordance with the instructions indicated. This letter ofauthorization should be signed by a person with the proper authority to sign documents that are binding on theManufacturer. The Bidder shall include it in its bid, if so indicated in the BDS.]

Date: [insert date (as day, month and year) of Bid Submission]

ICB No.: [insert number of bidding process]

To: [insert complete name of Employer]

WHEREAS

We [insert complete name of Manufacturer or Manufacturer’s authorized agent], who are official manufacturers oragent authorized by the manufacturer of [insert type of goods manufactured], having factories at [insert fulladdress of Manufacturer’s factories], do hereby authorize [insert complete name of Bidder] to submit a bid thepurpose of which is to provide the following goods, manufactured by us [insert name and or brief descriptionof the goods], and to subsequently negotiate and sign the Contract.

We hereby extend our full guarantee and warranty in accordance with Clause 27 of the GeneralConditions of Contract, with respect to the goods offered by the above firm.

Signed: [insert signature(s) of authorized representative(s) of the Manufacturer]

Name: [insert complete name(s) of authorized representative(s) of the Manufacturer]

Title: [insert title]

Duly authorized to sign this Authorization on behalf of: [insert complete name of Bidder]

Dated on ____________ day of __________________, _______ [insert date of signing]




5.4 TIME SCHEDULE

To be used by Bidder when alternative Time for Completion is invited in ITB 13.2.




5.5 BIDDERS QUALIFICATION

To establish its qualifications to perform the contract in accordance with Section 3: (Evaluation andQualification Criteria) the Bidder shall provide the information requested in the correspondingInformation Sheets included hereunder. If the bidding was preceded by a prequalification process thenthe forms included in this section and used earlier during the prequalification process need to becompleted only if the information submitted at the time of prequalification requires updating.

5.5.1 Form ELI - 1: Bidder’s Information Sheet

Bidder’s Information

Bidder’s legal name

In case of JV, legal name ofeach partner

Bidder’s country ofconstitution

Bidder’s year of constitution

Bidder’s legal address incountry of constitution

Bidder’s authorizedrepresentative(name, address, telephonenumbers, fax numbers, e-mailaddress)

Attached are copies of the following original documents.

1. In case of single entity, articles of incorporation or constitution of the legal entity named above, in accordance withITB 4.1and 4.2.

2. Authorization to represent the firm or JV named in above, in accordance with ITB 22.2.

3. In case of JV, letter of intent to form JV or JV agreement, in accordance with ITB 4.1.

4. In case of a government-owned entity, any additional documents not covered under 1 above required to complywith ITB 4.5.




5.5.2 Form ELI - 2: JV Information Sheet

Each member of a JV must fill in this form

JV Information

Bidder’s legal name

JV Partner’s legal name

JV Partner’s country ofconstitution

JV Partner’s year ofconstitution

JV Partner’s legal addressin country of constitution

JV Partner’s authorizedrepresentative information(name, address, telephonenumbers, fax numbers, e-mail address)

Attached are copies of the following original documents.

1. Articles of incorporation or constitution of the legal entity named above, in accordance with 4.1 4.1 and 4.2.

2. Authorization to represent the firm named above, in accordance with ITB 22.2.

3. In the case of government-owned entity, documents establishing legal and financial autonomy and compliance withcommercial law, in accordance with ITB 4.5.




5.5.3 Form LIT - Pending Litigation

Each Bidder or member of a JV must fill in this form

Pending Litigation

No pending litigation in accordance with Criteria 2.2 of Section 3: (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)

Pending litigation in accordance with Criteria 2.2 of Section 3: (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)

Year Matter in DisputeValue ofPending

Claim in US$Equivalent

Value ofPending

Claim as aPercentage

of Net Worth




5.5.4 Form FIN - 1: Financial Situation


Financial Data for Previous 3 Years [US$ Equivalent]

Year 1: Year 2: Year 3:

Information from Balance Sheet

Total Assets

Total Liabilities

Net Worth

Current Assets

Current Liabilities

Information from Income Statement

Total Revenues

Profits Before Taxes

Profits After Taxes

Attached are copies of financial statements (balance sheets including all related notes, and income statements) for the lastthree years, as indicated above, complying with the following conditions.

All such documents reflect the financial situation of the Bidder or partner to a JV, and not sister or parent companies.

Historic financial statements must be audited by a certified accountant.

Historic financial statements must be complete, including all notes to the financial statements.

Historic financial statements must correspond to accounting periods already completed and audited (no statements forpartial periods shall be requested or accepted).




5.5.5 Form FIN - 2: Average Annual Turnover


Annual Turnover Data for the Last 3 Years

Year AmountCurrency

ExchangeRate

US$Equivalent

Average Annual Turnover

The information supplied should be the Annual Turnover of the Bidder or each member of a JV in terms ofthe amounts billed to clients for each year for contracts in progress or completed, converted to US Dollarsat the rate of exchange at the end of the period reported.




5.5.6 Form FIN – 3: Financial Resources

Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets, lines of credit,and other financial means, net of current commitments, available to meet the total construction cash flowdemands of the subject contract or contracts as indicated in Section 3: (Evaluation and QualificationCriteria)

Financial Resources

No. Source of financing Amount (US$ equivalent)

1

2

3




5.5.7 Form FIN- 4: Current Contract Commitments

Bidders and each partner to a JV should provide information on their current commitments on all contractsthat have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or acceptance has been received, or for contractsapproaching completion, but for which an unqualified, full completion certificate has yet to be issued.

Current Contract Commitments

No. Name of Contract Employer’sContact Address, Tel, Fax

Value ofOutstanding Work[Current US$Equivalent]

EstimatedCompletionDate

Average MonthlyInvoicing Over LastSix Months[US$/month)]

1

2

3

4

5




5.5.8 Form EXP – 1: General Experience


General ExperienceStartingMonthYear

EndingMonthYear

YearsContract Identification and NameName and Address of Employer

Brief Description of the Works Executed by the BidderRole of Bidder




5.5.9 Form EXP – 2(a): Specific Experience

Fill up one (1) form per contract.

Contract of Similar Size and Nature

Contract No . . . . . . of . . . . .. Contract Identification

Award Date Completion Date

Role in Contract Contractor ManagementContractor Subcontractor

Total Contract Amount US$

If partner in a JV orsubcontractor, specifyparticipation of totalcontract amount

Per cent of Total Amount

Employer’s NameAddressTelephone/Fax NumberE-mail

Description of the similarity in accordance with Criteria 2.4.2(a) of Section 3:




5.5.10 Form EXP - 2(b): Specific Experience in Key Activities

Fill up one (1) form per contract

Contract with Similar Key Activities

Contract No . . . . . . of . . . . .. Contract Identification

Award Date Completion Date

Role in Contract Contractor ManagementContractor Subcontractor

Total Contract Amount US$

If partner in a JV orsubcontractor, specifyparticipation of totalcontract amount

Per cent of Total Amount

Employer’s NameAddressTelephone NumberFax NumberE-mail

Description of the key activities in accordance with Criteria 2.4.2(b) of Section 3:



Section 6 – Eligible Countries 6 - 96

SECTION 6: ELIGIBLE COUNTRIES

XLPE power cables 132 kV shall be from USA , JAPAN , SOUTH KOREA , WEST EUROPE , SAUDIARABIA , TURKEY , EGEPT , IRAN , MALAYSIA

straight Joints, cross bonding Joints, Outdoor type conventional terminations for XLPE power cables shallbe from ABB (SWITZERLAND) , NEXANS (SWITZERLAND) , BRUGG (SWITZERLAND) , PRYSMIAN(ITALY) , ELASTIMOLD (USA) PFISTERER(SWITZERLAND)



Section 8– Employer’s Requirements: Scope of Works 8 - 97

SECTION 7: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS SCOPE OF WORKS

7.1 TECHNICAL GENERAL CONDTIONS

7.1.1 Basic design CriteriaThis is primarily a supply and installation contract. Hence the contractor should supply all the equipment(including all the cables and accessories) which are designed according to the requirements of MoEspecifications and International standards, installed and commissioned according to the MoE specificationsand International Standards and good engineering practice.

Work includes connecting the substations and commissioning of

Section for purposes ofpayment and taking over conductors Optic fiber Type of

constructionEstimated route

Length inkilometres

AL Zawraa s/s - AL Hurryias/s

AL Yarmook s/s - ALRasheed s/s

AL Kazale s/s - AL Amean400 kv substation

XLPE insulated132kV Aluminum

Singe Core2000mm2 CableDouble Circuit

+DTS System (notapplicable)

Separate OpticalFiber CableTwo cables

Each Circuit, Flatformation

13 km

18.250 km

16.250 km

All works of the 2000mm2 Al XLPE Cable (Copper wire and Lead metallic sheath, 40kA earth fault/ shortcircuit current for (40) kA/ 1 second) 132kV Double circuit shall be in accordance with the IEC/VDEstandards. The Tenderer may provide his own proven design for cable to satisfy all the requirements and tokeep the Voltage drop & losses at a lowest while ensuring minimum cost and longest service life of the cable.The Flat cable formation inside concrete trough for general route and spacing as per drawing No 001 shallbe used accordingly. Soil thermal capability improvements may also be used. Direct burying of cables arenot permitted.. Also the contractor may use such methods as Horizontal Drilling machines and latesttechnologies for road crossings and obstruction crossings as approved by MoE (refer Drawing No 002A & B)(detailed technical details shall be provided with the bid). The durability and reliability of the installationshould be proven in detail. The amount of power to be transferred is 350 MVA for both circuits, continuousoperation. The cable design shall assess the cross section of the sheath for fault currant requirements. Inaddition to the power cables there are two Optical Fiber cables, connections at substations and power cableprotection also included.

7.1.2 Electrical WorksThis part details the main items of Project/facilities to be provided and works to be carried out under thisContract, but the Bidder is required to ascertain for himself whether any additional Project or works arenecessary to leave the total facilities complete and in working order on completion of the Contract inaccordance with the employers requirements and Bidding Drawings.

Any such additional Project or works, including all extensions and modifications to existing equipmentnecessary are deemed to be included in the prices quoted in the Schedules.

To complete each item of Project and equipment detailed in this part there shall be provided all necessarycables, joints, sealing ends, cross-bonding, earthing, supporting steelwork, labels, all necessarymiscellaneous items whether specified in detail or not and prices are deemed to be included in theschedules.




The 132kV XLPE cable system and the optical fiber cables shall provide a power & communication linksbetween following Grid Substations.

AL Zawraa Substation - AL Hurryia substation AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation

Project consist of the following cable sections for interconnections of the above Grid Substations

Cable Section Cable Route length No. of 132kVCircuits to be

installed.

No. of Fiber OpticComm. Lines to be

installed

AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryiasubstation&AL Yarmook substation - AL

Rasheed substation&AL Kazale 132 kV substation -AL Amean 400 kV substation

13km

18.250 km

16.250 km2 2

The lengths have to be considered for: Two circuits ( 3x single core) of 2000mm2 Aluminum 132kV XLPE cable Two circuits of optical fiber cable (24 pair each) for telecommunication

It is in the scope of the contractor to configure the new additions (Power and Optic fiber cables andprotection) to match the existing systems in the Substations including the Substation Automation System.The relevant prices are deemed to be included in the cable price, unless otherwise specified.

7.1.3 Civil WorksThis part describes the requirements of the civil works for the 132kV underground cable system and opticalfiber cable to be laid in the same trench in the concrete trough.

The minimum scope of civil works required are as follows: Handling of technical aspects, detailed engineering, documentation Detailed cable route survey including measurement of cable length, thermal resistivity of the soil etc. Trenching and backfilling Traffic safety measures Earthworks, locator slots Shoring work Sag piping Relocation of pipelines and other civil structures Fitting work Reinstatement of roads including road crossings Railway line crossings Culvert crossings Bridge crossings Canal crossings Sealing work Lowering of ground and surface water Coordination before and during construction works with government authorities and entities responsible

for other planned and existing installations. Supply and laying of piping, troughs, etc. Construction of joint boxes, concrete trough and installation




Temporary reinforcement of existing bridges to facilitate cable drum transport if required. The mapping and preparation of as-built drawings of the 132kV cable route with details of structures

combined with planned and existing installations. Soil Investigations installation purposes (including bearing capacity, chemical composition, thermal

conductivity, electrical conductivity etc) Horizontal Drilling and new technologies where applicable

The subject of this specification is complete engineering and construction services to a satisfactory technicalstandard for all civil works of the project, even if not all items required for construction of the cable route areexpressly listed in this document.

However, reasons shall be given for any additional items used and such item shall be approved by Employerin consultation with the MoE.

The works shall be executed in compliance with all currently valid technical regulations, recognized technicalcodes, standards etc. including MOE Civil Standard

7.1.4 Geographical Information System

An accurate, descriptive state of the art Geographical Information System shall be provided including theSoftware and Hardware required for the operation of such a system. As the cable installation progresses, allthe information regarding the cable route and end substations shall be included in the GIS system. Acomprehensive training shall be provided for the Iraqi Engineers to operate and Update such a system. Thesystem shall have the provisions in the software and hardware to expand to cover the entire Iraqtransmission and distribution system at a later time which is to be carried out by the trained Iraqi Engineers.Hence the initial architecture of the software and hardware should be so setup to accommodate theexpected expansion without any problems. The tenderer shall provide detailed information on the proposedsystem (software, hardware and training scope), with the tender for evaluation. The equipment shall be stateof the art up to date at the time of the delivery and provision should be kept to improve the capability andfunctionality of the hardware and software as specified or approved by the employer at the time of delivery.

7.1.5 Electrical System and Engineering Works

Comprehensive Training on Cable calculations including internal structure of the cable, Rating Calculation,Voltage drop and loss calculation both manual methods & Software based, general training for all similarpower cables, with the cable used for this project as an example. A comprehensive training at cablemanufacturer’s.

7.1.6 Civil System and Engineering Works

Civil aspects of cable laying, different methods, including effect on ratings and other issues, typical problemsencountered in the site, new methods in cable laying such as horizontal drilling technology and methodsused or proposed for this project. A comprehensive training at cable manufacturer’s.




7.1.7 Site Environmental Conditions

Ambient Temperature

Maximum peak

Temperature of a Black object in Direct sunlight (in Summer)

55°C

80°C

25°C

40°C

daily average Maximum

Maximum Daily Variation

Maximum Daily Average

yearly average Lowest 35°C

Lowest minimum Temperature -10°C

Maximum Ground temp. at 100mm depth 35°C

HumidityMaximum RelativeMinimum RelativeYearly Average

92%12%

38 -44%

Maximum design Wind Speed (Equipment/structures at height 10mabove ground)

145km/hr

Altitude Level above sea level < 1000mRain Fall

Max. per year 500mm

Min. per year 50mm

Max in one day 72mm

Yearly Average 150.8mm




7.1.8 HV & MV Equipment & Safety Clearances (Not Applicable)This section covers the basic insulation levels (BIL) and short circuit requirements for the equipment to besupplied for this project. In addition the minimum clearances for outdoor & indoor switchgear installations tobe assumed in the process are elaborated:

Parameters Characteristics

400kV 132kV 11kV

Nominal Voltage Highest 400kV 132kV 11kV

System Voltage 420kV 145kV 12kV

Number of Phases 3 3 3

Frequency 50 50 50

Neutral Point Earthing Solidly Earthed SolidlyEarthed

SolidlyEarthed

3 Phase Short Circuit Capability 40kA 40kA 40kA

Duration of Short Circuit 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec

Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltagefor Substation Equipment

1425kVp 650kVp 95kVp

Across Isolating Distances (OnlyDisconnecting Switches)

1425 ( +240)kVp

750kVp 110kVp

for Transformer Windings 1300kVp 550kVp 95kVp N/A

for Neutral Point – Transformer fortertiary bushing

125kVp 80kVp 95kVp N/A

Power Freq. Withstand Voltage/1 minfor Substation Equipment

650kV 275kV 328 kV N/A

for Transformer Windings 28kV 230kV 570kV

for Neutral Point – Transformer 36kV 36kV

Auxiliary Circuits 2kV 2kV 2kV

Min Creepage distance(mm/kV) for highest ratedvoltage

Indoor non-exposedinsulators

16mm/kV 16mm/kV 16mm/kV

Outdoor exposed insulators 31mm/kV 31mm/kV 31mm/kV

Maximum RIV Level as per IEC V 500




Design Clearances (Not Applicable)

Minimum Clearance in air for outdoor installations

400kV 132kV 11kV*

a) Phase-to-earth 3400mm 1300mm 160mm

b) Phase-to-phase 4200mm 1500mm 250mm

Minimum clearance between walkway and thelowest live point

8200mm 6100mm N/A

Minimum safety clearance between groundand the lowest point not at earth potential ofany insulator

2700mm 2400mm 2400 mm

Minimum Clearance between live part to wiremesh fences

4900mm 3000mm 3000mm

Min Transport Clearance 3500mm 2700mm 1900mm

Minimum Height of wire mesh fences &Protective Barriers

1800mm 1800mm 1800mm

Minimum Clearance to Buildings withunscreened windows & conductors passing overbuildings

5400mm 3300mm 1600mm

Working Clearance 6400mm 3900mm 2600mm

Rated Current (A) 4000 3150 4000

Short Circuit Current (kA/1s) 40 40 40

Rated Dynamic Making Current (kA) 100 100 100

Factor of safety at max working Load for strainbus & accessories

2.5 2.5 -

Lightning Protection 1 x 152.8 Dorking SteelWire

Damping W ire 1 x 680/85 AluminumConductor

SteelReinforced

*11 kV Clearances specified are for outdoor equipment installed without protective barriers.




7.2 MAJOR PROJECT & EQUIPMENT INCLUDING SPARE PARTS (WHICH ARE NOTGIVEN SEPARATELY)For Quantities and details of items please refer the following

7.2.1 132kV Al/XLPE Underground Cable System:

Please refer to the table given in Price Schedule Section 4.3.1 Schedule No 1.1 (A,B,C,D)

7.2.2 Fiber Optic Cable and Telecommunication - Major Project & Equipment

Please refer to the table given in Price Schedule Section 4.3.2 Schedule No 1.2(A,B,C)

7.2.3 Supply of Cable Protection Systems

Please refer to the table given in Price Schedule Section 4.3.3 Schedule No 1.3

7.2.4 Supply of Geographical Information System


7.3 MANDATORY SPARE MATERIALS

For Quantities and details of items please refer the table given in Price Schedule Section 4. 4Schedule No 2

7.4 LIAISON SERVICES

Please refer to the table given in Price Schedule Section 4. 5 Schedule No 3 (omitted)

7.5 CIVIL WORKS, ELECTRICAL WORKS, INSTALLATION AND OTHER SERVICESFor Quantities and details of items please refer the following

7.5.1 A. Civil Works :

Please refer to the table given in Price Schedule Section 4. 6.1 Schedule No 4.1

Special comments for Civil Works:(1) Preliminary works

Survey, soil investigations, trench work , route clearing, access road construction, review and updatesurvey & soil conditions, prepare survey cable section Drawings, survey river & canal crossings,




check trench work , check cable route, prepare final trench work with soil improvements for bearingcapacity and thermal conductivity if required, marking cable route, additional investigations &coordination at river crossings, prepare final cable route. All these work activities are deemed to beincluded in the price schedules, unless otherwise a separate price item is shown.

(2) Mobilization worksSite organization including mobilization sanitary facilities, workshop, construction equipment, fences,cleaning, dewatering, temporary drainage, sewerage system, safety protective works & facilities. Allthese work activities are deemed to be included in the cable price, unless otherwise a separate priceitem is shown

(3) Bridge Crossings

Canal crossing in one single span of 25m length by self-supporting steel lattice girder, box-typeparallel chorts of bolted galvanized L-section supported by concrete columns set on stepped raftfoundation including cost of installation of HDPE pipes, allowance bracing for spare pipes and canalbank protection with gabion structure. Including pipes used in Major Road Crossings, Rivercrossings, Horizontal Drilling and such special occasions. Alternative methods of crossing can alsobe used, subjected to the approval.

7.5.2 Electrical Works :

Please refer to the table given in Price Schedule Section 4. 6.2 Schedule No 4.2 for

7.5.3 Fiber Optic Cable & Equipment:


7.5.4 Installation of Cable Protection Systems:


7.6 OTHER SERVICES

7.6.1 Training:


7.6.2 Witness of Factory Tests & Type TestsPlease refer to the table given in Price Schedule Section 4.7.2 Schedule No 5.2

7.7 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS.Please refer to the table given in Price Schedule Section Schedule No 7

7.8 CARAVAN TYPE HOUSES FOR JOINTING PURPOSESA typical drawing for the Caravan Type Joint house unit is provided in Section 17 for reference. The final




shall be approved by the employer. It should be completely dust proof.

Material and construction aspectsThe Caravan Type Joint house units for Power cable straight joints shall be fully moveable and should beable to be taken to any place along the cable route and be placed. For this purposes hooks shall beprovided on the top side with sufficient strength and no harm should happen to the unit while transporting orlifting due to the stresses. The length of the unit shall be such that 3 joints in the 3 phase power cable(occurring one after the other along the cable) can be completed with one placement of the unit at site.

There should be two doors on the longitudinal sides on either ends as shown in the drawing in Section 17.The doors shall open to the inside of the Caravan. The roof shall be slanted to prevent water collecting ontop. The Material for construction shall be of light weight such as aluminium where possible and fire proofand shall not emit toxic fumes in contact with flames. The units shall be equipped with suitable fireextinguishers near each door, (preferably CO2 type). A medical First Aid Box suitable for emergencies withbasic items shall also be provided.

Rubber Beadings and Dust coversThe underneath of the unit should be such that a thick rubber beading which is suitable for the toughenvironmental conditions and rough handling shall be placed at the bottom edge to seal off any dust thatmay come from outside. On the edge faces a suitable opening shall be provided to accommodate the cableJoint box concrete walls. The width of the caravan unit shall be such that the joint box width can beaccommodated with good fit.Apart from beading, dust covers shall be provided on the underside to cover the surface to prevent dust ormoisture coming in to the unit

Lighting requirementsInside the unit a good level of lighting shall be provided with durable efficient light fittings. Lights shall be soarranged that they are not casting sharp shadows on a given area, but cancelling or reducing the shadoweffects from each other. Care should be taken in placing the lights with the moveable crane unit. Apart fromstationary lights, several spot lights should be placed which can be adjusted to direct the beams fromdifferent directions at the joints that are taking place. Further lights shall be provide to the outside (all 4 sides)of the unit and shall be fully controllable from inside. All the lights shall be protected by a suitablemechanical protection mesh to prevent damage by equipment or items that are moved to and fro, both insideand outside. A recessed type may be preferred where possible.

Crane UnitThe Caravan unit shall consist of a moveable adjustable swivel crane unit which can be moved along itsentire length and also transverse to that. The unit shall be used to lift the cables and accessories and placethem at correct positions and also for lifting cable bundles. Hence the capacity of the unit shall be adequate(1 Tonne) and the caravan house structure shall be strong enough to support these loads, without failure ordeformation.

RacksTwo Racks shall be placed on both sides of the unit at a height of 1m and 1.5m. The width of a racks shallbe about 30 cm and shall be used to place tools and other equipment. The racks shall be of sufficientstrength to withstand small impacts and hold the weight of the items on them. The open edges shall bemade slightly higher with a small edge in such a manner that objects do not fall off by sliding due to anyvibrations during any jointing operation or otherwise.

Blower units with HosesThe unit shall have 4 blower type units ( two on either side, suitably spaced) to extract particles or hot ortoxic fumes from any jointing operation inside and to exhaust to the outside. For this purposes 4 hose andblower type units shall be provided for each caravan unit, with sufficient hose length to reach out to anyclose by jointing location.On the outside where the toxic fumes are emitted out, warning notices shall be provided and fumes or gasesshall be directed downwards. It should not be possible for dust particles or moisture to ingress in to the unitthrough these openings

Air Conditioning Units




Two air conditioning units of sufficient capacity (minimum 24000 BTU per unit) shall be mounted on the roof.The units shall be hot and cold type. The projecting part outside the caravan shall be protected by a strong,removable mesh type support to prevent any mechanical damage during operation or transit.

Air Cooled GeneratorAn air cooled generator shall be provided for each caravan unit. ( 4 nos for four caravan units), with theconnecting cables and accessories. The units shall be 3 Phase 220/400 Volts and 25kVA units should besuitable for operation continuously on extreme hot days. The power requirement is for Air conditioning,Blower units, Lighting and any instruments or special tools that are in operation. The generator units shall beprovided with all the tools and accessories.The connecting main cable shall be rated for operation in direct sunlight on hottest days (80C temperature),and should be protected against cuts or abrasions with a suitable armour. The cable should be long enoughto be placed on any side of the Caravan unit at a sufficient distance and still connected to the caravan withthe bending radius.

Plug Points and Protection13 A socket outlets shall be installed all-round the unit with few 3 phase socket outlets equally spaced.Socket outlets single phase and 3 phase, shall be placed on the outer surface also to accommodate anyexternal loads such as water pumps etc. A panel consisting of a main switch (isolator), residual currentprotection devices and breakers shall be provided inside the unit at an easily accessible location. Switchesfor lights shall be located at convenient locations. Any switch or socket outlet outside the unit includingconnection to the generator shall have correct IP index for dust and rain water. Removable earthing rodshall also be provided in the caravan unit with suitable arrangements to earth the power cable outer sheathsduring jointing operations. The wiring system shall be sound and fully enclosed. Correct cable sizes shall beused.

Special ToolsSpecial tools for holding cables in place and supporting for jointing: such as stands and light weight laddersto climb down the trench shall be provided. Places shall be provided where all the tools shall be neatly andsecurely placed after use.

7.9 MULTIPLE PRECAST MOULDING MACHINE SPECIFICATION

Multiple Productions within the same mould The machinery is self-moving and puts down the item on thefloor after the mould overturn. (Please refer the drawing in Section 17). The filling drawer allows a rapidfeeding of the mould The vibration is made by inverter-controlled vibrators for the beast concrete compaction

Moulds are provided separately; they are easily interchangeable and shall allow changing the productionsize also daily. Approx. Maximum size of the produced item: - 400 x 200 x H 110 cmApprox. Storage hopper height:-240 cm production line as shown in fig (2)

Including two models ( two cast for each model ) First model as shown in drawing ( 001M )& ( 1,2,3)Second model as shown in drawing (005)

Notice:The origin of manufacturing must be from Japan or USA or from Western EuropeThe machine shall consist of all the necessary accessories



Section 8– Employer’s Requirements: 132kV Underground Cable Installation 8 - 107

SECTION 8: 132kV UNDER GROUND CABLE INSTALLATION

8.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8.1.1 ELECTRICAL WORKS

The 132kV XLPE cable system and the optical fiber cables shall provide a power/communication linksbetween Grid Substations indicated in the Scope of Work, Section 7: .

The Contractor shall confirm that the design and dimensioning of the cable system ensures a satisfactoryand unlimited operation at the full temperature range and for the proposed cable laying arrangement alongthe cable route. In order to meet this aim, the cable design and installation shall minimize the heat losses.

The specification of the 132kV cable is given in Section 9: ‘132kV Underground Cables TechnicalRequirements and Specification’. The service lifetime of the cable installation shall be not less than 40 yearswhen considering the site and other relevant conditions.

The Contractor shall be requested to perform his own investigations and studies in order to minimize the totalcosts of the cable system by considering the following parameters in accordance with the guidelines anddrawings given in this Bidding Document:

XLPE cable type / metal sheath Symmetrical cross-bonding Minimum number of straight joints/cable delivery length Cable formation in the trench: Flat formation should be used. Trench and concrete trough dimensions as per drawings (width and height of back-filled material

layer) Quantity and quality of back-filled material in cable trench (volume, thermal resistivity, sand, special

concrete, etc) Crossing methods (bridges, canals, railway, roads etc. ) Considering critical sections (laying in pipes, crossing with obstacles etc. ) Horizontal Drilling technologies where applicable

Throughout the cable route, except for road crossings, bridges, culverts places of high disturbance to thepublic and such special locations, cables shall be laid in three Flat formation in concrete trough in trenchesas shown in the drawings in Section 17. The two optical fiber cables should also be housed. Direct Burial ofcables are not permitted.

The bidder shall follow the cable laying arrangement as mentioned in bidding document. However, he mayrecommend other solutions subject to the Employer & Engineer’s approval. Horizontal Drilling technologiesshall also be used (as per Drawings attached) with proper re-enforcements and detailed work methods andequipment details shall be provided in such cases, for assessment. The optimal spacing between the cablesof one circuit and between the circuits, considering existing circuits shall be determined by the bidder basedon the given trench and concrete trough or HDPE pipe parameters and overall design of the cable system.The flat cable formation is selected in such a way as to achieve maximum current rating for the cableswithout high cable sheath losses.

8.1.2 Calculation of transmission capacity

Bidders shall submit detailed calculations of the current carrying capacity of the offered power cable circuits,according to the methods and equations as stated in IEC-60287 considering the specific conditions andrequirements of the project. The calculations shall take into account the specific parameter for cable layingin cable trench (inside the concrete trough) or HDPE pipes, HDPE pipes thermal stable material and air.Chart shall be submitted for current carrying capacity combination with laying depth, duct spacing and trenchwidth. The minimum depth from the ground to the top most position of the flat formation arrangement shall




be 1.3m

The bidder shall take into consideration all cable sections which deviates from standard trench conditions.Cable laying in ducts, pipes, on bridges, under rivers or any other laying conditions such as deeper trenches,close proximity to existing power cables and other installations, etc shall be considered. The bidder shalltake into account relevant de-rating factors in order to ensure a minimum Transmitted power capacity whichshall not be less than the following rating:

350 MVA per circuit for continuous operation for cross-section of 2000 mm2 Aluminum single core cablesunder standard laying conditions for each of the two circuits. Under certain circumstances, both of thecircuits shall be capable of carrying 350 MVA continuously and simultaneously.

The following values shall be calculated for the proposed cable and forwarded with the Bid.

Maximum permissible transmitted power capacity and maximum permissible current Maximum permissible overload for 1.0, 2.0 and 6.0 hours, if the cable is loaded with 50% of rated

continuous current.

8.1.3 Calculation of Electrical Losses

The following transmission losses for the offered cable type shall be calculated with the given cross bondingscheme for the total route length.

Conductor losses per circuit at Imax Dielectric losses per circuit at Imax Losses for screen/metallic sheath per circuit at Imax Total Losses per circuit at Imax

8.1.4 Magnetic Field Strength on Surface

The bidder shall include in the bid a recommendation on an optimized phase configuration of cable systems(within given parameters of this Bid document). Special attention shall be given to minimizing the magneticfield strength on the surface. The values for the given installation method should be provided.

8.1.5 Cross-Bonding of Cable Sheath

Cross-bonding of the cable sheaths shall be applied in order to minimize sheath losses and to provide areturn path for the earth fault currents. Over voltage protection shall be done by means of Surge VoltageLimiters (SVL).

The Contractor shall apply the metal sheath cross-bonding system to provide a continuous path in themetallic cable sheath between the substations. The requirements for joints, bonding leads, link boxes andsheath voltage limiters (SVL) shall be determined by the Contractor within the parameters given in thisbidding document.

The link boxes along the cable route shall be suitable for direct burial. The enclosures of the boxes shall bedesigned for submersion in water at the minimum of 1meter height. Other types of link boxes shall beavailable for floor-mounting or wall mounting purpose. The selection of the type to be installed depends onthe location.

Sheath Voltage Limiters shall be of the Zinc Oxide type. The connection leads shall have surge impedancematched to the surge impedance of the bonding and earthing connections. All the calculations for selectingof surge arrestor sizes should be provided for approval and any computer out should be validated withapproximate manual calculations.

The contractor shall provide and install the link boxes and accessories required. The contractor shall provideand install earthing connections between the link boxes and the earthing points. At the substations, earthing




points are to be provided by the Employer.

The contractor shall submit a detailed description of the complete cross-bonding system including diagramsand drawings of the link boxes.

8.1.6 Cable Temperature Monitoring System (Not applicable)

The Contractor shall supply and install a cable temperature monitoring system using optical fiber cables.

The optical fiber cable shall be embedded to the hottest phase of each cable circuit( i.e. center phase fortemperature measurement in flat formation).

The optical fiber cable temperature monitoring system shall reach an accuracy of measurement of ± 1.50Cand a spatial resolution of ± 1.5m.

The distributed temperature monitoring system that has data logging facilities, remote control capabilities andSCADA interface capabilities shall be installed at the Substations’, and Visual Display Facilities (VDU) shallbe located at AL Zawraa Substation–AL Hurryia Substation & AL Yarmook substation – Al RasheedSubstation & AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substationThe unit shall provide a capacity of monitoring the circuit, identification of the cable conductor temperatureand location at the cable and to provide output to the SCADA system. Two such units shall be available forthe two circuits. The outline of the system is shown in drawings.

8.1.7 Requirements for Installation and Commissioning

The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and commissioning of the complete cable systemincluding accessories. The installation and commissioning shall be in compliance with the relevantstandards and the specification.

The Contractor/subcontractor has to execute the following work:1. Coordination of the relevant works with MOE and other contractors (if any)2. Detailed cable route survey including measurement of cable length, thermal resistivity of the soil, etc.

3. Mobilization and demobilization of installation equipment4. Transportation of cable drums to the site & storage of cables and accessories near the site5. Provision and setting up of all tools and equipment which is required for cable pulling purposes

including, rollers, steel ropes, winches, drum stands, etc.6. Cable laying using cable pulling equipment7. Installation of complete cable system including cable joints, link boxes, cross bonding equipment,

surge voltage limiters, earthing connections, earth conductors, temperature monitoring system,132kV over-voltage arresters, etc.

8. Installation of cables along road bridges, in pipes/ducts, at river crossings and at other any speciallocations

9. Installation of the cable termination of any type10. Relocation of objects and existing installations found in the ground, if necessary11. Site clearing and site leveling along the cable route12. Disposal of empty drums and garbage13. Erection of temporary access roads, if necessary14. Reinstatement of all roads and surfaces in accordance with specifications of the relevant

government/ local authorities15. Pre-commissioning tests of the cable system16. Commissioning of the cable system together with the Employer’s Personnel and the contractor




17. Commissioning of the cable temperature monitoring system (Not applicable)18. Commissioning of the telecommunication optical fiber cable

8.2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OF 132kV XLPE CABLES

8.2.1 GeneralThis Bidding Document covers single core Aluminum cables with extruded insulation of cross-linkedpolyethylene (XLPE) for a continuous maximum rated voltage (CMR) of 145 kV and the respectiveaccessories.

The cables shall be manufactured by a well proven and state-of-the-art production process to ensurecircularity and concentricity of the extruded layers around the conductor.

The cables and accessories shall be designed for a service life of 40 years. Reports on long-term agingtests to prove the performance and reliability of the offered cable type at the required operating voltages andconditions have to be submitted together with the offer.

8.2.2 Specifications of 132kV Power Cables

The specification of the Ministry of Electricity, Iraq, on 132kV cables is given in Section 9: ‘132kVUnderground Cables Technical Requirements and Specification’.

8.2.3 Technical Requirements of Cable Accessories

8.2.3.1 joints

Basically, two types of Joints shall be supplied by the Contractor.

Premoulded (prefabricated) straight through joint for XLPE power cables, Rated Voltage 132kV

round Aluminum conductor 1*2000mm2 cross section suitable for the cable with armoring tube

welded to lead sheath to verify 40 kA earth fault short circuit current and all necessary elements to

complete the joints.

Premoulded (prefabricated) cross bonding joint for XLPE power cables, rated voltage 132kV roundAluminum conductor 1×2000mm2 cross section suitable for the above cable with armoring tubewelded mixing ( Copper & Lead ) sheathed to verify 40 kA earth fault short circuit current and allnecessary elements to complete the joints .

The nominal operating voltage (phase to earth) shall be of 76 kV, lightning impulse shall be of 650 kV andmaximum dielectric stress shall be equal or better than the cable requirements.

The joint boxes shall be constructed of approved materials and shall be watertight, free from sharp points orridges, thoroughly clean internally and designed to retain the filling medium and / or cable compound at alltimes without leakage. The metal sheathing of the cables shall be either plumbed or soldered to the jointbox.

Joints for cables, insulation of cores and method of jointing shall be designed to prevent migration ofcompound and interchange of compound between cable and joint. Suitable connections shall be providedfor exhausting, filling or pressure filling the joints and for testing the sealing of the filling ports as may berequired.




The joints shall have an optimized dielectric design. The electric field stress distribution along the interlacebetween the insulator and the cable shall take the dimensions of the joint and the cable and the dielectricpermittivity of the insulation into consideration. The material of the insulator shall have sufficient thermo-mechanical behavior to withstand all electric and mechanical stresses.

In certain section of the route, If the cables are to be laid in the HDPE pipes of the most part of the route (dueto the heavy traffic vehicles, vender shops, etc.) it may be considered to affect some thermal force to thejoints. Therefore, the joints shall be designed taking the thermal effect of the cables in the HDPE pipes intoaccount.

The materials used in the assembly of the joint shall be compatible with the material of the insulator and thecable insulation. All jointing materials shall be stored in a storage house at the site.

The conductor shall be connected by means of a compression ferrule or other approved arrangement. Thetensile strength of the connector shall meet the requirements of the Aluminum conductor and shall havebeen extensively tested during load cycles.

The joint shall be fully shielded and watertight and suitable for direct burial in damp soils if required.

The joint shall be equipped with provision for connection of a grounding lead and screen separation forspecial bonding.

The joint shall be provided with a sleeve with anti-corrosive covering suitable for sealing to the cable sheathat either end.

Joints shall be of pre-mould construction. The joints of site-applied insulation tape type shall not beacceptable. The design shall comprise either pre-fabricated slip-on or composite type factory testedsynthetic rubber joint, with all stress management elements provided during the moulding process in thefactory. No penciling of the cable insulation shall be required.

For protection against penetrating moisture the joint must have a metallic radial water barrier. This metallicbarrier has to be electrically connected to the copper screen or to the metal sheath of the cable.

The joint shall be enclosed in a fiber-glass casing and the space between the joint and casing shall becompletely filled with either a bituminous or a cold pouring compound. The filling compound will be subjectto the Employer’s approval. The joint shall be designed to be accommodated within the restricted installationconditions.

8.2.3.2 GIS(SF6 ) Terminations

The leading dimensions of the SF6 termination shall comply with IEC Standard 60859 (or the latest). Thebidder shall include in the detailed design drawings of the accessories.

The Contractor shall provide evidence or, carry out a program of type tests, to demonstrate that the completesealing end assembly is gas and oil-tight under all conditions of maximum operating and transient pressuresand pressures attained during testing of connected equipment.

At SF6 switchgear terminations the cable supporting steelwork may be required to be totally self-supportiveand designed to avoid imposing excessive thrust forces under any service conditions on the switchgearcircuit.

Cable supporting steelwork at SF6 switchgear may also be required to be clad in lightweight metallic materialsuitably finished or painted to the Employer’s requirements.

At GIS, the sectionalizing insulation shall be protected against voltage flashover during switching operationsby short circuiting links or sheath voltage limiters spaced 180 degrees around the sealing end, eachconnection shall not exceed 500 mm in length.




The stress cone design shall inhabit possible mechanical stress and deformation of the cable insulationsurface during operation and be also capable of accommodation minor radial and longitudinal cablemovement without detriment to the dielectric stresses in the insulation shield.

A grounding lug having a current carrying capacity of at least (40) kA/ 1 second shall also be provided.

The dimensions of the GIS sealing ends shall comply with the IEC Standard 60859. The bidder shall includein the Bid, retailed design drawings of the accessories.

The forces acting in the cable installation shall not be transmitted to the switchgear. The switchgear fixes itsown forces.

If the accessories are fire-propagating, suitable fire prevention measures shall be taken and proved by theContractor.

In the region of the terminations all metallic parts that are accessible from outside shall be connected to thesubstation earth. All parts, where voltages might occur that involve danger to persons, shall be protectedagainst accidental contact by the contractor using screens or other means. This shall be proved by theearthing manual.

All GIS sealing ends shall be equipped with screening covers to minimize possible field rise in the SF6compartment. This shall be proved by the Contractor.

8.2.3.3 Outdoor Conventional Terminations

The leading dimensions of the Outdoor Conventional termination shall comply with latest IEC Standards.The bidder shall include in the detailed design drawings of the accessories.

Rated Voltage 132kV round aluminum conductor 1×2000 mm2 cross section suitable for the cable with allnecessary elements to complete the joint. The creepage distance shall not less than 4000 mm.

The Contractor shall provide evidence or, carry out a program of type tests, to demonstrate that the completesealing end is leak free under all conditions of maximum operating and transient pressures and pressuresattained during testing of connected equipment

8.2.3.4 Construction of accessories

For accessories with different design the construction elements have to be agreed between Employer andmanufacturer.

8.2.4 Technical Requirements of Temperature Measurement (Not applicable)

8.2.4.1 General

The following cable temperature monitoring systems shall be offered:

Temperature Measurement with a separate optical fiber cable with 2 or more fibers embedded to132kV XLPE cable

Measuring unit including measuring, control, monitoring and recording software.

8.2.4.2 Optical fiber sensor

Intrinsic optical fiber temperature measurement (Raman Effect) shall be used for longitudinal-resolutiontemperature measurement along the cable route.

Only the hottest phase of the circuits, normally the center phase cable (horizontal arrangement), shall bemonitored.

8.2.4.3 Temperature drop between conductor and metallic sheath

Conductor temperature shall be monitored for cable protection. Direct measurements require high technicalexpenditure. Therefore, intrinsic optical fiber temperature measurement shall be applied for longitudinalresolution temperature determination along the middle phase of the 132kV underground cable system. In




the bid, the maximum permissible sheath temperature as a function of load current shall be represented in adiagram.

8.2.4.4 Measuring unit

The contractor’s range of services shall comprise a fully functional measuring facility able to monitor up totwo cable sections. The measuring unit (DTS) shall be installed in the Substation Baghdad Substation. Itshall consist at least of the following:

(note: that the data given in the data sheets are preferred only, alternative specification will be considered) Microprocessor based Opto-electronic unit including optical switch PC (industry standard) with measurement evaluation software Monitor for visual display of measured temperature values Automatic alarm signaling when the maximum permissible temperature has been reached Limit value setting for pre-alarm and main alarm indication Alarm indication available on potential-free contact Minimum 4-hour un-interruptible power supply (UPS) Equipment protected against electromagnetic interference Self-calibrating system Possibility of user defined zones for measurements, etc. Provision for output to SCADA system. Group Alarm Indication for DTS panel monitoring

The bidder shall include a detailed description of the selected measuring facility.

The bidder that offers the optical fiber sensor and the measuring unit able to fulfill the specified systemperformance criteria and requirements will be given priority.

8.2.4.5 Performance requirements

The temperature measurement with optical fiber shall meet the life time of the cable of up to 40 years.

The system shall be designed for temperature measurement of the cable sheath over a range of 00C to 800Cwith an accuracy of ± 0.50C.

The spatial resolution shall be 1.5 m. The capability of the system shall be at least one measurement perminute at the required accuracy. The system shall have a capacity to store three months of hourlytemperature measurement data. The system and its components have to pass the type and routine tests inaccordance with relevant standards.

8.2.5 Technical Requirements of Cross-Bonding and Earthing of Cable Sheath

8.2.5.1 General

The cable sheaths shall be cross-bonded taking into account the correlation between maximum supplylength and total route length. Over voltage protection shall be by means of surge voltage limiters.

The cable circuit shall be installed as insulated sheath systems with cross-bonding to reduce sheath losses.

The design shall be such as to ensure that there is a continuous metallic return path of adequate cross-section for the specified fault current.

The cable circuits shall be designed such that the number of elementary sections is exactly divisible bythree to form a sectionalized cross bonded system.

Cross-bonded systems shall be so arranged that sheath sectionalizing positions and cable joint positions arecoincident.

The cross-bonding shall provide an electrically continuous sheath running between the earthed terminations.The sheaths shall be sectionalized and cross-connected as to substantially eliminate sheath circulatingcurrents.




The cable circuit shall be divided into one or more major sections each of which shall be sub-divided intothree basic sections (minor sections) considering the delivered single drum lengths of cable. The sheaths ofthe cables in any one minor section shall be electrically isolated from the sheaths of the cables in theadjacent sections (whether or not they are in the same major section) normally by straight joints withsectionalizing insulation. The cables shall be regularly transposed at each joint bay position. If calculationsprovided by the contactor to show that transposition is not required (voltage build up is within limits) it may beaccepted, too.

Special terminal bonding arrangements may be necessary where cable terminate in SF6-immersed sealingends at the GIS substations. The contractor shall recommend the appropriate measures.At all major and minor sectionalizing positions sheath bonding shall be via link housings. At each majorsectionalizing position all the sheaths shall be bonded together and earthed. At each sectionalizing position,the cable sheaths shall be so cross-connected that they are effectively non-transposed.

The lengths of the minor sections of any one major section shall be as nearly uniform as practicable.Mismatch of minor section lengths is permissible, provided that this will not give rise to sheath circulatingcurrents great enough to preclude compliance with the general requirements concerning current carryingcapacity. If necessary, cable center spacing may be varied with the objective of adjusting induced sheathvoltages in such a manner to counteract the effect of length mismatch.

The cross-bonding links and surge voltage limiters shall be contained with the link box accommodated withinthe restricted joint pit area.

8.2.5.2 Surge voltage limiters (SVL)

Surge voltage limiters (SVL) shall be dimensioned such as to ensure:

Energy absorption capacity: 10 kW / s Overload of the limiter shall not entail any explosion.

The response voltage of the surge voltage limiters (SVL) shall be such as to allow corrosionprotection measurement without the limiters being disconnected.

To minimize transient over-voltages on the cable sheath, SVLs of approved design shall be installedat joints at either cross-bonded position.

SVLs shall be of zinc oxide type and shall consist of three non-linear resistors housed in the link box,the star point being earthed normally to local earth points.

The SVLs shall be capable to withstand voltages and currents imposed upon them and of limitingtransient voltages to acceptable levels.

The units shall be able to withstand the voltages induced by fault currents for a period of 1 secondswithout damage. However, it is accepted that the units may be unable to withstand the duty imposedupon them by an internal cable system fault.

8.2.5.3 Link box

The joints shall be in boxes and capable of directly buried in ground. The surge voltage limiters shall befreely accessible for maintenance and checking. Therefore, each joint group – and also joint groups withdirect screen- / metal sheath- earthing-, shall be equipped with a cross-bonding link box accessible from thesurface.

These cross-bonding link boxes are part of the contractor’s range of services, shall be considered in theearthing manual and meet the following requirements:




Splash-proof from above and from the sides Protected against water from below and from the sides Water-tightness against penetrating water Sufficient ventilation against internal formation of condensed water Easy accessibility from the surface for maintenance purposes Protected against unauthorized opening / sabotage Housing of surge voltage limiters Housing of connecting wires to PD sensors Removable /connecting/measuring points for the earthing installation Accessible measuring points for the measurement of surge voltage limiters Arrangement of surge voltage limiters such as to allow easy visual checks Defined earth point

8.2.5.4 Earthing

A conclusive earthing concept shall be submitted. All metallic parts, those existing on the building site andthose added by the contractor’s activities, shall be included into the earthing concept.

In the event of equipotential sections cannot be arranged an earth wire for equipotential bonding shall beprovided. Existing foundation and underground earth electrodes in the region of the terminations shall beconsidered in the earthing concept and be connected to the earth wire. In the region of the terminations anequipotential bonding strip shall be installed and connected to the local earth electrodes. The equipotentialbonding shall include all metallic parts introduced by the contractor into the substation buildings.

A statement and recommendations shall be submitted on later measurements, tests, checks to be carried outon the total earthing installation during normal service.

An earthing manual shall be prepared indicating the design, testing, earthing electrode measurements.Inductive interference shall be measured to prove that the earthing installation has sufficient dimensions andcross-sections. It shall ensure that high touch potential or potential transfer will not occur during normalservice or in case of faults. The results shall be laid down in a certificate.

Valid standards and specifications given in this document, IEC,DIN,VDE, etc. It shall be proved that servicesbelonging to third parties will not be affected. Suitable remedial measures shall be taken by the contractor inthis respect and shall be included in the Bid.An arrangement of three Copper earth rods (2.25m) length,(16 mm2) diameter with all accessories ofEquilateral triangle 80 cm length , in salty wet soil and interconnected linked to the earthing box by copperwire , also earth continuous conductor for each single circuit should be provided along the route.

8.2.6 Installation of the 132kV Cable System

8.2.6.1 General

This section describes the supply and installation works related to the implementation of the 132kV cablesystem and optical fiber cables to be carried out by the Contractor.

The related civil works are described in Section 10:

Minimum bending radius of the cable is considered 30d0 (d0=Outer diameter of cables), however theContractor will be responsible to check all areas where space restrictions for laying apply (i.e. Bridge entryand exits, etc. ) to ensure the offered cable can be laid without exceeding the design parameters.

The above basic cable laying options are for information only. The bidder could propose other options and ifconsidered a better option they will be taken into consideration for approval.

The cable installation shall be carried out and supervised by competent and experienced personnel of theContractor. The instructions of the cable manufacturer shall be fully considered during cable installation.




The installation and handling of the cables shall be undertaken at all times by experienced staff and suppliedwith all the necessary Project, equipment and tools. The arrangement of the cables and all laying methodsshall be approved by the Engineer and shall be planned to provide an orderly formation, free fromunnecessary bends and crossings, which will permit the removal of a cable of the circuit without unduedisturbance to adjacent cables.

Every precaution shall be taken to ensure that cables and accessories are not installed in a manner or underconditions likely to cause electrolytic or other corrosive action or damage to, or be detrimental to theperformance of the cables during operation.

Where required by the Employer and/or Engineer, all combustible outer coverings of cables installed withinbuildings shall be removed and if required the cables shall be protected against fire in an approved manner.Cables passing through floors shall be installed in the manner specified and where required shall be sealed,employing fire resisting material to minimize the risk of spreading fire.

8.2.6.2 Installing cables

1. Within GIS substationThe 132kV XLPE cables shall be laid and enter the cable basement of the 132kV GIS buildings. Thecables shall be applied with fire prevention paint. Manufacturer and type of the paint shall beindicated. Certificates shall be presented and submitted for the Engineer’s approval. Allcomponents and materials used for cable fixing shall belong to the fire protection class ‘lowflammability’ and be halogen-free.The cables shall be fixed properly in the cable basement of 132kV GIS Buildings. The cable fixingmethod shall be agreed between Employer and Contractor in advance.Seals between the basement and the cable trench shall be provided to prevent the entry of water orvermin into the building.

2. TrenchesThe Contractor is to use drawings in the Tender document. The Contractor has to consider allobstacles along the cable route such as crossing with existing underground installations, etc. TheContractor has to consider and avoid in his any ‘hot spots’ in order to avoid de-rating of the cablesystem. Most of the trenching work may need to be carried out during night time as cable routetraverses passing congested areas.Throughout the cable route except for road crossings, bridges, culverts places of high disturbance tothe public and such special locations, cables shall be laid in flat formation inside a cable trench inconcrete trough.

3. PipesThe Contractor is requested to follow drawing on cable installation in HDPE pipes in the Tenderdocument. The Contractor has to consider and avoid ‘hot spots’ in order to avoid de-rating of thecable system.

4. BridgesThe Contractor has to submit with his bid, the proposed cable installation at road bridges (if any).

The Contractor has to coordinate with the relevant authorities before finalizing the cable installation.

The thermal linear expansion of the material shall be considered. Appropriate expansion bends orsliding/roller bearing for cable fixing shall be used.

When fixing the cables, attention shall be paid to not injecting short-circuit forces into the bridge’sstructure. These forces shall be completely absorbed by the cable brackets.

5. Underground canal crossingsThe Contractor has to submit a detail for proposed underground canal crossings (if any) with theBid. Cable pulling in separate HDPE pipes is proposed under the river bottom. The Contractor hasto propose and submit with the bid a suitable method for laying the pipes, The Contractor shouldcarefully consider the proposed location and limited working areas for installation. Horizontal Drilling




technologies may also be used.

8.2.6.3 Cable Jointing and assembling

The cable joints shall be carried out inside enclosures / cabins, free of dust & moisture. Contractor shallorganize such enclosures during jointing work.

The bid shall contain all details required on the laying, Jointing and assembling of the cables:

Details on retaining racks for cable run and fixing in the termination region Description of assembling areas Cable pulling tensions, results of previous tests Weights and dimensions of cable grip units Dust free and moisture free jointing enclosures/cabins.

8.2.6.4 Cross-bonding & earthing

The bid shall include a detailed description of the proposed cross-bonding and earthing system taking intoaccount the following aspects:

Technical Selection of surge voltage limiters (protection level) Explanation of dimensioning Dimensional sketches.

8.2.6.5 Identification

Identification Tags shall be provided for cable circuits below the gland at each end and at approved positionsby means of bands engraved stamped with the cable number, feeder name, size of cable, number of cores,phase color, etc. , or such lettering as the Employer and/or Engineer may require. The bands shall besecurely fastened in a permanent manner, and shall be made of material able to resist corrosion, damp andmechanical damage.

Cable markers shall be provided and installed at regular positions to mark the location of cables. The designof marker, inscription and method of installation shall be suitable as per standard.

8.2.6.6 Cable supports

The Contractor has to supply and install all necessary supports, racks, trays, cleats, saddles, clips, bracketsand other parts required to install and secure the cables, without risk or damage, in a neat and orderlymanner. This applies for fixing the cables in the substations, and other road bridges. The Contractor has tosubmit information on the cable weights, details and dimensions of the cable. Prices for all such materialsand installations are deemed to be included in the price schedules and will not be paid separately.

An aesthetic method for cable entry and exit of bridges shall be coordinated and agreed with the Employerand Engineer.

The Contractor has to provide and to install clamps for cable fixing. The spacing of all supports, racks,cleats, saddles and clips shall be agreed by the Employer and Engineer.

The Contractor shall and install support brackets in order to manage expansion and contraction of the cablecaused by variations of cable and air temperatures.

8.2.6.7 Earthing

The Contractor shall connect, unless otherwise instructed, all cable sheaths, supporting steelwork and themetal enclosures of sealing boxes, joints, etc. to the main earth bar by suitable branch connections whichmay be of bare or insulated stranded conductor as required to suit the cable system.

8.2.6.8 Cable jointing and terminations

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining drawings of all GIS end boxes into which cables areterminated from the Employer and shall ensure that the design is suitable for use with the cables suppliedunder this Contract.




No cable joint shall be installed without the agreement of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall submit drawings showing the types of joints, cable sealing ends, terminal boxes orglands proposed to supply under this Contract, with the Bid. Contractor is responsible for making the endterminations of all cable ends and connecting with the substations.

8.2.6.9 Tests during installation

An Insulation Resistance test shall be carried out at first, and then a Voltage Test (Sheath test) shall becarried out on the protective outer covering of each 132kV cable length after cable lying. The voltage shallbe 10 kV DC and shall be applied for one minute for the test. In addition to this, any test specified in Section9: Clause 9.5, ‘132kV Underground Cables Technical Requirements and Specification’ has to be carried outby the Contractor.

After completion of installation all sheath insulation provisions including sealing end support insulation shallbe subjected to the same test.

8.2.6.10 Submission of certificates

Electrical Test Certificates shall be submitted detailing the test results of commissioning and any otherelectrical tests carried out.

8.2.6.11 Route plan

During the progress of the Contract Works the Contractor shall record on a set of route plans and cross-section drawings of an approved form, such particulars as will allow an accurate reference to be made in thecase of any fault or projected modification. These records shall show, amongst other data, both indoors andoutdoors the exact position of every particular, cable box, and also particulars of the arrangement of cables.

All completed records shall be the property of the Employer. They shall be completed within one month ofthe approval of the progress prints following upon the completion of each section of the Contract Works.

8.3 OTHER REQUIREMENTS

8.3.1 Requirements on Operation and Instruction Manuals and Drawings

The following documents have to be provided by the contractor during the implementation stage:

1) Operation & Maintenance manuals: Equipment description Assembly and installation instruction Instruction on commissioning tests & procedures Instruction on operation and maintenance Maintenance test procedures List of spare parts required for 10 year operation. Certificates of type tests Cable calculation including cable parameter, current ratings, short circuit capability

of conductor and metal sheath Performance and electrical data Reports of special tests

Note : required 4 months after contract award

2) Drawings: Cross-section of 132kV cable Cross-section of joints and terminals Scheme of metal sheath cross-bonding system Arrangement of metal sheath cross-bonding connections or selected scheme Drawings of link boxes (two types for burying and wall mounting)




Drawings of sheath voltage limiters and accessories Drawing of cable supports and cable fixing material Drawing of earthing scheme Drawing of final cable route (as-installed) as specified Schematic diagram and arrangement of temperature monitoring system

Note :required 6 weeks after contract award, except as indicated

3) Documentation on jointing procedures including types and quantities of parts and materials,required tools and special equipment, step-by-step instructions, assembly drawings, etc. : 132kV joints 132kV GIS sealing ends 132kV Conventional Outdoor ends Metal sheath Cross Bonding

Note : required 3 months after contract award

8.3.2 Training and Familiarization of Project and EquipmentThe Contractor shall provide adequate opportunities to electrical engineers from the Employer to familiarizethemselves during the various phases of manufacture fabrication of the various components, cable jointingand end terminations of the Underground Cable and also on the various aspects/techniques associated withthe laying of the Underground Cable, nature of entry and exit at the installation, etc.

The training shall be offered at the factories/places of manufacture of the relevant Underground Cablesordered. The details of training and duration are given under Scope of Work, Section 7: Clause Error!Reference source not found..

During the training sessions, the trainees should be able to closely monitor, view, learn and familiarize of thevarious aspects of cable manufacture, cable jointing, cable termination, etc.

The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive package/ program for the training of MOE Engineers. The fullcost of the training including food and lodging/accommodation, transport contingencies and airfares shall befully borne by the Contractor and included in the total price.

In addition, four Operation and Maintenance personnel of the Employer shall be trained at site during thelaying, jointing and commissioning of the 132kV Underground Cable. The training at site shall be providedby the Contractor free of charge.

The Employer shall approve the proposal/package submitted by the Contractor for the training program.



Section 11– Employer’s Requirements: SEC10: standard specification for fiber optic cable and telecommunication 11 - 120

SECTION 9: 132kV UNDERGRUOND CABLESTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MANUFACTURING AND TESTING OF 132kV UNDERGROUNDCABLE

9.1 INTRODUCTIONThese specifications point out the contract characteristics for manufacturing, testing, packing,shipping and delivery CIF Baghdad of underground cables with their accessories for operation in athree phase 132kV – 50Hz system. They refer to following one – core cables: - -Extrudedpolyethylene ( PE ) – Cross – linked polyethylene (XLPE ). Both circuits are to have a continuousrating of 350 MVA.The contractor may provide his own proven design subjected to IEC and relevant standards. Thefollowing requirements shall be used as guidance. Full detailed description with all the calculationsrelated to designed , losses, voltage drops shall be provided with the bid and for approval.

9.2 TECHNICAL RULES

9.2.1 IEC RecommendationsThe selection of materials, design, calculation and testing of equipment shall be carried outaccording to the last issue of the International Electromechanical Commission’s recommendations,as far as they exist. The standards shall also include IEC 60228, IE 60840 and IEC 60949.

9.2.2 StandardsAs a general rule, all materials, stuffs and products used, for the manufacture of equipment, shall bein conformity with standards to which it is referred or, if there is no standard, shall have necessaryqualities for a blameless manufacture of equipment.

9.3 GENERAL WORKING CONDITIONSThe general conditions, in which cable and their accessories shall be able to work without anyfailure, are as follows:-

9.3.1 System Electrical ConditionsRated voltage of the three phases 50 Hz system U = 132kVContinuous Highest system voltage: U+ 10 % Um = 145kVSpecified voltage Eo = 76kVMaximum impulse withstand voltage (1,2 / 50 ) Ep = 650kVEarth fault current and duration (40) kA/ 1 secondShort term Power Frequency withstand voltage 275kV

9.3.2 Electrical Conditions Considering Metallic Sheath EarthingCables laid in flat formation in a trench shall have their sheath earthed at both ends at junction pointsas often as required by the manufacturer. Each sheath shall be able to transmit the maximum faultcurrent without damage.

9.3.3 Operating Temperature of CablesMaximum allowable temperatures of conductor are according to the type of insulation:

Permanent load short – circuitLow density polyethylene (LDPE) 70 ºC 150 ºCHigh density polyethylene (HDPE) 75 ºC 160 ºCCross linked polyethylene (XLPE) 90 ºC 250 ºC

However, as it is not possible to make sure that the thermal resistively of the surrounding soil isconstant, the conductor size will take in to consideration temperatures when operating with constantcurrent.

LDPE : 66 ºC XLPE : 83ºC HDPE : 70ºC




9.3.4 Climatic ConditionsClimatic conditions in Baghdad are severe. In summer, the ambient temperature of air reaches 55 ºCin shadow and a black object in direct sunlight can have a temperature of 80 ºC. The maximum dailyaverage is 40 ºC and the maximum yearly average is 30 ºC.

The maximum Daily average is 40ºC and maximum yearly average is 30ºC. Daily variation oftemperature can reach 25 ºC and the lowest minimum is – 10 º Cables considered in this specificationshall be able to work without any problem with their rated load and in the worst climatic andatmospheric conditions that can occur in Baghdad.

9.3.5 Soil Thermal Conditions

The three cables of one line shall be laid in flat formation in a trench at 1.3 meter depth in a soilhaving a mean thermal resistivity of 200 ºC cm / W (Dry Value) and a temperature of 35 ºC at onemeter under the ground level. To improve the current rating, special backfill material with a thermalresistivity of 120°C.cm /W (dry value) or better may be used.

9.4 CABLES FEATURESThis Bidding Document covers single core Aluminium cables with extruded insulation of cross-linkedpolyethylene (XLPE) for a continuous maximum rated voltage (CMR) of 145kV and the respectiveaccessories.

The cables shall be manufactured by a well proven and state-of-the-art production process to ensurecircularity and concentricity of the extruded layers around the conductor.

The cables and accessories shall be designed for a service life of 40 years. Reports on long-termaging tests to prove the performance and reliability of the offered cable type at the required operatingvoltages and conditions have to be submitted together with the offer.

Raw materials shall be produced according to specifications. The applied material shall be pure andclean and shall be transported in hermetically sealed containers under dust-proof conditions. Allsupplies of material shall be analysed to ensure that it complies with the specified standards.

The manufacturing process shall be arranged in such a way as to eliminate irregularities likeprotrusion, voids, contamination, etc. to ensure reliability and durability of the cable.

The manufacturing process shall avoid contamination by use of a fully enclosed material handlingsystem.

The cross-linking, curing and cooling process shall be carried out in one production phase and shallbe a dry curing process under high pressure to eliminate the formation of voids in the insulation andcontaminants in the dielectric.

All relevant process parameter shall be closely monitored during manufacture to ensure a highdegree of cross-linking of the whole insulation in order to reduce mechanical stress to a minimum.

The of the cable shall have;

Conductor: Segmental stranded Aluminium conductor (with water sealing & extrudedconductor screen semi-conducting layer.

Insulation: Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE)

Insulation Screen: Extruded semi-conducting (thermosetting compound) layer




Water-blocking : Semi-conducting water – blocking tapes

Metal sheath: Extruded Lead Alloy

Metallic Screen: Copper wire over Lead alloy sheath

Over sheath: Extruded PE Over sheath (Black) with outer graphite coating or conductivelayer obtained by simultaneous extrusion with over sheath.

The conductor screen, the XLPE insulation and the insulation screen shall be produced by tripleextrusion and dry curing.

9.4.1 Synthetic Insulation Cables

9.4.1.1 Conductor

The conductor shall have a circular cross section or segments made from stranded Aluminium wireswith semi-conductive segmental insulation (Milliken type conductor) stranded in concentric orsegmental layers, The conductor must comply, on any point, with IEC standards 228,28 and 111.Longitudinal water barrier (such as water swellable tape) with the conductor stands and shall betested in accordance to latest IEC. Recommendation No. 60840. The surface of the conductor shallbe clean and free from any foreign particles which may contaminate the insulation or cause a highpunctual electrical field stress in the conductor screen.

The conductor shall be water-sealed by either additional swelling powder.

The nominal cross-sectional area of the conductor shall be 2000 mm2. The bidder has to confirm theselected conductor cross-section by calculations based on the selected cable arrangement, layingconditions and cable trench parameter along the cable route, etc.

Conductor Size (mm2) Conductor Construction

400, 630, 800 Round compacted

1000, 1200,1600,2000 Segmental

9.4.1.2 Insulating Covering

9.4.1.2.1 Material

The covering shall be cross – linked polyethylene (XLPE). The insulation of the completed cableshall be free from any void larger than 0.025 mm any contaminant larger than 0. 01mm in largestdimension or any translucent material that is larger than 0.5 mm in its radial vector projection. Thenumber of contaminants of sizes between (0.025-0.01) mm shall not exceed 15 per 15 cubiccentimetres of insulation. In Project repairs of the insulation are prohibited unless specifically agreedto by the ETP Engineer

The insulation has to be applied by extrusion in a triple-layer extrusion head. Insulation layer shall befirmly stuck to the inner and outer shielding layer.

The insulation shall be of SUPER CLEAN cross-linked polyethylene mixture (XLPE) and a singlelayer extruded. A dry curing and peroxide cross-linking process shall be applied. The insulationmaterial shall comply with the requirements of Table 3 of IEC 60840.( Requirement for installationshall be as per clause 10.6.2 of IEC 60840)

The nominal wall thickness of the insulation has to be designed in a way that to withstand thehighest working voltage and the following electrical field stress at the surface of the shielding layersis not exceed: Inner shielding layer 8 kV/mm




Maximum wall thickness must be ≤ 25 mm

The inner and outer shielding layers must not be included in the wall thickness of the insulation

9.4.1.2.2 Dimensions Features

Thickness of insulation

Nominal thickness of insulation must be 18 mm for XLPE. And minimum at any point must be not asper IEC 60840. Inner and outer semi – conductor screen thickness are not included in these values.

2) Measurement of thickness of insulation

a) Sampling

Each cable length selected for the test shall be represented by two pieces of cable, taken one fromEach end after having discarded, if necessary, any Portion which may have suffered damage. If theaverage thickness measured or the lowest value Measured on one or the two pieces fails to meetthe requirements specified in Sub – clause 1) two other pieces shall be checked, If both of the furtherpieces meet the specified requirements the cable is deemed to comply, but if either does not meetthe requirements the cable is deemed not to comply.

b) Procedure

The test procedure shall be in accordance with IEC 60840

c) Requirements

For each piece of core, the average values shall be not less than the specified nominal thicknessAnd the smallest value shall be as per clause 10.6.2 of IEC 60840)

9.4.1.2.3 Mechanical, Physical and Chemical Features

Mechanical, physical and chemical features of insulation considered in the present edification mustbe at least equal to the values of table 1 or, if they are not given, to those of IEC 20 A (Central office)51 and 20 A (Secretariat) 44 to be published as IEC 502. 2.

The inspection of these features will be done according to IEC 540 [formerly document IEC 20 A(Central office) 45]

TABLE 1 – Test Procedure and Test Requirements for P. E Compounds and XLPE Compounds

TestMethod Test and procedure Units Insulation PE XLPE

C Mechanical characteristicsWithout aging :--tensile strength minimum N/mm2 125 15. 0

elongation at break minimum

-After aging in air oven :- % 450/350 (1) 250

-temperature (tolerance +2 c) C 100 135

-duration Days 10 10




elongation at break minimum 450/350 (1) 250-variation maximum (2)

-Hot test: Degree of cross linking% +25 +25

-temperature (tolerance + 3 c) (3) 200

-time under load C mm 15

-mechanical stress N/cm2 20-maximum elongation under load % 175

-maximum elongation after cooling % 15

D Water absorptionGravimetric method-Duration of immersion Days 14 14-Temperature (tolerance + 3 C) –- Maximum permissible variation ofmass

Cmg/cm2

851

851(4)

P Shrinkage test-Temperature (tolerance + 2C) C 100 130-Duration Hours 1 1

-Maximum permissible shrinkage % 4 4

(1) LDPE 450 % HDPE 350%.(2) Variation difference between the median value of tensile strength find elongation at break

obtained after treatment and the median value obtained without treatment, expressed as apercentage of the latter.

(3 ) 115 C + 2C for Pewith density > 0.94

(4) 5, instead of 1 for XLPE with a density > 1.02.

9.4.1.3 Screens

9.4.1.3.1 Inner and outer semi – conducting screens.

These screens are obligatory on all cable considered in this specification They shall be continuous,have a constant average thickness, have no asperity and keep in perfect contact with the insulationlayer in normal operation conditions. They shall have no bad action on the conservation of cableelements at their contact and, especially not contain any injurious stuff that could diffuse into theinsulation layer.

a) Inner semi – conducting screen.

This non – metallic screen consists in an extruded layer of a semi – conducting mixture Itsthickness must not be less than 7% of the required average thickness of the insulation layer. Theratio of extreme measured thickness must not be more than 2. The conductor screen shallcomprise an extruded layer of thermosetting semi-conducting compound and shall be continuousand cover the whole surface area of the conductor. The screen shall be firmly bonded to the XLPEinsulation.

A non-hygroscope semi-conducting tape shall be applied to the conductor under the extrudedlayer.

The outer surface of the conductor screen shall be circular and free of irregularities. The visible




irregularities on the outer surface shall be equal or less than 51 µm.

The minimum thickness of the extruded conductor shield shall be 0.76 mm.

The conductor screen must not stick to the conductor. The inner shielding layer and the tapes (ifavailable) must not suffer any change of functionality of the cable at the highest permissible shortcircuit stress.

b) Outer semi – conductor screen.This non-metallic screen consists in an extruded layer of a semi – conductor mixture, the thicknessof which must not be less than 7% of the required average thickness of the insulation layer.Selection of test – pieces and checking of thickness shall be carried out according to IEC 540.The insulation screen shall consist of an extruded layer of thermosetting semi-conductingcompound and shall be continuous and cover the whole surface area of the insulation. It shall befirmly bonded to the insulation.The minimum thickness of the insulation shield shall be 1.02 mm.The interface between the extruded insulation shield and the insulation shall be cylindrical, freefrom protrusions and irregularities that extend more than 0.127 mm into the insulation and 0.127mm into the extruded insulation shield, and shall be free of any voids larger than 0.05 mm.A difference in diameter of the outer shielding layer (max/min) of <1.2 mm, is not compulsory;however bidders confirming compliance with this figure will be given priority.

Water BarriersThe water barrier shall consist of a semi-conducting moisture swelling layer covering the wholesurface area of the insulation screen. The barrier shall restrict longitudinal and horizontal waterpenetration under the metallic sheath.

Either swelling powder or swelling tape is acceptable.

The manufacturer should employ the latest technology in selecting materials and applicationprocedures. A report should be submitted to the employer for comment before manufacture.

All compounds used in protective beddings, servings and over metal sheaths shall be of such anature that in the finished cable they do not crack or run at any temperature likely to be attained intransit to the Site or on the site, before or after laying or when the cables are in operation. Thecompound shall adhere properly to the sheath so that after the coverings are removed, it shall beevident that the metal surfaces were completely covered by closely adherent compound before theremoval of the coverings. Care shall be taken to ensure that the amount of compound applied isretained evenly around the cable. The compounds used shall have no deleterious effect on thesheath, armor or protective coverings.

9.4.1.3.2 Metallic Screen and Metallic Sheath

Screen shall be consist of two layers copper wire and the outer metallic sheath made from acontinues lead pipe, these two sheaths must be to verify 40 kA short circuit current in 1 second,The nominal thickness of the lead sheath shall be so calculated as to make sure the transmission ofa one – phase short circuit current in no case it will be less than the values given in table 2 as afunction of the outer diameter of the cable before being covered with lead.Features of the lead pipe shall comply with article 7 of NFC 32. 050 standards. The measurement ofthe lead pipe thickness shall be carried out according to article 17 of NFC 32. 050. The averagethickness shall not be less than the nominal thickness; besides, the measured thickness at any pointshall not be less than 95 % of the nominal thickness by more than 0.1 mm, preferred lead sheaththickness is between 2.5 and 3.0 mm, its minimum requirement shall comply with IEC 60840 Clause(10.7.1).

A copper screen wire shall be required over the metallic sheath to ensure the required maximum




earth fault current rating of 40 kA for 1 sec.

The cross-section of the copper screen has to be verified with calculations by the Contractor. Asemi-conducting moisture swelling layer shall be applied over the copper screen to restrictaluminium meeting the following requirements:

The lead alloy sheath shall be a combination of copper wire screen.

The cross-section of the copper wire screen shall be sufficiently dimensioned to conduct 100% ofmaximum short circuit current of 40 kA for 1 second. The bidder shall submit the calculation fordetermining the cross-section of the copper wire screen to withstand the specified fault current.

TABLE 2 – Minimum Thickness of the Lead Pipe

The bidder shall submit the calculation for determining the sheath thickness to withstand the specifiedfault current.The sheath shall be designed and manufactured as a homogeneous construction with uniformthickness, close fitting, seamless and free from defects, porosity and inter-crystalline fracture. Thesheath corrugation shall be manufactured to minimize the ingress of moisture even if the serving isdamaged. The value shall be over 3mm and shall be designed for the (1 x 2000mm2 ) AL/ XLPEcable and shall be proven by calculation.

9.4.1.4 Outer Protection Sheath

The outer protection sheath consists in an extruded mixture of black HDPE the mechanical andphysical features of which shall comply to features described in IEC 60840 .

- ST 1, ST 2 for PVC.- ST 3, ST 7 for PE.

The nominal thickness of the outer protection sheath is given as a function of the outer diameter of thecable before being covered with the protection sheath, in table 3. Or any convenient alternative.The outer sheath shall be of sufficient hardness to discourage termite attacks. The cables shall beprotected against bites from rats and other small animals’ at all accessible locations such asterminations at both ends and along road bridges. Each last section or drum of cables terminated atthe substation, laid on bridges shall have flame retardant coating

TABLE 3 – Nominal Thickness of the Outer Protection SheathShall be between 4.5 mm and 5.0 mm, however 6.0 mm can be provided , and should be designed forthe given 1 x 2000 mm2 AL/ XLPE cable. According to IEC 60840 (Clause10.6.3)The measurement of the outer protection sheath shall be carried out according to IEC 540 publishedformally document IEC 20 A 5 (Central office 45).

9.4.2 Marking of Cables.Cables shall have, on their whole length. Readable and durable indicating:

- Name of manufacturer.- Year of manufacture.- Area of conductor.- Specified voltage of cable in kV.- Type of cable.- MOE

The marks shall be visible without being necessary to open the lead sheath, and they shall be madeas follows:-

9.4.2.1 Cables having polyvinyl chloride covering.

The marking is made by deep printing or relief printing on the polyvinyl chloride covering, on twodiametrically opposed generative In this case, the marking shall include distinctive signs for the phaserepairing.




9.4.2.2 Letter sizing

In both cases here above, marking can be discontinuous the space between the end of one print andthe beginning of the following one shall not be longer than one meter. Height of letters and figuresshall not be less than 4 mm.

9.4.3 Accessories

Technical Requirements of Cable Accessories (Please refer 8.2.3)a. All necessary accessories for cable installation shall be very carefully designed and

manufactured. Their constitutive elements shall be of the best quality.

b. Insulators of terminal boxes shall be made of perfectly compact; homogeneous porcelainwithout any air bubbles or porosity. They shall be covered with brown enamel perfectlysmooth, hard and continuous on the whole surface. This enamel shall not be injured by longaction of water, nitric acid or diluted alkalis and shall resist to changes of temperature As ageneral rule, insulators and terminal boxes shall comply respectively to fascicles C 64 080 of8 June 1959 and C 64 050 of 4 June 1953 and additives n 1 of 10 December 1957 and n2 ofFebruary 1963 of U. T. E.

c. A complete set of tools & equipment for jointing the cables & accessories shall be supplied.d. A special program for training the purchasers staff to install and joint the 132kV cable and

accessories must be included in the offer.

9.4.4 Shipment and Reels

9.4.4.1 Packing, sealing and shipping.

a. The cable shall be placed on the reels so that it will be protected from damage during shipment.Each end of the cable shall be firmly and properly secured to the reel. Care shall be taken toprevent looseness of reeled cable.

b. Cables shall be delivered on metallic drums. Pulling eyes shall be fitted to the cable end at the cablemanufacturer's works and shall be bonded to the conductor, metal sheath/metallic layer

c. Immediately after finalizing the factory tests both ends of every cable length shall be sealed bymeans of a metal cap fitted over the end and plumbed to the sheath. Cables shall be sealed byenclosing the ends in approved caps, which shall be tight fitting and adequately secured to preventingress of moisture. The end which is left projecting from the drum shall also be provided with apulling eye and shall be adequately protected against damage. There shall be no water and nocorrosion in the completed cable when the reel is shipped. If the conductor shows evidence of slightcorrosion and no pitting, then the manufacturer shall verify that the cable was dried prior to shipping.

d. Each length of cable listed on the purchaser’s order or detail list shall be shipped on a separate reel,except where the purchaser specifies multiple or parallel cable assemblies.

e. The reels shall be lagged or covered with suitable material to provide physical protection for thecables during roughly transit storage and handling operations. All cables and accessories shall becarefully packed for transport and storage on site in such a manner that they are fully protectedagainst all climatic conditions, particular attention being paid to the possibility of deterioration duringtransport to the site by sea or overland and to the conditions prevailing on the site

9. 4. 4. 2. - Reels.

a. The minimum diameter of the drum of the shipping reel shall be not less than 1. 8 meter.

b. The inner or drum end of the cable, when allowed to project through the flange of the reelshall be protected to avoid damage to the cable seal.

9. 4. 4. 3. - Marking on reels each reel shall be marked as follows: -




a. with a durable label securely attached to a flange of the reel and plainly stating the destination,the purchase’s order number, shipping length of cable on reel, number, type and size ofconductors, cable configuration, type of insulation, voltage rating and shall show identificationthe recorded shipping length of multiple cable assemblies shall be the measured length afterassembly. The direction for rolling shall be indicated by an arrow.

b. with a durable number on a flange of the reel either branded on the reel or stamped metaltags permanently attached to the reel.

c. shipping reels shall be free of any information not pertaining to the order.

9.5 TESTS ON CABLESThe bidder is requested to submit type test reports for cables and accessories for XLPE insulatedcable systems. The type tests must be carried out for cables and accessories identical to theequipment offered.

Bidders shall supply in their bid, a copy of type test of respective cables and accessories issued byan independent, legal laboratory for all items and complete type test results

The type test report shall comprise the following items:

1) Cable manufacturing

• Type of extrusion line

• Method of curing and cooling

• Details of cable degassing

2) Cable materials

• Semi-conducting screen material at the conductor

• Semi-conducting screen material at the cable insulation

• Type and grade of material used for the cable insulation

3) Cable and accessories construction

• Description and drawing of the offered cable type

• Drawing of each tested accessory

The bid shall include all information requested above.

9.5.1 GeneralAll test shall be carried out by the contractor at his own expense. The contractor shall supplyspecimens, testing apparatus and labour required for carrying out the prescribed tests. For thepressure test of high voltage cables at site, the contractor shall make available a suitable D. C. Cabletesting set. The test shall be carried out in the presence of the Inspector at the manufacturer’s works,and of the Engineer at site.

The Bid price shall include the cost of all tests specified. The purchaser may, however, relieve thecontractor from carrying out certain type tests, provided the contractor produces Type TestsCertificate from a recognized testing authority acceptable to the Purchaser. In such case, the contractprice will be reduced by amount equal to the costs of the type tests waived by the Purchaser. For this




purpose Bidder should quote separately the costs of the type tests specified.

All samples used for testing shall be at the contractor’s expense and shall not affect the length ofcable to be supplied under this contract. This also applies to joint boxes and other accessories.

Six copies of the records of all tests shall be furnished to the Engineer. The contract work will not beaccepted by the Engineer until they have passed the prescribed tests and approved in writing by theEngineer.The Contractor shall not be entitled to any payments whatsoever or any extension of time forcompletion because of tests, or failure of any tests or the rejection of any part of material or Project asa result of any tests or inspection.

9.5.2 Calibration

An approved authority shall if required by the Engineer, calibrate all instruments use for testingpurposes.

9.5.3 Test Conditions

9.5.3.1 Frequency and waveform of power – frequency test voltages.

The frequency of alternating test voltages shall be not less than 49 Hz (c/s) and not more than 61 Hz(c/s). The waveform of such voltages shall be substantially sinusoidal.

9.5.3.2 Waveform of impulse test voltages.

The impulse wave shall have a front duration between 1 and 5 ms and a nominal time to half – value of40 to 50 m s being further in accordance with I. E. C Publication 60, High – voltage test techniques.

9.5.3.3 Temperature.

Except where otherwise specified, tests shall be carried out with an ambient temperature between 15and 25 ºC In case the temperature of the conductor is specified, its value shall be obtained byproducing a suitable electric current in the conductor.

9.5.4 Tests At Works

9.5.4.1 Routine tests :

All lengths of cables shall be tested before dispatch according to the following:

9.5.4.1.1 Conductor Resistance Tests :-The copper resistance of the conductors shall be measured by direct current at room temperature andcorrected for temperature in accordance with I. E. C Publication 228 1 -1. The value thus obtainedshall not be greater than the guaranteed values as per I. E. C publications 228 and 1 -1

9.5.4.1.2 Capacitance Tests :The electrostatic capacitance of each drum length of completed cable shall not be greater than theguaranteed values stated in the schedules

9.5.4.1.3 High Voltage Tests :-Before inspection, the Manufacturer will be allowed to test the testing installation by applying analternative voltage of 190 kV between conductor and metallic screen during about 30 minutes. The highvoltage test of each length of cable presented for inspection shall be carried out with an alternativevoltage of 190 kV applied between the conductor and the metallic screen and maintained for 30minutes. If a failure occurs on a length, either during the preceding inspection or during inspection, bothuninjured parts of the considered length will be presented by the manufacturer and shall be accepted bythe ETP Engineer if they support, without any other failure, the test at 190 kV during a total duration of30 minutes including the time they have been under voltage before the failure occurred. If the use ofthat cable requires an additional joint this joint shall be made up at the manufacturer’s expense. If asecond failure occurs on one of both parts, both parts shall be rejected. If the number of failures on thelast 30 kilometres of tested cable is greater than 5, ETP Engineer and the manufacturer shall look




together after the causes of these failures and the ETP Engineer shall decide whether new testingprocedure can be accepted.

9.5.4.1.4 Dielectric Power Factor / Voltage Test:-Each drum length of completed 132kV cable shall be tested for power factor at normal frequency and atambient temperature and at 0. 5 EO, EO, 1. 5 EO and 2Eo.

PE, XLPE Cables :The power factor of the insulation shall not exceed the guaranteed values stated in the schedules or thefollowing values. PE : 0. 0008 XLPE : 0. 0030

9.5.4.2 Special Tests on Cables.

9.5.4.2.1 General

The tests specified in clause 9.5.4.2.2 to 9.5.4.2.4 inclusive shall be made on samples taken fromcables manufactured for the contract (provided that the total length in the contract exceeds 4 km ofcable) on the following basis:

Cable length Number of samples

above up to and including

4 20 1

20 40 2

40 60 3

For the electrical tests, the piece of cable shall be erected with suitable terminations The manufacturermay, in the wishes, carry out more than one of the special tests specified in Clauses 9.5.4.2.2. to9.5.4.2.4 inclusive on one and the same piece of cable, the order in which the tests are performed beingleft to his discretion. However, if on a subsequent test the requirements are not fulfilled, this test shallbe repeated on a new piece of cable and the results of this latter test only shall be valid for the ultimateassessment of the results.

By agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer, any or all the tests prescribed in Clauses9.5.4.2.2. 9.5.4.2.3. and 9.5.4.2.4. may be omitted provided that the test or tests has or havepreviously been made on pieces of cable taken from samples having similar construction to the cableincluded in the contract and the manufacturer produces a certificate to this effect. Similar constructionmeans that the cable included in the contract and the cable covered by the test certificate have identicalcharacteristics in respect of the rated voltage Eo, the impulse with stand voltage EP, the maximumpermissible conductor temperature in degrees Celsius for permanent operation under equivalentspecified ambient and installation conditions the type and material of the metallic sheath details of theconstruction e. g. . types of joint and sealing end and the insulation thickness of the cable and themaximum voltage gradient in the insulation at Eo.

9.5.4.2.2 Power – Factor / Temperature Test.

This test shall be made on a piece of cable at least 20 m long. The Power – factor of the insulationshall be measured at voltages of 0. 5 Eo,Eo,1. 5 Eo and 2 Eo :

a) At ambient temperature,




b) After the cable has been slowly heated to a maximum temperature 5 ºC above the maximumpermissible operating temperature of the conductor,

c) Immediately after cooling to ambient temperature. The cable shall be maintained at eachtemperature until a stable temperature distribution is achieved.

The test temperature shall be the temperature at the hottest point in The cable as determined fromthermocouples placed at intervals along the increase in resistance of the conductor, making dueallowance for the temperature difference between the thermocouples and the conductor. Throughoutthe tests the power factor shall not exceed :The following values at Eo, for PE and XLPE cables :

PE :8. 10-4 & XLPE : 40. 10-4

Variations of the losses angle tangent in the insulation, when the temperature changes from ambient tomaximum operation temperature shall not be more than :

f) 10-4 for PE & 10. 10-4 for XLPE

9.5.4.2.3 Dielectric Security TestA piece of cable 25m in length excluding the terminals shall be subjected at ambient temperature toa power – frequency test voltage applied between conductor and screen The value of the testvoltage shall be 210 kV and it shall be applied for 24 hours without the occurrence of a breakdown ofthe insulation.

9.5.4.2.4 Mechanical Test and Hot Impulse – Voltage Test

The test shall consist of a bending test, followed by an impulse voltage test of the behaviour of theinsulation and by a physical examination of the covering.

A – Bending test.The bending test shall be made at a temperature between 10 ºC and 15 ºC, unless otherwise agreedbetween the purchaser and the manufacturer, on a piece of cable of sufficient length to provide onecomplete turnaround the test cylinder.

The diameter of the test cylinder shall be 30 D, where D is the overall diameter of the cable. Thepiece of cable shall be bent round the test cylinder at least one complete turn. It shall then beunwound and the process repeated in the opposite direction. This cycle of operations shall be carriedout three times if the sheath is offload-alloy.

B- Impulse – Voltage test.The piece of cable shall be heated slowly to a maximum conductor temperature not less than themaximum permissible operating temperature as declared and not greater than the maximumpermissible operating temperature plus 5 ºC The maximum conductor temperature is understood tobe the temperature at the hottest point in the cable and it shall be determined from the increase inresistance of the conductor and from thermocouples placed at intervals along the cable making dueallowance for the temperature difference between the thermocouples and the Conductor. The cableshall be maintained at this test temperature for at least 2 hours. The piece of cable shall then besubjected at the above temperature to 10 positive and 10 negative voltage impulses applied betweenconductor and screen, the peak value being as specified below. The waveform of the impulse testvoltages shall comply with sub – clause 9.5.3.2. A photographic record shall be made of the first andlast impulse waveform of each polarity at the specified impulse level. During this test no breakdownof the insulation shall occur. The peak value of the impulse test voltage shall be Ep=650 kV after theimpulse test, the sample shall be subjected at ambient temperature for 15 minutes to a power –frequency high – voltage test. The value of the test voltage shall be 190 kV for PE or XLPE cable.No, breakdown of the insulation shall occur.

C – ExaminationAfter the high – voltage test, a specimen about 1m in length, taken from the middle of the piece ofcable that has been tested, shall be dismantled and examined. The metal sheath and protective




coverings over the sheath shall not be seriously damaged.

9.5.4.2.5 No Moisture Propagation Test ( for PE and XLPE Cables Only )A piece of cable about 10 meters long in the middle of which a default (a hole of 2cm diameter betweenthe outer sheath and the core) has been prepared is submitted to the following test: The sample isintroduced into a pipe 10 meters long, through suitable watertight jointsThe pipe is filled up with water, the temperature of which must not be less than 20 C. The waterpressure is maintained at 3 bar all along the test After 100 hours, there must be no trace of humidity onthe core at a distance greater than 50 cm from the hole.

9.5.4.2.6 Eld Projection Test ( for PE and XLPE Cables Only )

Sample Void and Contaminant Determination and Conductor Shield and Insulation This shall beprepared as follows: Fifty millimetres of the sample shall be cut helical or in some other convenientmanner to produce thin, cross sectional samples of the insulation and conductor shield. Wafers (orthe turns of the helix) shall be approximately 0. 075 mm thick (producing approximately 60 wafers )The cutting blade shall be sharp and shall produce a sample with uniform thickness and with verysmooth cut surfaces. The sample shall be kept clean and shall be handled carefully to preventscratching the cut surfaces.

2) The entire specimen shall be viewed transmitted light for general determination of freedom from voids,contaminants. And translucent materials in the insulation and between the insulation and conductorshield.

A- A contaminant is any solid or liquid material which is opaque or not homogeneous polyethylenecross linked polyethylene insulation excluding discoloured. Translucent material of less than0.5mm in its radial vector projection.

B- The entire area of 20 consecutive wafers (or equivalent turns of the helical sample) shall beexamined with a minimum of 20power magnification. Including any areas which appear suspectduring the above examination by transmitted light.

C- A tabulation of numbers and size shall be made with a minimum of 20 power magnification of : -all void 0.025 mm in greatest dimension and larger. In cross linked polyethylene; and allcontaminants 0.025 mm in greatest dimension and larger, in polyethylene and cross linkedpolyethylene; and discoloured. Translucent material of more than 0. 025 mm in its radial vectorprojection. This tabulation shall be recorded and reported.

D-The largest void and the largest contaminant shall be marked by encircling and must besubsequently measured on a micrometre microscope.

E- The number of voids, contaminants and translucence per 15 cm 3 of insulation shall be calculatedfrom the tabulation. (The volume of the 20 wafers. Or equivalent turns. May be determined byany convenient method) If the 20 wafers constitute less than 15 cm 3 and if the void orcontaminant count exceeds the allowable number, then a sufficient number of wafers from thesame sample shall be examined to total 15 cm3 of insulation.

3) The largest void, contaminant and translucent material marked on the sample shall be measured with amicrometre microscope using animism of 60-power magnification. The largest

Dimension shall be measured only If voids contaminants or translucence exceed the dimensions shown inTable 2 the sample shall be considered to have failed to meet the test requirements.




Table 2Voids mm Contaminants, mm

Cross inked Cross linkedpolyethylene polyethylene polyethylene Polyethylene

25 75 100 100

4) The contact area between the insulation and conductor shield or insulation shield on the 20 wafers orequivalent turns shall also be examined, using a minimum of 20 power magnification. The sample shallbe considered to have failed to meet the test requirements if the contact surface between the conductorshield or the insulation shield and the insulation has projections or irregularities which extend more than100 mm from the cylindrical suffice of the conductor shield.

5) In case of failure of the original sample ( s ),one sample from each of cable of every shipping reel shallbe tested. In case of failure of one or both of the samples, the cable on the shipping reel from which thesample (s) was taken shall be rejected.

9.6 TESTS ON ACCESSORIES

9.6.1 General

The test specified in clauses 9.6.2 to 9.6.3 inclusive shall be made on the following basis

Number of accessories Number of Samples

3 to 50 1

51 to 100 2

101 to 150 3

The tests shall be carried out for each particular design of joint or sealing end. Both tests shall becarried out on the same sample. (According to clauses 9.6.4 and 9.6.5 , the cable length used fortesting shall be a sample of the cable with which the accessories will be associated in the fieldinstallation. The test shall be considered valid both for the cable and the accessories, provided thecable sample has previously been subjected to the bending test described in Sub-Clause 9.8.1 andthe length of cable between the ends of adjacent accessories is not less than 5 m. These tests onthe assembly consisting of cable and accessories shall be carried out under dry (ambient) conditionsand for oil filled cable, the oil pressure shall be adjusted to the minimum value declared.

9.6.2 Pressure tanks

9.6.2.1 Hydraulic test

A hydraulic pressure, equal to 1. 1 times the operating maximum static pressure of the tank shall beapplied to all tanks before the outer protection has been applied. No leaks shall be visible after thepressure has been applied for 8 hours.

9.6.2.2 Pressure / Volume test

After the test described in Sub-Clause 9.6.2.1 has been completed. The pressure/volumecharacteristic of the tank shall be checked For the purpose of this test, the pressure tank is definedby a curve having as abscise the pressures in kg/ cm² gauge and as ordinates the volumes of oil




trappable from the tank. Such a curve is valid at a given temperature (for instance20 ºC) and between two pressure limits (for instance between 0. 3 and 1. 8 kg/ cm ² gauge) the testshall be carried out as follows:

The tank is filled so that the pressure is at the highest limit. Then, always operating at the giventemperature, measured volumes of oil are successively tapped, and the corresponding pressurevalues noted until the lowest pressure limit is reached. The oil volumes so obtained shall not fallbelow 90 per cent of the nominal values represented by the D D characteristic curve of the type oftank being tested.

9.6.3 Alarm Pressure GaugesThe tripping pressures of the electrical contact gauge shall be checked and shall not vary more than+ 5 per cent from the nominal settings.

9.6.4 Dielectric Security Test (All Kinds of Cable)The test shall be made as specified in Clause 9.5.4.2.3 No. breakdown in any part of the testassembly or flashover of the sealing ends shall occur.

9.6.5 Impulse Voltage Test ( All Kinds of Cable)The test shall be made as specified in Sub – Clause 9.5.4.2.4. B the temperature at the hottest pointof the cable sample being controlled and not that of the accessory. No breakdown in any part of thetest assembly or flashover of the sealing ends shall occur. Arcing horns or rings may be removed forthe test.

9.7 TESTS AFTER INSTALLATION

9.7.1 GeneralOn completion of the contract, the complete installation shall be subjected to electrical tests.

9.7.2 High – Volt Age Test (All Kinds of Cable)After the system has been brought up to its designed oil pressure, the cable joints and sealing endsforming a complete circuit, shall be tested with direct current and shall withstand a voltage equal to310 kV applied between conductor and screen for a period of 15 minutes. Alternatively, the test maybe made with alternating current at a voltage of 135 kV applied for 15 minutes.

9.7.3 Conductor Resistance Test (for information only)When required by the purchaser, the conductor resistance shall be measured and corrected to 20 C

9.7.4 High Voltage Test of The Protection Covering (all kinds of cable)After laying the cable and partially backfilling the trench, and before making the junctions, theprotection covering shall be tested with direct current at a voltage of 20 kV between the metallicscreen and the earth for a period of 5 minutes. This test shall be repeated after the fitting up ofaccessories. For this purpose, all earth connections of the metallic screen shall be made throughunplayable links fitted in a cabinet. If a failure occurs during these tests, the contractor takes care ofputting the installation in good order, until the tests can be carried out satisfactorily. Later on,periodic tests of the dielectric strength of the covering will be carried out with direct current at avoltage of 7kV.

9.8 TESTS CLASSIFICATION – QUALIFICATION – ACCEPTANCE

9.8.1 Tests ClassificationThe above-described tests are classified as:- Type tests: tests carried out on prototypes and heads of series. They may be partially or totally

remade from time to time in order to check that the quality of fabrication is maintained.- Series tests : tests systematically carried out on all lengths manufactured –Acceptance tests :

contract tests witnessed by a representative of the Customer to check the quality of the supplied




equipment

9.8.2 Qualification

9.8.2.1 Qualification Tests

Qualification is obtained when the complete series of verifications and tests of table 7 have beencarried out as type tests, series tests and samples tests the necessary samples being taken from thesame fabricated length of cable. Qualification tests can be carried out, totally or partially, according tothe circumstances, in a laboratory approved by both parties. If some the qualification tests are carriedout at the manufacturers, they shall obligatorily be made in presence of an ETP representative. ETPcan ask, at their own, expense, that these tests which look as type tests be periodically remade, inorder to make sure that the corresponding prescriptions are still fulfilled.

9.8.2.2 Sanctions

If any one of the qualification tests is not successful, the type of equipment is not accepted forqualification, or the qualification may be cancelled if it is a repetition of one of the type tests.

9.8.3 Checking During ManufactureThis includes the verification of the components, all checks the manufacturer thinks useful, so as foreach lot of fabrication, all verifications and tests given in table 7 as being systematic.

9.8.4 Acceptance

9.8.4.1 Acceptance Tests

The procedure of acceptance of a lot be shipped includes inspection of completed cables carrying outof tests given in table 7 as series tests and samples tests. It can also include repetition of some typetests in the conditions of clause 9.8.2of the present specification.

9.8.4.2 Sanctions

Any lot of material, the tests carried out for the acceptance of which are not satisfactory can berejected. However, when the results of tests on samples taken from material to be delivered, are notsatisfactory, it is proceeded to a new inspection of the material in following conditions: all tests arerepeated on a second series of samples the length of which is twice the length of the previous ones.The second series of samples is taken from other fabricated lengths of cable. If the results obtainedon the second series of samples are satisfactory the lot of cable is accepted, except the lengths ofcable which did not give good results in the previous tests. If it is not so, the whole lot of cable isrejected. The manufacturer has free disposal of rejected lengths, but he engages himself not to deliverthem to any department of the ETP.




SPECIFICATION FOR FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND TELECOMMUNICATION

9.9 GENERALThis Specification provides for the survey and verification of existing systems and equipmentparameters, manufacture, testing in factory, supply, delivery, off-loading on site, erection, testing onsite, training of Employer’s staff (in the use and maintenance of), commissioning, setting to work andthe remedying of all defects during the Defect Notification Period of the equipment detailed herein.

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the parameters of the existing systems andequipment owned by the Employer and to ensure that new equipment supplied by the Contractor isfully compatible with such existing systems and equipment. It shall be the responsibility of theContractor, assisted by the Employer, to demonstrate by means of tests at site that the Employerexisting equipment and any supplied by the Contractor perform satisfactorily together, subject to theprovision that any fault or failure of existing equipment shall be the responsibility of the Employer. Itshall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish equipment, which shall meet in all respects theperformance specified under the prevailing site conditions.

This Specification shall be read in conjunction with standard specifications for substations and orpower stations available from Employer. Except where specified herein to the contrary or where thecontext indicates otherwise, the requirements of such specifications shall apply to this Scope of Workas if specified herein.

The Contractor shall agree with the Employer any specific operating parameters that need

to align with the Employer’s existing equipment and networks. All the costs related to the coordinationwith existing systems and updating of Substation automation systems to incorporate the new addition,is deemed to be inclusive in the cable prices unless otherwise specified separately.

9.10 PDH/SDH (STM-1) OPTICAL FIBRE EQUIPMENT

9.10.1 General RequirementsThe digital multiplex equipment shall be universal, software-controlled, and provide various interfacecards to connect tributary interfaces signals such as voice, teleprotection and data to aggregateinterfaces. On aggregate level 2Mbit/s electrical and 8Mbit/s optical interfaces complying with ITU-Trecommendations G. 703 / G. 704 and 2Mbit/s HDSL interfaces shall be available. In addition, opticalSTM-1 aggregate interfaces on 155Mbit/s shall be available. All modules shall form an integrated partof a 19” shelf. The multiplexer shall provide means to drop and insert individual 64 kbit/s signals andallocate them to determined time slots in the 2Mbit/s streams. Path protection on 64 kbit/s and 2Mbit/sshall be supported.

It shall be suitable for operation in a substation with harsh environment as is found in Iraq and withhigh electromagnetic interference, be highly reliable and provide secure communication for real timesignals such as voice, SCADA, teleprotection and status/control signals. The equipment offered shallalready be working successfully in telecommunication networks operated by power utilities. It shallcomply with the latest ITU-T standards and be able to be interconnected with telecommunicationequipment. Any equipment in the network shall be manageable from a control centre and there shallbe means to supervise external/existing equipment as well. As a minimum, modules for the followinguser signals shall be available as plug-in units for the digital multiplexer:

• Analogue subscriber interface: subscriber and exchange side• 4-wire E&M voice interface• G. 703, 64kbit/s data Interface• X. 24/V. 11 (RS-422), N x 64kbit/s data interface• V. 24/V. 28 (RS-232), data interface• V. 35, N x 64kbit/s data interface• Data interface V. 36 (RS-449), N x 64kbit/s data interface (V. 10)• Alarm collection interface• Teleprotection command interface.• Optical protection relay interface• Binary signal (status and control) interface




• 2Mbit/s electrical interface for unframed signals acc. To ITU-T G. 703 and framed signals acc.to G. 703 and G. 704.

• LAN interface 10BaseT Ethernet• ISDN U interface

Additionally, the equipment shall provide the following aggregate interfaces:• STM-1 (155 Mbit/s) optical 1+1 interface for medium and long distances, with automatic laser

shut down.• STM-1 (155 Mbit/s) optical add-drop interface for medium and long distances, with automatic

laser shut down• STM-1 (155 Mbit/s) electrical interface• 34/45 electrical interface• 8 Mbit/s optical interface• Mbit/s HDSL interfaceThe equipment shall be equipped with a ringing generator for analogue subscriber interfaces.

9.10.2 General ConditionsThe same equipment shall be used as a terminal, for through connections (transit, repeater) and asadd-drop multiplexer (ADM) with integrated optical line modules. First order multiplexing (2048 Mbit/s),second order multiplexing (8448 Mbit/s) and STM-1 multiplexer shall be integrated.

Conference for voice channels and point-multipoint function for data signals shall be possible. Theequipment shall be of fully modular design , based on a single 19” shelf.

9.10.2.1 Channel Capacity: Digital Cross Connection

functions. The cross connect capacity should be in the form n x2Mbit/s and should be stated by thebidder and non-blocking. For high-density applications the cross connect capacity shall beupgradeable up to 128x 2Mbit/s.It shall cross-connect 64kBit/s as well as 2Mbit/s (G. 703 unframed and G. 704 framed) and VC12 Thebidder should state cross connect capacity for high density application..

9.10.2.2 Redundant Centralized Functions

The equipment shall be equipped with redundant circuits for all centralized functions.

9.10.2.3 Power Supply

The multiplex equipment shall operate at 48VDC +/- 15%.Redundant power-supply shall be supported.In addition it shall also be possible to use a redundant power source (Dual power feeder).

9.10.2.4 ITU Compliance

The Equipment shall comply to the latest ITU-T recommendations for the Plesiochronousand synchronous hierarchies, such as:

G. 702-704, G. 706, G. 711-714, G. 732, G. 735-737, G. 742, G. 826, G. 823, Q. 552

9.10.2.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Safety Regulations

The equipment shall comply with the EN50022, EN 61000 series of documents, IEC 801-2, IEC 801-6and shall be conformant with CE..

9.10.2.6 Ambient Conditions

Storage and transport: -40. +70°C; 98% (no condensation) Operation: -5... +50 °C, humidity of max.95% (no condensation)

9.10.2.7 Mechanical Construction

The equipment shall be of robust design . All tributary and aggregate units shall be integrated in thesame shelf. All connectors shall be accessible from the front.

9.10.2.8 Network Configuration/Management System

The equipment shall be software programmable, either by a local craft access terminal – preferablynotebook – or a centralized Network Management System (NMS). Traffic through the multiplexer shallunder no circumstances depend on the Network Management System; i. e. the multiplexer has to




operate without being connected to any management system. The Network Management Systemshall be used to supervise the PDH and SDH.

9.10.2.9 1+1 Path Protection

The equipment shall provide means to protect 64 kBit/s channels. The protection shall be end to endfrom one interface (telephone or data) to the other. It shall switch automatically from the main channelto the standby channel. It shall be configurable whether the system switches back to the main channel(reversible switching) or not (non-reversible). If a path has switched to its standby route because themain route is disturbed this shall be indicated with an alarm. The switching shall be done within themultiplexer without using the Network Management System.

9.10.2.10 1+1 Section protection

The equipment shall provide means to protect 8 Mbit/s and 155 Mbit/s connections. It shall bepossible to use two independent links: one as the main and the other as the standby. The system shallautomatically switch to the standby connection and generate an alarm if the main connection isdisturbed. The switching shall be done within the multiplexer without using the Network Management

System.

9.10.2.11 Network Topology

It shall be possible to build point to point, linear, ring, T, and meshed networks.

9.10.2.12 Synchronization

The equipment shall be synchronisable with an external clock, with connected 2048 Mbit/s signals and/or with internal oscillator. The synchronization shall be configurable and it shall be possible todistribute the synchronization to other equipment as well. The system shall have means to switch toselect the synchronization source as well as means to prevent the system from switchingsynchronization loops. The equipment shall be capable select the synchronization source by means ofthe SSM (Synchronization Status Messaging) feature according to ITU-T G. 704 or priority based.

9.10.2.13 Alarms

Each module shall supervise its functions and shall have an alarm-indication LED on its front. Allalarms shall be collected by the NMS. Each node shall be capable to collect up to 50 external alarms..

9.10.2.14 Test Loops

The equipment shall provide means to loop signals on 64kBit/s level as well as on 2Mbit/s level. Itshall indicate an alarm if a loop is activated. It shall have the possibility to determine the time afterwhich an activated loop is switched back.

9.10.2.15 Maintenance Facilities

Every Network Element shall have a built-in Signal Generator and Analyzer to 138 luminicommunication paths. It must be possible to cross connect the Generator and Analyzer totransmission channels and terminate the signal in other Network Elements. The configuration must bepossible locally with the craft access terminal and remotely with the NMS or the craft access terminal.It must be possible to loop-back signals locally and remotely using the craft access terminal or theNMS.

9.10.3 Requirements for Transport Level

9.10.3.1 SDH Aggregate Units

The interface shall be designed for use on single mode non-zero dispersion shifted fiber (NZ-DSF)according to ITU-T G655 (at 1310nm, 1550nm and 1625nm). The Bidder should state the type ofoptical connectors.

The following main functions shall be supported:Termination of the OS-, RS-, MS- and VC-4 layerExtraction and insertion of the SOH communications informationThrough connections of VC-12 and VC-3The following maintenance functions shall be supported :Status indications




LoopsRestart after ALSTTI monitoringBIP Error InsertionThe following SDH interfaces shall be available :STM-1 (155Mbit/s) optical 1-port interfaceSTM-1 (155Mbit/s) optical 2-port interfaceThis interface shall provide Multiples Section Protection (MSP) :1+1 Section ProtectionSTM-1 (155Mbit/s) electrical 1-port interface

9.10.3.2 HDSL Trunk Units

2Mbit/s HDSL interface The HDSL interface shall provide means to interconnect the multiplexer overtwo pairs of copper wire up to a distance to be stated by the bidder and the type of modulations shouldbe mentioned. It shall communicate either with another interface of the same type or with a remotedesktop terminal.

9.10.4 2 Mbit/s HDSL Desktop TerminalThis Terminal shall provide a HDSL interface to transmit 2Mbit/s over two pairs of copper over adistance up to 12 km. It shall be housed in a metallic indoor case. The following interfaces shall beavailable:

• G. 703, 2Mbit/s, 75 ohm• G. 703, 2Mbit/s, 120 ohm• X. 21/V11, N x 64kBit/s (N = 1.. 32)• V. 35, N x 64kBit/s (N = 1.. 32)• V. 36 / RS449, N x 64kBit/s (N = 1.. 32)• LAN connection:

10BaseT Ethernet connection for e. g. router supportingLAN protocols: IP, IPX; Routing Protocols: RIP; W AN protocols: HDLC, PPP, Frame Relay (includingRFC 1490). It shall inter-operate with Cisco, W ellfleet, 3Com etc. and be manageable locally,remotely, and with Telnet and SNMP. Two such Desktop Terminals shall be connectable to provide a2Mbit/s link over two pairs of copper.

9.10.4.1 HDSL Repeater

An HDSL repeater solution for distances longer than 12km shall be offered including a remotepowering solution.

9.10.4.2 HDSL Line Protection

The HDSL equipment shall (where necessary) be protected against influences of induced voltages upto 10 kV.

9.10.5 Arm Units

9.10.5.1 Wire Interface (VF interface)

This interface shall provide multi voice channels with a bandwidth of 300 Hz... 3. 4 kHz and 2 signallingchannels (M => E, M‟ => E‟) per voice channel. Each interface shall be configurable to operate with orwithout CAS. The bist which will be used with CAS should be stated according to ITUrecommendation. The level shall be software adjustable Modules where each interface can beindividually configured with 1+1 path protection shall be available.

9.10.5.2 Analogue Subscriber Interface

The number of interface should be stated by the bidder. High-density subscribers can be providedwith number of subscriber to be stated by the bidder. The ringing generator shall be integrated in thesubscriber module interface. The ringer frequency shall be adjustable for 20Hz, 25Hz, and 50Hz.The following main functions shall are supported:

Downstream signallingRingingMeteringPolarity reversalReduced battery




No battery Upstream signallingOn/off-hookPulse and DTMF diallingFlash impulseEarth key General:Constant current line feedingLine testPermanent line checksCLIP (On-hook VF transmission)Metering after on-hook

9.10.5.3 Exchange Interface

This interface shall provide many interfaces to connect remotely connected analogue subscribers to anexchange. The number of interfaces should be specified by the bidder It shall provide the followingfunctions:

pulse diallingtone dialling (DTMF)earth key functionmetering function(12 kHz or 16 kHz).Flash impulsepolarity reversal indication of busy lines The following parameters shall be configurable bysoftware:

input voice level -5 to +4 dBoutput voice level -7. 5 to -1 dB r metering pulse enable/disable signalling bit definition loop back ofvoice to the telephone

9.10.5.4 Party Line Telephone System (Engineering Order Wire)

An engineering order wire (EOW ) facility shall be provided at each multiplexer. The EOW shall beconfigured as a party line and use in band DTMF signalling to call another EOW – Terminal.The Terminal shall have an integrated DTMF decoder allowing to program a subscriber call number(….. digits), and ….. group call numbers (….. digits each). The EOW functionality can also berealized by using Voice over IP (VoIP) routed over the management channel.

9.10.5.5 V. 24/V. 28 RS232 Interface

It shall support the following bit rates:0 to 0. 3 kbit/s transp. (V. 110)

g) 6 to 38. 4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous (V. 110).Modules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall beprovided.

9.10.5.6 V. 11/X. 24 Interface

This interface shall comply to the ITU-T X. 24 recommendation for signal definition and toV. 11 for electrical characteristics.It shall support the following bit rates:48, 56, N x 64 kbit/s (N = 1 to 30) synchronous

h) 6 to 38. 4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous (X. 30)Modules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall beprovided.

9.10.5.7 V. 35 Interface

This interface shall comply with the ITU-T V. 35 and V. 110 recommendations.It shall support the following bit rates:48, 56, N x 64kbit/s (N = 1 to 30) synchronous

i) 6 to 38. 4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronousModules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall beprovided.

9.10.5.8 V. 36 / RS 449 Interface

This interface shall comply with the ITU-T V. 36 and V. 110 recommendations.




It shall support the following bit rates:48, 56, N x 64kbit/s (N = 1 to 30) synchronous

j) 6 to 38. 4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronousModules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall beprovided.

9.10.5.9 64 kbit/s Co-directional Interface

This interface shall comply with the ITU-T G. 703 part 1. 2. 1 for co-directional data transfer. A moduleshall have at least 8 interfaces.Modules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall beprovided.

9.10.5.10 LAN Interface

There shall be a 10BaseT interface available with Router Bridge and FRAD Functionavailable. The following specification shall be covered:Ethernet connection: 10BaseTLAN protocols: IP, IPXRouting Protocols: static IP route, OSPF2 V2WAN protocols: PPP, Frame Relay (including RFC 1490)The interface shall be manageable locally, remotely, with the management system of the platform.The LAN interface shall support linear-, ring- and star-configurations.The WAN side shall support link capacities n*64kBit/s and 2Mbit/s.

9.10.5.11 Alarm Interface

This interface shall provide means to collect various alarms, which will be displayed, on the NetworkManagement System. It shall be used to manage non-PDH equipment with the

PDH Network Management System. It shall have at least 24 binary inputs and at least 4 outputs,which can be switched by the Network Management System.

It shall be possible to connect an input to an output so that if an alarm occurs, the output contact will beswitched. It shall be possible to label an alarm. The label-text shall be read from the interface moduleso that it can be indicated on the Network Management System as well as on the local craft terminal.

9.10.5.12 Tele protection Interface

This interface shall provide a means to transmit four bi-directional command channels. The signalsshall be adjustable from 24 to 250Vdc by means of software. All inputs and outputs shall be isolatedand with EMC immunity for harsh environment. Security, Dependability and Transmission speed shallbe selectable and programmable. It shall be able to drop and insert commands, transfer commands asa transit station and to have AND- and OR-connections between commands. The interface shallsupport T-nodes.

The teleprotection interface shall provide an integrated non-volatile event-recorder which shall besynchronisable either internally or by GPS or a command counter which counts trip commands.

The teleprotection interface shall provide means for signal delay measurement.

1+1 protection must be available; the switching shall be done within less than 10ms. (possible time tobe stated by the bidder)

The interface shall do automatic loop test as frequently as possible. Under no circumstances shall theinterface cause trip-commands in case of power supply failure or when put in or out of service.

It shall be possible to synchronise all teleprotection interfaces with one GPS in one station.

The GPS time shall be distributed over the teleprotection channel.

9.10.5.13 Optical Protection Relays Interface

This interface shall have an optical port to connect protection relays for teleprotection to themultiplexer. It shall operate according IEC 60870-5-1, format class FT 1. 2 on 1300nm using MCMIline coding.




9.10.5.14 Binary Contact Interface

This interface shall provide means to transmit binary signals.

The inputs and outputs shall be isolated.

The inputs shall be suitable for 24Vdc to 60Vdc.

Outputs shall be solid state relays.

The interface shall provide a 24Vdc short circuit proofed auxiliary power supply. It shall be able to dropand insert commands, transfer commands as a transit station and to have AND- and OR-connectionsbetween commands, .

The Teleprotection interface shall provide an integrated event recorder, which shall be synchronisableeither internally or by GPS.

9.10.5.15 2 Mbit/s G. 703 / G. 704 Interface

This interface shall comply with the ITU-T G. 703 and G. 704 recommendations.

The interface module shall have at least four interfaces to be activated individually. It shall be possibleto have 128 interface modules per multiplexer. In order to connect different equipment, the interfacesshall be available with the impedance of 120 ohms and 75 ohms.

The interface shall support CRC-4 multi-frame according to ITU-T G. 704 (enabled and

disabled by software).

The CAS signalling according to ITU-T G. 704 table 9 shall be activated optionally.

The interface shall be able to extract the 2.048 MHz clock, which can be used to synchronize themultiplex equipment.

The interface module shall support 2Mbit/s loop-back of the incoming signal as well as the

loop-back of the internal signals.

9.10.5.16 ISDN U Interface

There shall be ISDN U interfaces available for subscriber and exchange side. The interface shall bebased on 2B1Q code and provide 8 ISDN U lines.

9.10.6 Optical AmplifierIn case of long distance communication, which cannot be covered by standard a optical interface, anoptical amplifier shall be applied.

9.10.7 Summary of StandardsThe Equipment shall comply with the latest ITU-T recommendations for the Plesiochronous andsynchronous hierarchies.The equipment shall be KEMA type tested.In particular the mentioned recommendations shall be covered:

9.10.7.1 PDH Interfaces

The PDH interfaces shall conform to the following recommendations:

ITU

- ITU-T G. 702: General aspects of digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment – Digitalhierarchy bit rates

- ITU-T G. 703: Digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment – General Physical/electricalcharacteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces

- ITU-T G. 704: Digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment – General Synchronous framestructures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736 kbit/s hierarchical levels

- ITU-T G. 706: General aspects of digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment – Framealignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structuresdefined in recommendation G. 704




- ITU-T G. 711: Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies

- ITU-T G. 712: Transmission performance characteristics of pulse code modulation channels

- ITU-T G. 732: General aspects of digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment –Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s

- ITU-T G. 735: Characteristics of primary multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s and offeringsynchronous digital access at 384 kbit/s and/or 64 kbit/s

- ITU-T G. 736: General aspects of digital transmission – Characteristics of a synchronous digitalmultiplex equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s.

- ITU-T G. 737: Characteristics of external access equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s and offeringsynchronous digital access at 384 kbit/s and/or 64 kbit/s

- ITU-T G. 823: The control of jitter and wander within digital networks, which are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy

- ITU-T G. 826: Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit ratedigital paths at or above the primary rate.

9.10.7.2 Architecture of Optical SDH interfaces

The architecture of optical SDH interfaces shall conform to the following recommendations:

ETS/EN

- ETS 300 147: Synchronous digital hierarchy multiplexing structure

- ETS 300 7: Transmission and Multiplexing €; Generic requirements of transport functionality ofequipment

- ETS 300 7-1-1 / EN 300 7-1-1 V1. 1. 2: Generic Processes and Performance

- ETS 300 7-2-1 / EN 300 7-2-1 V1. 1. 2: SDH and PDH Physical Section Layer Functions

- ETS 300 7-3-1 / EN 300 7-3-1 V1. 1. 2 : STM-N Regenerator & Multiplex Section LayerFunctions

- ETS 300 7-4-1 / EN 300 7-4-1 V1. 1. 2 : SDH Path Layer Functions

ITU- ITU-T G. 707: Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy

- ITU-T G. 783: Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH): equipment functional blocks

- ITU-T G. 803: Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

- ITU-T G. 805: Generic functional architecture of transport networks

- ITU-T G. 826: Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit ratedigital paths at or above the primary rate

- ITU-T G. 8 : Types and characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) network protectionarchitectures

- ITU-T G. 957: Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digitalhierarchy

- ITU-T M. 2101. 1: Performance limits for bringing into service and maintenance of internationalSDH paths and multiplex section

- ITU-T T. 50: International Reference Alphabet (IRA) – Information technology 7 bit coded characterset for information interchange

9.10.7.3 Synchronization and Timing of Optical SDH Interfaces

The synchronization and timing of optical SDH interfaces shall conform to the followingrecommendations:

ETS/EN- ETS 300 7-6-1 / EN 300 7-6-1 V1. 1. 2: Synchronisation Layer Functions




- ETS 300 462-1 / EN 300 462-1-1 V1. 1. 1: Transmission and Multiplexing €; Generic requirementsfor synchronization networks; Part 1: Definitions and terminology for synchronization

networks- EN 300 462-4-1 V1. 1. 1: Transmission and Multiplexing €; Generic requirements for

synchronization networks; Part 4-1: Timing characteristics of slave clocks suitable forsynchronization supply to Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) and Plesiochronuous DigitalHierarchy (PDH) equipment

- ETS 300 462-5 / EN 300 462-5-1 V1. 1. 2: Transmission and Multiplexing €; Generic requirementsfor synchronization networks; Part 5: Timing characteristics of slave clocks suitable for operation inSynchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment

ITU- -ITU-T G. 813: Timing characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment slave

clocks (SEC)

9.10.8 Synchronization EquipmentA master clock for the synchronization of the SDH equipment shall be provided. This shall be a TypeXL-DC or similar. The supplier should be True Time or similar.

9.10.9 Test EquipmentThe following test equipment shall be provided:

9.10.9.1 Optical Power Meter

Optical Power Meter for 1300 nm and 1550 nm, handheld: OLP-6 or similar Suppliers: Acterna orsimilar

9.10.9.2 Digital Communication Analyzer

Digital Communication Analyzer: for signal analysis on 64kbit/s and 2Mbit/s level Suppliers: Acterna orsimilar

9.10.9.3 Optical Time Domain Reflectometer OTDR

Optical Time Domain Reflectometer Suppliers : Anritsu, Fujicura or similar

9.10.9.4 Test Equipment for Telprotection Module

Test equipment for Telprotection Module: Test set or similar Suppliers: Teleprotection module producer orsimilar

9.10.10 AbbreviationsADM Add-drop multiplexed

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

BIP Bit Interleaved Parity

CAS Channel Associated Signalling

CAP Carrier-less Amplitude and Phase

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

EN European Norm

EOW Engineering Order W ire

ETS European Telecommunications Standards

GPS Global

HDSL High Density Subscriber Line

IEC International Electrical Commission




ITU International Telecommunication Union.

IP Internet Protocol

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

MCMI Multi Coded Mark Inversion

MS Multiplex Section

NE Network Element

NMS Network Management System

LAN Local Area Network

OS Optical Section

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

PDH Plesiochronuous Digital Hierarchy

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

RS Regenerator Section

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SOH Section Overhead

STM Synchronous Transport Module

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TTI Trail Trace Identifier

VC Virtual Container

VF Voice Frequency.




9.11 UNDERGROUND OPTICAL FIBER CABLE SPCIFICATIONS

9.11.1 SpecificationsThis Specification defines the requirements for the design, manufacture, supply of fiber opticunderground fiber optic cables. (installation if required ).

9.11.1.1 Scope of work

The Contractor shall include design, manufacture, supply, including all the necessary fittings andoptical joint enclosures, optical terminal boxes, splicing, and installation materials to complete thesystem. Details as below:

A.

1. The optical fibres shall be of single mode type and shall conform to IEC 60793-2-50-B4, IEC 60794and ITU-T recommendation G. 655 with transmission of information at all ITU-T recommendedrates for PDH and SDH systems.

2. The fibre shall have triple operative windows, at 1310 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelength.

3. Minimum of 24 fibre cores.

4. Optical fiber cable with loose tube construction.

Under all conditions, prior to and after installation, the maximum optical attenuation shall be:

At 1450 nm ≤ 0. 24 dB/km

1550 nm ≤ 0. 20 dB/km

1625 nm ≤ 0. 22 dB/km

Each individual fibre shall be colour coded for identification purposes, with details of the colour codingscheme adopted being provided in the Bid.

The fibre cables shall be able to withstand temperature cycling in the range -20°C to +80°C withoutchanging the optical values during laying, installation, stocking and transportation.

B. Optical fibre approach cable with associated hardware suitable for direct burial.C. Distribution patch panel for rack mounting, including patch cord for connecting OFAC to the optical line

terminal equipment (OLTE).

The contractor shall provide Full details of the fibre optic cables, including:

1. Cable construction and materials, including the Mechanical Failure Load (MFL), Rated TensileStrength (RTS) and Specified Maximum Working Tension (SMWT).

2. Installation methods and materials.

3. Jointing methods, materials and mounting arrangements.

4. Physical protection against the ingress and transmission of moisture.

5. Identification marking and fibre coding.

D. (if required) The Contractor shall ensure supervision by staff from the manufacturer, duringInstallation of fibre optical cable and guidance at site to the contractor’s and Employer’s Engineer, and




for the testing, commissioning and successfully putting into Operation of the fibre optical cable system intotality.

E. Distribution patch panels used for termination of the OFAC and connection to the OLTEshall be Located in the existing telecom room.

F. Terminal equipment in each substation chosen as a node in an SDH network based on STM-1 orhigher.

G. Necessary erection material for the equipment in the substation tools and Maintenance equipment fortest and commission.

H. Training for the customer staff should be realized in numbers as shown in table and to comply with thedifferent specification required i. e. Training for Installation, splicing, using OTDRs and chromaticdispersion measurements, training for maintenance equipment. Training should be made in themanufacturing country.

Witnessing of all the optical fibre cable and equipment Testing by customer staff should be made beforeshipment.

9.11.1.2 Underground Fibre Optic Cable

Underground fibre optic cable shall be installed to provide a fibre optic link between the substationsas fibre optic cable link.

The cable is to be duct type with 24 fibres according to ITU-T G 655,

The cable is to have fibre reinforced plastic strength member, loose tubes filled with thixotropic jelly,PE fillers, glass or aramid yarn, peripheral strength member, petroleum jelly, polyester tape corewrapping, polyethylene overall sheathed. The cable life is to no less than 25 years. Themechanical specification is to be according to:

design- Tensile performance under load is to be according to ITU-L. 14.- Operating temperature : -20 to 80 º C.- Crush Resistance >2 kN/10 cm.- Pulling resistance >2 kN.- Impact resistance at MPT: 12 Newton meter.- Minimum bending radius during installation: 15 times cable diameter.- Minimum bending radius at zero tension: 10 tomes cable diameter- Longitudinal water blocking (L-test): 1 m water deep for 3 m cable length for 24 hours.- Packing length : 4 – 5 km.-

The fibres of these cables are to be terminated in the communication room to rack mounted patchpanels of size 144 for 132kV S/Ss and 288 for 400 kV substations, the extra size is for futureexpansion.

Armouring shall be used for all direct buried cables or for cables requiring rodent protection. Thisshall comprise at least one layer of galvanized steel tape 0. 2 mm thick or steel laminated sheathapplied directly to the cable core. All armouring shall be protected from corrosion and damage by apolyethylene sheath.

9.11.1.3 Optical Fibbers:

- Total number of fibers : 24- The fibre type is to be according ITU-T G 655, non-return to zero-dispersion shifted fibre NZ-DSF and

according to IEC 60793-2-50. B4 The project is to conform to the following items in G. 655 :

• Attenuation with detailed total attenuation due to fiber attenuation, splice loss and connector loss.• Chromatic dispersion equation at different wavelength with reference to 1550 nm dispersion.• Differential Group Delay (DGD) with reference to IEC. T R 61282-3.




9.11.1.3.1 Attenuation: At1450 nm ≤ 0. 24 dB/km1550 nm ≤ 0. 20 dB/km1625 nm ≤ 0. 22 dB/km

9.11.1.3.2 Chromatic DispersionAt 1530-1565 nm : 2. 0 – 4. 0 ps/nm. km.To be according to A of G. 655 recommendation.

9.11.1.3.3 Polarization Mode Dispersion:To be according to IEC 60794-3 and shall have a maximum value of ≤ 0. 05 ps/√km

9.11.1.3.4 Induced Attenuation:For temperature between -60 ºC to + 80 ºC ≤ 0. 05 dB/Km at 1550 and 1625 nm.

9.11.1.3.5 Coating Diameter: 250 ± 15 µm.

9.11.1.3.6 Fibre carrying tubeThe fibres are to be inserted in loose buffer tubes filled with nonconductive homogenous gel which is to bestable even at 180 ºC at short circuit current or lighting.

9.11.1.3.7 Measurements:Measurements of the fibre characteristics are to be according to IEC 60793-2-B4 which

is applicable to NZ-DSF and to IEC-60793-1 with all characteristics are to be according

to the parameters indicated in this standard and as follows:

1-20- Measurement fibre geometry.

1-21- Measurement of coating geometry.

1-22- Length measurement.

1-30- Fibre proof test.

1-31- Tensile strength test.

1-32- Coating strip ability.

1-33- Stress corrosion susceptibility.

1-34- Fibre curl.

1-40- Fibre attenuation.

1- Fibre bandwidth.

1-42/2007- Chromatic dispersion.

1-43/2001- Numerical aperture.

1-44/2001- Cut-off wavelength.

1-45/2002- Mode field diameter.

1-46/2001-Monitoring of changes in optical transmittance.

1-47/2009- Micro-bending loss.

1-48/2007- Polarization mode dispersion.

1-49/2003- Differential mode delay.

1-50/2001- Damp heat (steady state).

1-51/2001- Dry heat.




1-52/2001- Change of temperature.

1-53/2001- Water immersion.

1-54/2003- Gamma irradiation.

9.11.1.4 Compliance with Standards

Underground Fibre Optic Cable manufacturing according to IEC60793/60794 & ITU-TG655, Otherstandard may also be acceptable provided that they recommend equal or higher standardManufacturers shall give in their bids the copies of the standards and recommendations according towhich they will manufacture & install their goods.The optical fibre cable shall be manufactured, tested and commissioned in accordance with a qualityassurance and quality control system in conformity with ISO certificates.

9.11.1.5 Technical Characteristics and Diagrams

The bidders shall give the following information in their bids, in addition to the information shown onthe enclosed “ List of Guaranteed technical characteristics “ in metric system units.

a) Ultimate tensile strength and the method of determination.

b) Description, dimensions, drawings and weights of drums.

9.11.1.6 The ducts:

The ducts are to be Pliable Conduit tubes with outer diameter of 40 mm and of 3. 5 mm wallthickness tested in accordance with EN 61386-1:2008 and EN 61386-24:2010:

- Inner diameter : 33 mm.

- The coefficient of friction of the inner surface is to be less than 0. 1

- Maximum installation tension > 3. 7kN

- Compression. The product shall show no more that 15% deflection when subjected to a load nogreater than 1700 Newton’s in accordance with EN 61386-1:2008

- Impact. The product shall withstand (no cracks or fractures) when subjected to a 15 Joule impac– 5 degrees centigrade in accordance with EN 61386-1:2008.

- Tensile Strength. The product shall withstand a tensile load of 4. 5kN for which the elongationshall be no greater than 5% in accordance with EN 61386-1:2008 –W hen using air pressure toblow in the cable during installation, the duct shall withstand a blow pressure no greater than1500Kpa (15Bar

- Length on a drum: 1750 m.

- Accessories to be delivered with these HDPE ducts are:

- Joints with no cable inserted

- Sealing plugs with cable inserted

- Sealing plugs with no cable inserted

- Maintenance joints with cable inserted.

9.11.1.7 Compressor Machines:

These machines are to self-powered by a diesel generator and to include the followings: - Heavy dutyair compressor tractor for cable placement within a range of 30 cubic meter per minute of aircompression.

- Cable tractor self-loading by use of hydraulic lift system with a capacity of 1. 5 MT to carry thecable drums.




- Coupler assembly vise for alignment of the conduit ends.

- Conduit conformance kit for testing the integrity of conduit sections, verify conduit air pressurewhich includes threaded adaptors, pressure gauges and hose clamps. We advise thecontractor to have a look at Air-Trak Company products or any other similar company products.

9.11.1.8 Patch Panels

All substations are to be equipped with optical fibre patch panels, rack mounted, dust proof type. Thetype of connectors could be type LC. The connectors shall meet the following performancerequirements which shall be repeatable up to 500 times.

- Insertion Loss no greater than 0. 2dB

- Return loss greater than 50dB

For of 132kV substations, the size of the patch panels are to be of 144 fibre size and for 400kVsubstations are to be of 288 fibre size to take into account future expansions.

9.11.1.9 Test and splicing machine Equipment:

The test equipment to be supplied with OPGW and accessories are:

9.11.1.9.1 Splicing Machine:The splicing machines require are to be suitable for NZ-DSF fibres with automatic

Alignment. The average loss of a splice at 1550 nm shall be less or equal to 0. 04 dB.

It shall be supplied with following accessories:

Built in heat shrink oven, high precision fibre cleaver, 250 µm fibre holder, jacket remover,

Hard transit case, built in battery charger, built in AC adaptor, power cords, spare

Electrodes, cleaning tools, fibre protection sleeves.

9.11.1.9.2 OTDR:

It shall work on three wavelengths, 1310, 1550, 1625 nm with optical power output of 43, 45, 43 dBmrespectively, with dynamic range of 250 km and 1 m resolution. It shall have the following facilities:splice loss report, passive optical network (PON) mode with ability to classify 1X32 splitter. Pulsewidth can be chosen from 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, 10000 ns. Dead zone accordingto back-scattering of 8/6/6 m and according to Fresnel zone of 4/3/3 m of above wavelengthsrespectively.

9.11.1.9.3 Light or Laser Source:

Handheld laser source for quick measurement. To work at 1550 nm, with optical power of 1 dBm withbuilt in battery, that can be connected to optical fibre NZ-DSF connector type LC or any one of the fourtypes mentioned above.

9.11.1.9.4 Optical Power Meter:To work at 1550 nm wavelength, can store the information in a built in memory of 4 MB, can beaccessed through RJ-45 by a computer, with built in battery. Anritsu CMA50 or equivalent would meetour requirements.

9.11.1.9.5 Chromatic DispersionThe type method to be used is to be one of the following three:• Fibre Brag Grating (FBG).• Virtual Image Phased Array (VIPA).• Gires-Tournois Etalon (GTE).It is left to the contractor to choose one of the three methods above based on technical reasons which

must be given.




9.11.1.9.6 Tool Kit:Fujikit-03 of Fujikura or equivalent.

9.11.1.10 TESTS

The standard to be used in tests and inspection shall be the same as the ones used in manufacturingprocess by the manufacturer who must inform ETP about which standards he would use before theorder become effective.

k) Test ClassificationRequired tests include type tests, Sample test and Routine tests, as defined in subsequentparagraphs.

B. Test Methods

The supplier shall conform to international standards and methods for the tests which are notdescribed in this specification

C. Factory Acceptance Tests

This test is to be done by Moe engineers who have been trained in the OPGW manufacturing Projectgiven all facilities to conduct these tests.

These test are :

2. Type Test for Optical Fibre

Attenuation test according to IEC 60793-C1 and IEC 60793-C2 (Temperature, wavelengthand bending).

3. Tensile Test

A sample of 80 m length of OPGW is to be subjected to 72% of its ultimate tensilestrength (UTS) for attenuation measurement. Result: Maximum extra attenuation ≤ 0. 02dB/km at 1550 nm.

4. Crush Test

A sample of 80 m long to be subjected to load of 5 kN for 24 hours, then its attenuationis to be measured at 1550 nm. Result: No change.

5. Bending Test

A repeated bending loss is to be carried with a minimum radius specified in G-655 whichshould have no effect.

6. Lighting Test

A sample of 10 m sample which is to be subjected to DC lightning of 70-90 mmproduced by 200-400 Ampere current with a duration of 250-500ms causing a chargetransfer of 100 Coulombs or more.

By measurement and monitoring of above effects, the result is to be based on thefollowings:

Maximum temperatures of the optical fibres are to be less than 180º C.

Maximum extra attenuation after this effect is less than 0. 04 dB.

Extra attenuation during the lightning is to be less than 0. 2 dB.

Damage to the steel and 151aluminium wires is to be less than 15%.

7. Temperature cycling Test

A sample of 80 m of the cable is to be inserted in water with measurement of theattenuation at 65, 40, 20, 0 and 10º C. Result: No change.

8. Water penetration test




shall be carried out according to the IEC 794-1/E5.

9. Repeated bending test

shall be carried out according to the IEC 794-E6. No damage to fibers or optical unitshall occur.

10. . High temp. stability of filling compound according to the EIA455-S1/A

Routine Test for optical fibre

- Mode filed diameter test (ace. To IEC 793-1-C9A).

- Bandwidth test (ace. To IEC 793-1C4 and C5).

- Chromatic dispersion test (ace. To IEC 793-1-C5).

- Cut-off wavelength test (ace. To IEC 793-C7A).

- Refracted near field distribution & geometric tests (ace. To CCITT G 653).

- Core and cladding refraction index (indicate method of determination).

- Numerical aperture (NA) (indicate method of determination).

9.11.1.11 Packing & Shipment

Reels shall have a structure suitable for overseas transportation and handling. Also the reels shall beof heavy – duty construction suitable for use with tension stringing equipment. The woods used tocover the wires shall be made of a good quality wood. W ire ends shall be secured to the reels so thatslippage does not occur at any time. Each reel shall be suitably labelled or marked to indicate thefollowing information: -

The name or symbol of the Manufacturer,

The name of the buyer,

Order number.

Year of manufacture.

Net weight of the reel in kegs.

Gross weight of the reel in kegs.

Direction to unreel.

Destination

Other necessary information if any.

The Underground Fibre Optic Cable Manufacturer shall take the necessary means so that the numberof splices should be kept at minimum. The length of optical fibre cable should be ( 4 – 5 ) km in eachreel. The cable ends are to be sealed with shrinkable plastic tubes.

9.11.2 SPECIFICATION OF FIBER OPTIC CABLES

9.11.2.1 Scope of Bid:

This Bid includes for the manufacture, testing, packing, shipping, delivery C&F Baghdad of pilot cable.

9.11.2.2 General:

The pilot cable of 3 quads 4 x 0.9 mm Dia. Plus 6 twisted pairs of 0. 9 mm Dia., Jelly filled, directlyburied type are required to be laid along high tension cables of 132kV having short circuit level of40kA/sec.

The main functions of these pilot cables are to carry protection signalling for H. T cables, telephonecommunications, telemetering and telesignaling. Its construction must give good protection againstmagnetic influence from the nearby power cable and low disturbance level. The cable shall in generalcomply to latest relevant I. E. C recommendation. The materials used shall be suitable for thefollowing climatic and soil condition.




f) Ambient temperature :Highest maximum (in the shade) 50 c for about 6 hours a dayLowest minimum –10CMaximum yearly average + 30C Maximum daily average + 40C

B. Sun temperature:Black objects under direct sunshine attain a temperature 80C.

C. Air humidity:Maximum 92 % at 40C Minimum 12 %Yearly average 44 %

D. Altitudes:From sea level up to (1000 m)

9.11.2.3 Standard:

The cables shall be in accordance with latest issue of the relevant I.E.C recommend any where thesespecifications are incomplete or not yet published, then the national standards of Bidder’s country shallbe considered subject to ETP approval and a copy of the same should be sent with offer.

9.11.2.3.1 Deviation:The Bidder shall particularly mention in this Bid all deviations of this offer from the specification describedin these Bid document.

9.11.2.4 Cable construction Constructors for pairs and quads

- Constructor: Plain annealed, homogenous solid copper wire of diameter not less than 0. 9 mm- Insulation: Extruded polyethylene round the conductor.- The pairs and quads shall be identified by different colouring according to IEC Recommendation.- Thickness of installation: not less than 0. 8 mm- Rated voltage: 600V minimum.

9.11.2.4.1 The cable shall be constructed in the following: -

1. Three standard quads shall make the cable core.

2. A layer of polyethylene ( PE) tape shall be applied with an overlap over the standard four quads.

3. The wrapped three quads shall be over all screened with a double layer of copper tape having anominal thickness 0. 1 mm each. The copper tape shall be applied helically with an overlap thenwith wrapped with paper tape or more suitable materiel. Two drain wires of 0. 6 mm diametersare placed above the copper tapes.

4. Extruded polyethylene (PE) sheath shall be applied over the copper.

5. (6) twisted pairs shall be standard over the polyethylene PE sheath

6. Two layers of copper screen tape with two drain wires same as in (C) above shall be appliedover the (6) pairs then wrapped with paper or more suitable material.

7. The (6) pairs shall be covered with an extruded polyethylene (PE) sheath.

8. The cable then shall be screened with copper wires having a total nominal cross section of notless than 50 mm². The wires shall be distributed around the circumferences of the cable. Thesewires should be in contact with the lead sheath.

9. Lead sheath :The cable shall be sheathed with lead alloy. The sheath shall form a continuous




cylindrical tube to be free from pinholes, joint, mended places and other defects. The nominalthickness shall be 2.1 mm and the minimum thickness shall not be less than 1.8 mm. Thesheath shall made with lead alloy having not less than percent (weight) antimony.

10. Anti- Corrosion Compound and PVC Sheath :

The lead sheath cable coated with an anti-corrosive compound and covered with black waterproof PVC sheath having 2.0 mm nominal thickness.

11. Steel Tape Armouring: Two layers of galvanized steel tape of 0. 5 mm each thickness shall beapplied over P.V.C each tape layer shall be applied in open helix with the second tape coveringthe gap left by the first, the gap shall not be more than 25% of tape width.

9.11.2.4.2 PVC outer sheath.The armoured cable shall be covered with black water proof P.V.C of nominal thickness 2. 0mm asan outer sheath. The P.V.C shall be mixed anti termite and anti-rat compounds the outer sheath ofthe cable shall be stamped every 1 meter with the following written in Arabic language ( ETP pilotcable, year of manufacture, Name of manufacturer ).

9.11.2.5 Cable Characteristics:

g)Conductor resister :- Loop resistance : not more than 56 ohms/loop km at 20C.- Resistance unbalance of conductors in a pair max 1% of the loop resistance of the pair

measured.- Resistance unbalance of two pairs in quad max 2% of the loop resistance of two pairs.

B. Capacitance Requirements:- Effect nominal value for

Quads : 36 nf/kmPair: 38 nf/km

The average effective capacitance of all the pairs in factory + length shall be not differ fromnominal value by more than – 4 %.

- Capacitance unbalance:Capacitance unbalance measured for a length of 230m shall be in accordance with followingtable the test shall be made with an alternating current of 800 Hz.

Capacitance unbalance Average PF/230 Max PF/230mBetween pairs in the same quad 150 40Between adjacent pairs 150 40Between any pairs and earth 600 150

C. Nominal Impedance:For audio pairs at 1000 Hz, 470 Ohms

D. Nominal Attenuation :coils ) (W without loading

10 º C @ 0. 45 dB/km 300 Hz10 º C @0. 80 dB/km 2000 Hz10 º C @1. 46 dB/km 4000 Hz

E. Cross TalkThe minimum value for far and near end cross talk ratio between any two circuits shall be 70Db (at 800Hz) for maximum length of 1500 m.




h) Installation Resistance Requirement :Minimum 10 000 ohms Mega ohms/km at 20C measured with DC voltage of 500 Volts for one minutebetween one conductor and all other conductors connected together and to the earth sheath.

i) Dielectric Strength:The cable shall with stand a high voltage test of 8kV for 2 minutes applied between all conductorsconnected together with earth sheath.

9.11.2.6 Packing:

- Both ends of the cable shall be sealed with suitable water proof material.- The cable shall be coiled on strong wooden drum with standard length of 1000 meter.- The barrel diameter of the drum shall be not less than 20 times of cable diameter.- The following items should be marked on the drum :

1 Type of cable2 Length of cable.3 Net and gross weight in kg.4 Manufacturer Name.5 Direction of rolling.6 Others.

9.11.2.7 Sample:

A sample of the cable is required with the others.Tests:

- Routine Test:

Routine test shall be carried out according to latest IEC specification.- Type Test:

Type test shall be carried out according to the same specification stated above in items 1 to 6and witnessed by ETP Engineer.

9.11.2.8 Notes:

The Bids are requested to provide :1. Calculation method of induced voltage in a fibre optic cable when earth fault occurred in 132kV

system, earth fault current is max. 900 Ampere.2. Calculation method of screening factor with curve showing the relation between the induced voltage

(50 Hz) and the reduction factor.3. The table shall be rated for 0.6kV (minimum) 50 Hz, earth fault current is limited to 900 A, 10-seconds

by 132kV grounding.

9.12 CABLESThe Contractor shall provide a list of all of the cables supplied for the control and telecommunicationsequipment together with the following details:

- Quantity of each type of cable- The type and construction of each cable eg size and number of cores/pairs, insulation, screening,

sheathing- Manufacturer- Type of termination e. g. specific plugs, sockets and connectors- Price per meter for additional quantities of cable –




9.13 MAINTENANCE

9.13.1 Tools and Instruments

The provision of lists of recommended tools and instruments by the Bidder and of the equipment itself bythe Contractor shall be in accordance with the relevant power station or substation supply contract. Thisshall include measuring instruments, special apparatus and special tools essential for the installation,operation, testing and checking the status of the system before and during operation.

9.13.2 Documentation

Documents for the installation, operation and maintenance of all equipment shall be provided inaccordance with the relevant power station or substation supply contract.

9.13.3 Spare Parts

The provision of lists of recommended spare parts by the Bidder and of the spares themselves by theContractor shall be in accordance with the relevant power station or substation supply contract, togetherwith the specific requirements within this document for Multiplexers.

9.14 SUPERVISION, TRAINING AND TEST WITNESSING

The provision of supervision and training by the Contractor, and the opportunity for test witnessing by theEmployer, shall be in accordance with the relevant power station or substation supply contract, togetherwith the specific requirements within this document for Multiplexers.

The Client’s Supervision Staff shall give its approval on all communication and multiplexer equipmentinstallation work before the equipment is put into operation, and they shall supervise the operation of theequipment prior to handover.




Table 7 – Classification of Tests

Itemno.

Description Type ofcable

Typetests

Seriestests

Samplestests

1 Verification of the composition All X

2 Core characteristics All X

3 Geometrical characteristics-of insulation wall.

-of semi conduction screens.-of metallic sheath.

All XXXX

4 Mechanical characteristics. Of protectioncovering.

PE. XLPE X(l) X

5 Physical and chemical properties of insulationwall.-index of fluidity.- rate of reticulation-of protection covering. .

-hot pressure test

PE XLPE

All XLPE

XX

XX

6 Electrical tests on completed cable-verification of dielectric strength-measuring of tg$ function of voltage-bending test on mandrel

-measuring of tg$ function of temp-impulse voltage withstand test

AllXXX

XXX

7 Electrical tests on cable and accessories-impulse voltage withstand test-power frequency voltage withstand test

All XX

8- Humidity no propagation test PE. XLPE X

9- Void and contaminant test PE. XLPE X X




Schedule A - General Particulars And Guarantees of 132 kV Power Cable

Itemno.

Particulars and grantees Units LDPE HDPE XLPE

1- Section area of conductor Sq.mm

2- Metal

3- External diameter of conductor mm

4- Maximum resistance of conductorof completed cable at 20C( D.C. Resistance)

Ohms/km

5- Star reactance of 3 phase circuit a 150 H Ohms/km

6- Capacitance between conductor and screen F/km

7- Maximum charging current per 1000 m ofcompleted cable at normal voltage frequency

Amps

8- Inner semi conducting sheatha) constructionb) materialc ) thickness

mm

9- Minimum thickness of insulation for XLPEbetween inner and outer semi - conductor

mm

10- Outer simi conductor sheatha) constructionb) materialc) thickness

mm

11- Longitudinal water tight barrier between semi– conductor & copper wires- material- nominal thickness

mm

12- Metallic screen- material- nominal thickness- number of wires- total cross sectional area- arrangement

mmpcs

mm2

13- Equalizing tape- material- nominal thickness




Itemno.

Particulars and grantees Units LDPE HDPE XLPE

14- Longitudinal water tight barrier betweenEqualizing tape & lead sheath- material- nominal thickness

mm

15- Nominal thickness of lead sheath mm

16- Diameter over lead sheatha) Maximumb) Minimum

mmmm

17- Composition of lead sheath (by weight)a) leadb) tinc) cadmiumd) antimony

%%%%

18- External covering (HDPE)a) constructionb) materialc) thickness

mm

19- Overall cable diameter mm

20- Weight per meter of completed cable kg

21- Minimum radius of bend around which cablecan be bent during installation

m

22- Nominal internal diameter of duct or pipe throughwhich cable can be pulled

mm

23- a) Nominal drum lengthb) Drum dimensions (w × d )c) Nominal drum weight (gross)

mmkg

24- Maximum continuous current carrying capacitya)when laid direct in concrete trough with 1m totop of protective cover ground temp. 35 C. g-120for one 3 phase circuit per trench .b) when drawn into pipes or ducts oflengthmore than 15 mts for one 3- phase circuitc) when cleated to sealing end structure( ambient max . 50 C )

Amps

Amps

Amps




25- Maximum continuous current carryingcapacitya) when laid trefoil formation on concrete floorinside shed ( max. ambient temperature) of 50C.

Amps

26- Assumed max. conductor temp. fora) cable laid direct in concrete troughb) cable draw into pipes or ductsc) cable laid on racks in air

0C0C0C

27- Maximum dielectric loss of completed cablewhen laid in concrete trough per 1000 mts atnormal voltage and frequency and at maxconductor temp (see item above )

kW

28 - Maximum power factor of charging kVAof completed cable when laid direct in theground at normal voltage and frequencyand conductor temperature of :a) 15Cb) 30Cc) 40 Cd) 50 Ce) 60 Cf) 70 Cg) 80 Ch)Max .temp.

%%%%%%%%

29- Maximum power factor of charging kVA ofcompleted cable at normal frequency andconductor temperature of 25 C & at:a) 50 % normal voltageb) 100 % normal voltagec) 150 % normal voltaged) 200 % normal voltage

%%%%

30 - Sheath loss of complete cable per 1000 m of 3phase circuit at normal voltage & frequency &at max current rating when:a) laid direct in ground with current per phase

as in item 22 (a )b) draw in to pipes or with current per

phase as in item 22 (a )

kw

31 - Impulse puncture voltage a)positive 1/50 waveb)negative 1/50 wave

kv

32- Maximum conductor temperature after passageof a current of 40, 000 Amps. For 1 secsubsequent to continues full load current

ºC




33- Maximum pressure for which cable is designed kg/sq.cm

34- Maximum dielectric stress:a) at conductorb) at screen or sheath

kV/cmkV/cm

35- Total loss of completed cable per 1000 m of 3phase circuit at normal voltage, frequency max.current rating.

KW

Note: We have no objection to study any proposal submitted from the bidder for metallic screen toverify 40 kA / 1 sec. short circuits current






Section 11– Employer’s Requirements: Technical Specifications: Civil Engineering Works 11 - 163

SECTION 10: CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS

10.1 SCOPE OF CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS

10.1.1 GeneralThis part of the technical specification describes the requirements of the civil works for the 132kVunderground cable system and fibre optical cable to be laid in the same trench.

The scope of civil services required, as a minimum, is the following:

Handling of technical aspects, detailed engineering, documentation Ground exploration Soil replacement/improvement Surveying Traffic safety measures Earthworks, locator slots Shoring work Sag piping Relocation of pipelines and other civil structures Fitting work Road works including road crossings Railway line crossings Culvert crossings Bridge crossings Canal crossings Sealing work Lowering of ground and surface water Coordination before and during construction works with government authorities and entities

responsible for the routes of other planned and existing installations. The route mapping and as builddrawings of cable lines with structures combined with planned and existing installations.

Supply and lying of piping, troughs, etc. Construction of joint boxes Construction of concrete trough Temporary reinforcement of existing bridges to facilitate cable drum transport if required. Filling of the cable trough with selected sand Compaction, concreting & reinstatement work after cable installation

The objective of this specification is to define the required engineering and construction services to currenttechnical standards for all civil works of the project. As the contract is set out as turn-key package, all itemsfor a satisfactory operation of the transmission system deemed to be included in the contract price, even ifnot all items required for constructing of the cable route are expressly listed in this document.

Extra item out of the specified scope shall be notified prior execution and shall be subject to approval.

The works shall be executed in compliance with all currently valid technical regulations, recognized technicalcodes, standards etc.

Details of soil conditions will be attached as an annexure for additional information only (not applicable).




10.1.2 DeadlinesAt road overpasses and underpasses as well as other places requiring the occupation of land areas,personnel deployment shall be so scheduled and coordinated with entities responsible for public and othermatters, property owners etc. , that the areas of land occupied shall be reduced to the necessary minimum,and that these works will be completed in shortest time possible. The work shall be organized to allow thestipulated deadlines to be met.

The works have to be organized in such a way as to minimize the construction time between opening of theground surface and final restoration of the ground surface.

Generally, the Contractor is required to work mainly during night time on trenching and pipe laying wherethere is a disturbance to the traffic flow. Longer trench length requires prior approval from the Employer. Inurban areas, a reduced trench working length shall be applicable using different cable laying techniques (i.e.Horizontal Drilling method/digging with rolled up cable laying method) where required to minimize effect onlocal traffic and comply with local authority restrictions. The Contractor must demonstrate in detail theexecution method in his bid for Employer’s review.

The maximum fenced in width for trench excavation works in the urban area shall be 4m. The Contractormust accommodate situations of high traffic density or difficult site conditions where a reduction may beneeded.

In open areas, this dimension may be increased upon approval of the Employer.

The same above conditions shall apply for fenced in working areas for joint pit construction where basicdimensions in the urban area shall be restricted to 3 m wide and 10 m long.

10.1.3 Description of installationsFor the 132kV network extension in Iraq

The project consists of the following cable routes: AL Zawraa substation - AL Hurryia substation AL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substation AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation

The civil part comprises all necessary construction works for the implementation of the new cableconnections including the cable trenches, river crossings and all other works and security measuresnecessary for the laying of cables.

10.1.4 General description of the cable routeDrawing of the whole 132kV cable routes for all 3 routes are shown in Drawings Section 16: .Description of route is just reference information. Bidders should undertake detailed investigations to furnishinformation in their bids.

Specifically, bidders are liable for determining the length of final cable route of laying cables for each section,check exactly and execute points crossing existing underground works. In addition, Bidders shouldinvestigate and co-ordinate with competent authorities through the support of the Employer to ensure thetransport of cable drums, specialized equipment, and installation works in compliance with Iraq regulations.

10.1.5 Cable routingThe routes are determined under the following conditions and constraints:

Ensuring a high security of supply Occupancy of a minimum underground space taking into account existing and planned installations of

other central services suppliers while maintaining the required cable spacing and safety distances Existing and planned traffic systems.

A basic requirement for planning the works is, under consideration of costs, to identify a route minimizing




dependencies on other works and existing installations, or else to define these as feasible, and to avoidproblems in obtaining the agreement of all licensing authorities and property owners. The complete plannedcable route shall be shown in the site plans.

The Employer is responsible to obtain all approvals and permits for the right-of-way and for the execution ofthe construction works from local authorities. The Contractor has to prepare and submit on his own costs alldocuments, maps, drawings, etc. required for submission to the relevant authorities for approval.

10.1.6 Information for the ContractorBefore commencing the works, the working documents shall be submitted to the Employer or hisrepresentative for approval. This does not relieve the Contractor of his obligation for executing his work withall due care nor of his general responsibility for his contractual services.

Well before to the start of construction, the Contractor shall apply for and obtain all agreements needed forworks in underground structures from central services providers, property owners and bearers ofconstruction loads. The resulting requirements, conditions, stipulations etc. shall be observed andimplemented.

The working document should include clear details of reinforcement requirements of existing access bridgesfor heavy cable drum traffic as required.

The same applies for special utilizations, such as complete or partial road closures, occupation of publictraffic areas etc. Noise emission restriction in residential areas during night hours shall be observed adoptingsound suppressed engines and construction procedures.

Drawings and information material on existing structures and installations in the area of the planned routecan be viewed only in part. As far as necessary, the Contractor will conduct surveys of the existing situationby digging exploratory trenches. These services are included in the Contractor’s scope of services, likesurveying of all structures encountered.

The cable routes shall be selected depending on the location of underground structures, the possibility forusing existing structures and cable sections belonging to the Employer, and occupancy of public trafficareas, and optimized accordingly.

If connections are made to existing structures and the like, their stability shall not be impaired, and structuralanalysis shall be made to demonstrate safety of the structure being additionally loaded by the cables.

Penetrations of structures in contact with soil shall be properly sealed.

Among the items for which the Contractor is responsible are the provisions of:

Areas for excavated material, landfills, excavated waste and any other materials for disposal Central services supplies, waste disposal and energy carriers during the construction period, for

example electricity, telephone, lighting, etc. , including drainage, for example of wastewater anddewatering, as required for proper execution of construction

Topsoil and other replacement materials Schedule and construction measures should be provided to the Employer Treatment of underground installations crossing 132kV cables; refer underground works information

supplied by the Employer, bidder are liable for searching, adjusting exactly existing undergroundworks up to the period of construction and agree with the management authorities of undergroundworks for implementation.

Under Employer’s Responsibility: Based on information supplied by bidders, the Employer is liable for asking different kinds of permits

(digging roads, taking up construction area...) with the concerned authorities Support bidders when there are any obstacles during negotiating about underground works with

132kV cable lines.




Property owners and residents affected by the construction work shall be informed in writing prior tothe start of construction, for example by posting notices.

10.1.7 Start-up and shutdown of existing installationsAll interventions in existing installations shall be clarified with the Employer/Authorities in any time as to allowproper interruption programming.

Taking out existing cable system or live cable interruptions shall be coordinated with the Employer. Reasonsshall be given for shutdowns, and these shall be subject to approval by the Engineer/Employer.

It is therefore forbidden for the Contractor’s installation personnel to start up or shut down existinginstallations under their own responsibility.

10.1.8 Scope of supplies, sequence of installation by the Contractor

Scope of supplies Included in the civil work are the following:

• Setting up the construction site with transport of all equipment to and from the site• Surveying of cable route in the terrain in accordance with the planning specifications before starting

excavation• Obtaining prior authorization for excavation works from all responsible authorities• Assessing the condition of the road surface before excavating it together with the responsible

authorities, and making a joint record• Assessing the general condition of land, and making a record jointly with the property owner• Measures to ensure the safety of traffic and the construction site• Excavating the road surface and demolition work as necessary• Earthworks and compaction works, transport from and to the site of subsoil and topsoil, including

temporary storage, controlled disposal of contaminated soil with disposed certificate.• Digging out of cable trench, including shoring of its walls, with re digging as necessary, and refilling• Wall penetrations and concreting in of these and of installation parts• Constructing, maintaining and removal of temporary vehicle bridges and pedestrian walkways• If required, supplying or constructing foundations, plinths, supports, channels and pipe bridges• Transportation of building materials• Execution of sag piping• Relocation of cables and pipelines of other utility services, including procurement of necessary

permits• Groundwater lowering, drainage of pipe trenches, buoyancy prevention measures• Preparing and submitting stress analyses, shuttering and reinforcement plans, among others for

demolition and rebuilding of foundations, supports, pipe bridges, sewers and manholes• Restoration of roads and tracks according to relevant specifications• Re-cultivation• Surveying and documentation of cable route, including all third party sections encountered.

Apart from the scope listed above, the following additional scope of supplies will apply; responsibility of theconstruction contractors and Cable Company is stated in the installation sequence.

• Preparing all detail and working documents, such as site plans, sections, detail plans etc. under theContractor’s responsibility to the extent required for on schedule execution of installationcomponents to an acceptable quality

• Preparing a time schedule to meet the completion deadline, and submission of this to the Employerand his representative before starting construction

• Preparing site plans and sections of the cable route containing all associated information on thecable network, with all information on third-party structures needed for detail planning, as well as allcontract sections (including those from third parties), which also have to be installed in the trench

• Agreement on the route with the authorities, parties responsible for internals, property owners andthe Engineer/Employer

• Relocation of all third-party structures as well as internals along the route, to the extent necessary• Complete supply and mounting of necessary component identification• Excavating exploratory trenches, surveying of all internals as well as complete documentation of




their location and elevation• Documentation of the cable network in the form of as-built plans, as well as all third-party structures

and internals along the route regarding location and elevation• By continuous coordination with:

• the Employer ‘s site management and his representative• representatives of the authorities• parties responsible for acceptance and all others concerned

the Contractor shall so co-ordinate and render his services that construction and cable laying will proceedsmoothly and speedily with minimum hindrance to traffic.

Possible hindrances caused by other contractors shall be reported to the site management in appropriatetime. When setting the limits and completing construction sections, as well as when interrupting work, dueconsideration shall be taken of the needs of others involved in the project.

10.1.9 DocumentationThe Contractor shall supply the following drawings and documents. The costs of these shall be included inthe bid price, and will not be reimbursed as separate items.

Following Documents to be submitted to the Employer/Engineer by the Contractor

DocumentWeeks after contract award

Preliminary FinalCoordinated construction handlingschedule, with all key data on all involvedin construction to ensure meeting theagreed completion/handover date

2 weeks beforestarting construction

Updates as required,or else every month

Site mobilization plan At least 2 weeks before occupying siteDetail planning and constructiondocuments, including checked stressanalyses

At least 2 weeks before starting the worksconcerned

List of drawings, stating their completiondates

2 weeks beforestarting construction

Updates as requiredup to acceptance

Revised site plans, sections, details - At acceptancesRoute plans (as-built plans); scale1:250/500

- At acceptances

Surveyed as-built plans, with location andelevation coordinates; scale 1:250 or1:500, for ease of comprehension

- At acceptances

The site plans shall be prepared to a scale of 1:250 or 1:500, depending on ease of comprehension, andshall match the cable documentation and shall be provided in both printed and soft form (AutoCADDrawings).

The site plans shall show all above-ground objects, such as buildings, masts, trees, footpaths, fences, floorbeds, road gully covers, manholes, covers for underground supply lines (water, gas etc. ) and installationsalong the route to a minimum distance of 10m either side of the cable route centerline, as well as allunderground routes of other existing installations in a strip up to 5m wide from both trench walls; the sameapplies to property boundaries, road names, premises numbers and names of property or house owners.

Longitudinal sections shall show existing and planned structures, bottom of cable trench, ground surface,ground cover etc. They must be prepared on the basis of accurate surveying, to include both the existinglevel of the ground surface as well as the position of the cables in the trench, and in particular pipeline andcable intersections of other utility services with the cable route.

Also required are:




Details of cable ducts and bridges when crossing streams, rivers, channels and roads etc. to scalesof 1:20 to 1:50, depending on the required accuracy

Proof of adequate strength and stability in the form of checkable stress analyses for all structuressubjected to loading, including detail drawings required for this purpose

All drawings prepared and additionally, for documentation purposes, submitted on CD ; this appliesalso to the locator slots.

a).Documentation during constructionThe depth and horizontal location of cable conduits shall be specified with reference to fixed points in theterrain such as houses etc., and documented in a detailed cable route plan to a scale of either 1:250 or1:500, for on ease of comprehension, to enable each point of the cable route to be subsequently found. Aseparate plan shall be prepared for each premises of connection.

For areas of public traffic, evidence of ground compaction shall be provided. For other areas, such proofs ofground compaction shall be provided in accordance with relevant technical standards.

Any deviations shall be communicated without delay to the Employer or his representative to provide a basisfor taking a decision.

Apart from surveys of each mains-born service line, like pipelines, cables, drains etc. , recording of the as-built condition shall include surveying and representation of all structures etc. in their location and elevation.

On the basis of the revised working documents and the laying technology that finds application, the locationof the cable route shall be stated and represented in the as-built documents.

The finalized documentation shall be handed over in six copies to the Employer by the latest at the time ofsubmission of the final bill.

10.2 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION WORKS

10.2.1 Construction site mobilizationStorage and working areas, including temporary storage of topsoil, as well as access tracks shall befurnished in agreement with the authorities and property owners, and subsequently maintained, with all costsborne by the Contractor. The Employer will not provide dumping areas for excess excavated material thatcannot be replaced.The required connections to water, wastewater, electricity and telephone lines etc. shall be procured by theContractor. This includes submitting applications under his own responsibility to the relevant service utilities.Costs for site mobilization, including disposal costs, shall be factored into the offer price.

Upon completion of construction works, the construction Project and equipment shall be removed, the sitetidied up and cleaned, and roads, paths, ditches, green areas etc. restored to their previous condition.

10.2.2 Site supervisionThe Contractor is represented on site by a responsible site manager, who shall be named in writing to theEmployer before the work starts. He shall be appropriately qualified, and sufficiently informed, also of allrelevant details, of the required construction services.

10.2.3 Unforeseen interruptions to construction workInterruptions that are not foreseeable and arise unavoidably during the course of the work shall not give riseto costs for the Employer. Possible exceptions are removal of munitions as well as recovery of valuablearchaeological artefacts.

10.2.4 Cooperation with other contractorsCooperation with the various sub-contractors, such as the piping sub-contractor, electrical sub-contractor etc.shall be organized by the Contractor under his own initiative within the framework of the instructions issuedby the Employer and /or Engineer.




10.2.5 Surveying work

a).Surveying work before starting constructionThe Contractor shall commission an accredited surveyor with surveying and staking out of the cable route inaccordance with the approved plans together with the specification of elevation reference points.

b).Surveying work during constructionIn line with the stipulations of the construction specification and site plans, under his own responsibility, theContractor shall permanently mark out alignments and elevations, or retain benchmarks, unless instructedotherwise by the Employer and/or Engineer.

Also included in the Contractor’s tasks are acceptance, securing and monitoring of the level reference pointsstaked out jointly, including supplying and studying of material, equipment and instruments, as well asprovision of the workforce and re-surveying any lost benchmarks.

All surveying needed in connection with execution of the contractual works shall be undertaken under theresponsibility of the Contractor, and shall be factored in when calculating the prices.

10.2.6 Removal of non-foreseeable obstructions

a).Archaeological art-craftsIf during excavation art-crafts of archaeological value come to light, the responsible department of historicalmonuments shall be called.

10.2.7 Site security & SafetySecurity of the actual construction site shall be maintained around the clock, also at weekends and duringpublic holidays and shall be included in the contract price.

a).Traffic direction and safetyRouting of road traffic at the site, including for access to property and ensuring deliveries as well aspedestrian traffic are the responsibility of the Contractor.

All measures which could hinder traffic, partial or complete closures, diversions etc. shall be agreed with theresponsible authorities following consultations with affected residents and businesses etc. The Contractorbears responsibility for submitting applications, notification and obtaining approval. On behalf and/or throughthe employer. Any officially imposed conditions in this connection will form part of the contract.

b).Measures before starting constructionNo work can start until corresponding notifications have been received from the relevant authorities andaffected residents, businesses etc. Copies of the approved traffic signposting and closure plan shall behanded to the Employer and/or Engineer before starting construction. Traffic signposts and barriers shall beset up around the site, illuminated as far as necessary, and removed after completing the work. The signboards, barriers, safety cones barricade tapes, night lamps...etc. should be complied with internationalstandards. Also pedestrian traffic in the site’s vicinity shall be fully maintained.

Where the trench crosses premise accesses, foot bridges over it shall be provided. The bridges over thetrench for footpaths, traffic lanes, driveways onto property and the like needed for routing traffic shall bedimensioned to cope with the loads stipulated in the relevant standards. Protective railings shall be providedto prevent accidents.

c).Surveying of Buried servicesThe contractor do the survey of underground energized and de-energized wires, cables and pipes beforecommence the work using the underground pipe/wire detector.

d).Transportation services, construction site trafficThe Contractor shall direct vehicles in the site area when materials are delivered and for other transportationservices.

Roads that are soiled by the Contractor’s site traffic shall be continuously cleaned, so that traffic will not be




endangered. Contractor must introduce a cleaning bay at each construction site.

The transportation vehicles shall be cleaned so as not to soil the roads and neither should the cleaning waterbe discharged to the public sewer.

e).Safety measures taken to protect construction work ensuring constructionsite safety

The Contractor bears sole responsibility for construction site safety, and this aspect must be factored into theoffer price. Apart from traffic safety this also includes in particular: Workforce health and accident prevention Site fencing Signposting of site Traffic direction Site illumination Securing storage material Site dewatering.

The Contractor get approval for Safety procedure from Employer/Engineer before commencethe construction work.

When executing the contract, the Contractor shall comply with all relevant accident prevention regulations aswell as the generally recognized rules for workplace health and safety. Any officially imposed conditions inthis connection will form part of the contract.

The Contractor shall put in hand all measures necessary to protect site Project and equipment, theinstallations and the completed work before, during and after execution of the works until they have beenaccepted. The costs of these must be factored into the offer price, and they will not be reimbursed as aseparate item. Any installations that are destroyed, damaged or fail to meet the requirements shall bereplaced or repaired. This includes protection against storm water and its immediate removal, without beingspecially instructed to do so, so that structures and cables will not become soaked through.

If construction machinery is used, the Contractor will be held liable for any damage that is thereby caused.Only construction machinery fitted with silencers shall be employed.

f).Protection of asphalt paving and treesOnly rubber-tired construction machinery may be used in paved roads with asphalt. Outrigger ram supportsmust be lined with suitable material, so that the road surface will not be damaged. Any costs of repairs topaving damage shall be borne by the Contractor. Along roads lined with trees, small trenching equipmentshall be used so as not to damage foliage during construction work.

g).Temporary construction measuresTemporary construction measures, for example site access roads, shall be sufficient to their purpose, whileallowing relatively straightforward removal under consideration of complete restoration of the originalcondition. The necessity for any such measures will be ascertained by the Contractor from a walk downinspection of the cable route.

h).Damage to hard surfaced areasDamage to all types of hard surfaced areas, for example roads and yards, shall be repaired by theContractor, at his cost, after completion of the works.

i).Permits for construction works before starting worksBefore starting his work, the Contractor shall obtain permits for construction works, and shall inform himselfunder his own responsibility of the precise location of cables, sewers, pipelines and all other buried servicessupply installations and structures, and shall take all measures necessary, in compliance with the regulationsof the various supply utilities, to prevent damage and other adverse impacts on cables and pipelines.Temporary relocation of sewers, water pipelines, telecommunications cables, power cables etc. and ensuringthat these remain operational during construction measures shall be factored into the offer price.If any of those responsible state utility agencies required deposits for issuing permits and/or for stand by duty




for any damages that may occurs during trenching, cable laying such deposits shall be made by Contractor.

j).Prevention of settlementAll works shall be so executed that there will be no settlement of adjacent areas. In particular near buildings,masts or other structures in the ground, adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent damage, without anyseparate remuneration for this. Any damage repaired or compensated by Contractor at his cost.

k).Renewal of road markingsAll road markings that have been damaged during trenching work shall be restored to their original conditionimmediately after covering the cable trench and before allowing traffic to return to each of the road sections.

10.2.8 Breaking open the surface

10.2.8.1 Recording of evidence

Prior to the start of the construction measures, the “state prior to the start of construction” shall be recordedas evidence. The following shall take part therein: the Employer and/or Engineer, the Contractor,representatives of the town administration, land owners, local site management and overall projectmanagement. The Contractor shall produce a status record with report, as-built plans and status photos.It shall be noted in the report that the restoration works shall be executed in such a manner that the originalstate is restored.

10.2.8.2 Reusable material

Reusable material, such as curb stones, paving or slabs, shall be laid aside in accordance with specialinstructions and shall be stacked separately from the filling material and from other materials for later reuseafter get the approval from Engineer.

10.2.9 Earthworks

10.2.9.1 Construction of cable trenches and joint pits

a).Site investigation

Details available with ETP will be provided as they were determined during the site investigation works.Nevertheless, the Contractor shall be responsible for gaining information from the various utility companiesor Directorates with regard to underground internals as well as supply and disposal pipes. The Contractorshall be responsible for any damage caused to existing internals during the construction works and shallcarry out the entire repair works at his expense.

b).Existing third-party works

The existing third-party works shall be documented in height and position; the requirements of the Ownershall be observed with regard to the documentation of the existing situation. The civil works required in thelaying of the cables and conduits must in some cases be carried out to schedule in the presence of roadtraffic and under confined construction site conditions. In the majority of cases, this will make it necessary toshore the trenches, because it will normally not be possible to make sloped trenches. The depth of the cableroute in those areas without the influence of crossing routes of third-party works shall be executed accordingto trench cross section in standard type in compliance with the minimum laying depths.

c).Machine excavation – Manual excavationPrior to the start of the works it shall be clarified whether road traffic, existing supply pipes, trees, towers orsimilar permit the use of construction machinery such as excavators. In the immediate area of supplypipes/lines for gas, water, telephone, electricity etc. , the final excavation of the pit up to the laying open ofsuch pipes/lines shall be performed by manual excavation only. In the performance of the earthworks theContractor shall thus decide in consultation with the Engineer/Employer, in consideration of the localconditions, whether such earthworks are to be carried out by machine or by hand. Proper asphalt cutter is tobe used to cut the asphalt surface of the roads without much damage.




Follow-up claims for payment on account of the impossibility of using machines will not be recognized; theContractor shall, before costing his bid, familiarize himself with the local circumstances and the possibility ofusing machines.

d).Soil and groundwater conditions

Prior to the start of the excavation works the Contractor shall collect adequate information with regard to thesoil and groundwater conditions.

e).Land filling or reuse of excavated material

The excavated material shall be graded by type and quality so that, where applicable, the reusable quantitiesof earth can be properly and separately stored in temporary storage locations insofar as reuse is permissibleand appears economically worthwhile.

The excavated earth suitable for reuse shall – assuming prior examination by the Contractor and Engineerfor reusability including free from substances aggressive towards cables and conduits – be stored in such amanner that sufficient space is kept free on one side for the works and for the transport of materials. Thefree space on one side next to the excavated trench shall be at least 1 m wide. Non-reusable excavatedmaterial shall be land filled in accordance with the legal regulations. The resulting costs shall be borne bythe Contractor.

f).Storage of excavated material

The storage of excavated material and construction material on roadways, parking areas and constructionsites shall require the consent of the town administration and of the land owners. Furthermore, the flow oftraffic shall not be impeded; the approval of the traffic police shall be obtained. Roadways and pedestrianareas in the region of the construction site shall be kept in a clean and safe condition for traffic. Dirt causedby the trailing of building rubble shall be removed. The piling of earth on the road surface shall be separatedoff by planks or at least by footboards so that the excavated material is not trailed. The drainage of water ingutters and trenches shall be safeguarded against interruption by bridging and insertion of pipes.

g).Protection of other supply pipes/lines

If, during the excavation of the trench, gas and water pipes, electricity and telephone cables, cable ductblocks, sewers etc. are laid open, the responsible agencies shall be notified and their instructions shall befollowed. Care shall be taken during excavation with regard to the pipes/lines existing in the area of thecable route. The pipes/lines shall be carefully protected in accordance with the instructions. Temporarymeasures shall be taken with regard to those pipes/lines which are interrupted in the course of theconstruction works. In the case of the restoration of pipe sections which are damaged or interrupted in thecourse of the construction works or in the case of the rerouting of pipes, the pipe connections shall be water-tight.

Prior to filling back in, the Contractor shall arrange for laid-open pipes/lines to be inspected by the respectiveoperators, e.g. the water/sewage company. Proof of the written comments of the operators shall besubmitted to the Engineer.

h).Trench construction and dimensions

The trench dimensions shall guarantee maximum possible current loading, good installation conditions andlow costs for the earthworks. In any case, the dimensions of the work space and, in the case of an openbuilding pit, the slope angle shall be laid down in writing between the local site management of the Employerand the Contractor prior to the start of the works.

If the building pit has been excavated too deep, the mistake shall be compensated by suitable material at theexpense of the Contractor. Proof of compacting shall be presented by the Contractor.

The dimensions of the trenches are typical and for information only. The schematic diagram of the cabletrench is annexed. Variations due to local conditions shall be agreed with the Engineer. The typical trench




profile can be described as follows:

1 cable system Cable laying depth minimum. at -1.3 m Filling with normal soil minimum. between -0.7m and -0.4 m Road layer minimum from -0.4 m

The supply, laying and assembling as well as the selected filling material of

Thermally stable soil HDPE pipes Concrete slabs Warning ribbons Etc.

are part of the Contractor’s range of services

All trenches shall be as straight as possible to ease cable pulling and cable laying. The final cable routealignment shall be selected in such a way that the number of street crossings and crossings with existinginstallations are reduced to a minimum. Cables shall be laid in concrete trough as shown in Section 17drawing 001 wherever possible along the route except for special locations such as road crossings, bridgesand cannels. Cables shall be laid in HDPE pipes for reasons of mechanical protection. As per Section 17drawing 003.. When Horizontal drilling is used, should be as per Section 17 drawing 002A. At sectionspart construction of cable trench and in-accessibility at river and channel crossings, street crossings andeventually at bridges. Two spare pipes shall be provided for each circuit to shorten repair time in case of acable failure.Minimum Thickness for carbon steel pipe is 8mmHDPE for Power Cables minimum Thickness of 8mmand not containing stones and other particles with hard surfaces which could damage the cable sheath

i).Withstand capacity and stability of installed worksGeneral Route : Cables in Concrete trough inside the trench

The bottom of the trench as shown in Section 17 drawing 001 shall be leveled and smooth.

In a first step, some 200 mm of Sub Base shall be filled in the trench and carefully leveled and wellcompacted to 85% (care must be taken to make further soil improvements necessary if the soil propertiesare weak and costs are deemed to be included in normal prices and no additional amounts will be paid).

In a second step the concrete trough is placed with proper interlocking with other concrete trough units.Next the thermally stable sand with required conductivity should be filled to the required level and all thecables should be placed with proper spacing and the concrete trough should be filled to the top level with theselected thermally stable sand and Concrete covers lowered carefully and gently not to damage the cablesor the concrete trough below.Then the back filling and compaction 90% shall follow with good soil, free of debris. Warning tape andWarning Grillage should be placed at required levels and backfilling and compaction continued to the toplevel.Finally the markers may be installed and the top surface should be restored the original state.

The size and interval of the markers shall be agreed upon with the engineer. The visible part of the markerblock may of colored cement as required by the engineer as well as some letters indicating warning oridentification will be needed.

Special areas and Road crossingsHorizontal drilling Technologies can be used as per Section 17 drawing 002A. 002B (Detailed descriptionshould be provided).




Normal/Main Road Crossings

As per Section 17 drawing 003, when pipes are laid, they shall be embedded in concrete. The boulder lLayers shall be of minimum size of 200mm and shall be placed if necessary according to the soil condition.Above that a layer of 90% compacted soil layer of minimum 200mm shall be placed. On top of that a leanconcrete mix of 1:3:6 shall be applied in a thickness of minimum 100mm. Then a Re-enforced concrete (25Mpa) layer of minimum 150mm shall be placed, upon which the HDPE pipes for Power cables, Optical FiberCables and Insulated Earth wire.The HDPE pipe thickness shall be 8mm for power cables. 30 Mpa concrete shall be used to cover all hepipes. The thickness of the concrete layer shall be 600mm as per the drawing..

3 soil layers 90% compacted shall be paced to achieve the depth to the cables from the surface, a value of1.3m. Grillage and Warning tapes shall be placed as per the drawing. A 30 Mpa re enforced concrete layerof 200mm minimum thickness shall be placed and over which the road surface finish to match thesurrounding shall be carried out with completely leveled surface with the existing road surface finish.If the depth of the trench has to be varied, the slope shall be gradually made.

Main Road CrossingsNormal Road crossing method or Horizontal drilling Technologies can also be used. (Detailed descriptionshould be provided

j).Joint pits

As per drawings 004A & 004B, the size of joint pits shall be adequate to accommodate the three powercable joints including cross-bonding equipment, etc. Depending on the available space and constrains at thethree power cable joints, the arrangement of the individual joints might be in parallel or staggered formation.The final location and arrangement of the joint pit shall be approved by the Engineer/Employer.

The joints pits designed for the accessibility and safety and thermal ratings and shall be approved by theengineer or the employer.

A concrete base (Grade 25 reinforced concrete) shall be constructed in situ on the bottom of the joint pit.The joint pits shall be kept clean and free of water before and during the cable jointing is being executed. Asuitable drainage system shall be provided. The joint pits shall be protected until the back-filling starts.

Their location and arrangement in the street area shall be agreed with the Employer/Engineer on site. Localrestrictions, safety regulations and other instructions shall be taken into consideration and be observed. Toco-ordinate this with the local authorities is the duty of the contractor.

The joint pit shall meet the following requirements:

The jointing enclosure (box) shall be of the type pre-mounted or pre-fabricated. The joint group (3 joints) shall be arranged in one pit. Connections for earthing and cross-bonding measures as well as for PD measurement shall be

accessible via the cross-bonding links-box The joint pit shall be filled with thermally stable soil after completion of the work The joints shall be protected by concrete or PE slabs to offer protection equal or greater than the

cable trench.

The bidder shall give the following details within the Bid:

Space needed for joint pit Dimensions of joint pit (height, width, depth) Ambient space needed for joint pit assembly Measures to provide assembly conditions (cabin etc.)




Racks for fixing the joints Due regard to cable bending radius Schematic diagram of the joint groups with cable route Detailed description of the assembling process.

j) Route markers, concrete trough

The cable route shall be equipped with identification markers of a durable material to clearly indicate thecable route and the sites of the joints. Cable route markers shall be of concrete and provided along the route.Refer the marker block drawings in Section 17 Drawing 1.2.3 (note the interlocking in the concrete troughand covers)

l).Pipes

All pipes shall meet the required mechanical strength for the installation of the cables the final arrangementis subject to the approval of the Engineer/Employer. Minimum thickness for power cables shall be 8mm.

The pipes shall be of HDPE material according to relevant standards. The inner surface of the pipes shall besmooth; all pipes shall contain a pulling wire.

The HDPE pipes should be manufactured from material grade PE80 ( certified by any International agencylike Bodycote as per ISO 9080 ) in accordance and confirming to ISO:4427 or its latest revision oramendments with test certificate from any third party inspection agency of International repute likeBVQI,SGS.

The HDPE pipes should be manufactured by the pipe manufacturing facility certified by ISO 9000:2000 andhaving his own quality control laboratory.

The HDPE pipes should be manufactured from 100% virgin material and supplier has to submit thecertificate from testing agency like Bodycote.

In case of Bid and manufacturer of pipe are different then a copy of supply commitment from manufacturer ofpipe is required to be submitted by the Bidder.

The pipes shall be laid on supports along the bridges also. Following the cable pulling, the pipes shall befilled with bentonite mixture to ensure adequate heat distribution. The pipe seals and pipe joints shall bedesigned to prevent any infiltration of water, moisture, insects, etc.

As far as there are route sections that are designed with piping (HDPE), the following boundary conditionsshall be applicable:The pipes shall be embedded in a concrete mix of 30 Mpa

. If cables or pipes are directly laid in air the cables shall be protected against excessive temperature

rise due to direct exposure to solar radiation by means of appropriate measures.

m).Safeguarding of objects in the area of the construction measures

In the case of excavation close to structures or in the case of the laying open of cables, pipes or otherobjects, the Contractor shall undertake suitable safeguards to ensure that the objects incur no damage. TheContractor shall be fully liable for any damage caused.

The vast majority of the works has to be carried out during night hours. Consequently adequate lighting ofconstruction site shall be provided and the costs shall be included in the bid prices.

n).Dewatering




The cable trench shall be protected against the ingress of surface, ground and subsurface water. Theremoval of the water from cable trenches and building pits shall be carried out by the Contractor and shallnot be paid separately. If the works are interrupted by heavy rainfall, rainy periods, the Contractor arrangeflood control system and other precautions and may not derive any follow-up claims there from.

If dewatering becomes necessary, the Contractor shall provide all the required equipment (pumps, pipes,etc. ) including the operating personnel with all necessary operating materials. The costs of dewateringincluding discharge of the water as far as the receiving body of water shall be included in the bid prices.

o).Bracing, shoring

Water from pumping or other dewatering methods shall be properly drained away from the site or disposedof by tankers, so as not to inconvenience users of adjacent properties or sites.No concrete, masonry, brickwork or other materials shall be placed or built until the surfaces are properlydrained.

As a basic rule, the bracing and shoring of the cable trenches and building pits shall be carried out by theContractor under his own responsibility.

The walls of the excavated trench shall be immediately shored in professional manner according toinstructions.The moving of the shoring, as required for the introduction and laying of the pressed pipes, shall be carriedout only by the Contractor. The costs of such shoring works shall be borne by the Contractor.

The stability of the shoring shall be guaranteed in every construction state and static proof thereof shall befurnished if a deviation is made from the standard form of shoring.When the pressed pipes are being introduced, it shall be ensured that the bracing is moved in professionalmanner only step by step by the Contractor.

p).Bottom of jointing pit

Should be as per Drawings in Section 17. The bottom of the jointing pit shall be formed in accordance withthe requirements of the laying method used. The existing soil shall not be loosened. Therefore, the bottomof the building pit shall be secured against driving on, turning up and washing out. Soil that has neverthelessbeen loosened shall be restored by compacting to its original density and required load-bearing capacity.The cables shall be laid on supports which are with certainty not able to damage the protective layers

10.2.9.2 Refilling of the cable trenches and jointing pits

The cable trench shall, according to the trench profile, be filled with in steps according to the specified trenchprofile power cables bedded in. Followed by a layer of sand at least 80 cm thick. Followed per cable systemby a covering of slabs. The sand filling and compacting inside the trench shall be done carefully andmanually using hand tools in order not to damage or stress the cable installation.

a).Thermally stable soil

The major filling compound in the cable region shall be thermally stable soil.

The thermally stable soil shall have a maximum thermal resistivity of 1.2 K*m/W under conditions ofcompletely dry soil. In the regions of cable trench and joint pits this shall be obtained by a sand mixture. Forthis, local sand deposits shall preferably be used. The required thermal resistivity shall be verified bymeasurement and its results shall be recorded.

In some special regions sand/concrete or “bentonite” compound fillings are permissible. But in this case, thecables shall be laid in PE pipes to provide access in case of faults. In any case the Contractor shall submitcomputational proof of the required transmission capacity.

b) Protection slabs




Cable protection slabs made of reinforced concrete, Grade 25 shall be provided to cover the full width of thecable trench.

The size of the slabs shall be such as to prevent the trench excavator’s blade to grab them. They shall haveeyelets or anchorage for lifting.The route shall be completely covered and protected by these slabs over its total width.They shall have an armoring for not breaking when they are lifted by the eyelets or anchorage. They shall beat least 10 cm thick.

c).Warning ribbons

Cable warning bands (ribbons) with the corresponding labels shall be situated about 200 mm above theconcrete slab covering.It serves to mark the cable route area and shows the presence of high-voltage cables. The warning ribbonshall have the following properties:

Refer Drawing in Section 17 Thickness > 0.15 mm Length > 250 m Colour: yellow PE composite film Marking: black high-voltage arrow.

The ribbons shall be continuously laid spaced by about 10 cm and at a distance of about 5cm from each ofthe trench borders. For a standard route width of about 1.2m altogether 3 warning ribbons shall be arrangedside by side. (Shall be as per design)

d).Filling of the trench

The filling of the trench or trough shall take place immediately after permission has been given by theEngineer. After the trench has been filled to the top edge of the cable, the as-installed state shall bemeasured.Subsequently, the remaining filling material shall be put in place as per drawing and the original state of theearth surface, including in height, shall be restored.

e).Re-laying/relocating of third-party pipes/lines

When the trenches and building pits are being filled in, it shall be ensured that third-party pipes and cablesare properly bedded in.

The entities responsible shall be notified about damage to their pipes/lines. Damage caused by theContractor shall be remedied at the Contractor’s expense. Cable covers which have been removed shall beproperly replaced and cable warning bands shall be properly laid.

If any of the existing utility services such as water, drainage, telecommunication etc. , are to be diverted orrelocated by the responsible state utility agencies themselves in accordance with their procedures to pavethe way for the laying of cables, it is the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate with those utilityagencies for carrying out such deviation/relocation. The cost involved in such work shall be paid by thecontractor to the relevant Authority that maintains that utility.If any of those responsible state utility agencies require deposits for stand by duty during trenching, cablelaying to certify any damages that may occur, such deposits shall be made by the contractor.

f).Regulations and rules to be observed during filling

In order to prevent later permanent damage underneath the road surfaces, especially those with bitumen or




concrete covering, the trenches and building pits shall, in the case of cohesive subsoil, be filled likewise withcohesive soil. In order to guarantee the required compaction with corresponding suitable machines, carefulattention shall be paid to the water content thereof during compacting. The filling of the trenches with non-cohesive soil in a surrounding area of cohesive soil would result in later permanent damage to the roadcovering, which damage would have to be repaired at the expense of the Contractor.

Back filling below the canal bed and canal bank shall be done in accordance with the guide lines from therelevant offices.

g) Dust and Mud Control

The Contractor forwarded the methodology of Dust and Mud Control during construction work for approval toEngineer before commence the work.

10.2.10 Laying of cables

The Contractor shall determine the required spacing between the cables of one circuit in order to achievemaximum transmission capacity by avoiding extreme trench parameter and high induced voltages in thecable sheaths.

During cable pulling the Contractor has to consider the following:•The pulling forces applied shall be less than the maximum pulling tension specified by the cable

manufacturer•Either the continuous bond pulling method or the nose pulling method shall be applied for cable

laying•The cable pulling winches shall have a measuring and monitoring equipment to control the pulling

forces•The cable bending radius applied shall be not less than the minimum bending radius specified by the

cable manufacturer.

Beside of the 132kV cable system the Contractor has to install additionally the following facilities in thetrench:

• One fiber optic cable laid in HDPE pipe for telecommunication system• Concrete slabs for cable protection• Warning ribbons.

10.2.11 Cable installation

The following works have to be carried out: Jointing of 132kV cables Terminations of 132kV cables Cross-bonding and earthing of 132kV cables Jointing and termination of fibre optic cables All electrical tests before backfilling of the trenches and commissioning tests according to the

specification Measurement of the positive- and zero-sequence circuit impedance of the as-installed cable

installation Measurement of earthing resistance at each earthing point.

10.2.12 Restoration of road surfaces, pedestrian surfaces and hard shoulders

10.2.12.1 General

The restoration of road and pedestrian surfaces shall be carried out by expert personnel.




10.2.12.2Professional restoration of road surfaces, pedestrian surfaces and hard shoulders

The inspections shall be carried out independently by the Contractor, shall form the basis for finalacceptance by the Engineer/Employer in consultation with the relevant state utility agents.

After completion of the works, the Contractor shall restore to their original states the hard shoulder and anyadditionally used adjoining areas.

The reinstatement of all excavated roads shall be carried out by the contractor except for the stretch of roadsmaintained by Authority for the Roads, in accordance with the specifications of the relevant local authoritiesthat are available. The reinstatement of the roads that come under the control of the Road Authority shall becarried out by the Authority in accordance with its procedures and specifications. The contractor shalldiscuss and arrange with the Authority to carry out the reinstatement of those roads by that Authority itselfand the cost involved shall be paid by the contractor to that Authority. It is the responsibility of the contractorto back fill the cable trench up to the base course and the ramming should be carried out up to the requiredlevel according to the specified standards.

The contractor should collect details of the roads maintained by the Road Authority. All other road along thecable route belong to local authorities and not Road Authority and the reinstatement of those roads shall beperformed by the Contractor or as specified by the authorities. The cost involved shall be paid by contractor.

10.2.12.3 Road sides

a).KerbsIn-situ concrete kerbs or pre-cast concrete kerbs set on a concrete bed are to be laid on each side of theroads, to define the limits for vehicular access.

b).DrainAll drains, sewers, cable ducts and other necessary work below road formation level shall be completed,inspected and passed by the Engineer’s Representative before any road work is started.

c).Paving slabsConcrete paving slabs shall comply with a relevant approved standard.

The covers shall be minimum of 50 mm thick and provided with handles or holes for lifting purposes. Theyshall be reinforced to the approval of the Engineer. The reinforcement shall be in the middle of the coverswith 25mm cover to the edges. Trench covers shall comply with the relevant standard as approved.

Where concrete covers are required for trenches crossing roads, these shall be designed for the heavywheel loads expected on them and shall be reinforced with mesh fabric or mild steel bars as necessary.

10.2.12.4 Quality inspections

Inspection reports shall be prepared showing the positions of the measuring points. Only the approvedinspection methods will be recognized.

Any white lines, traffic signs or similar removed in the course of excavation shall be re-erected.

If, subsequently, there is settling, cracks or similar in the restored area of the paved trafficable surfaces, thedamage shall be remedied at the exclusive expense of the Contractor.

10.2.12.5 Reuse of topsoil, vegetation

Removed topsoil from the hard shoulder as well as separately stored topsoil shall, on restoration of the hardshoulder, be returned to its original position.

Damaged Projects, such as hedges etc., shall if necessary be renewed. All repair works shall be to thesatisfaction of the Engineer and the land owner and/or tenant.

10.2.12.6 Approval of the land owner

The Contractor shall obtain from the land owner a written approval stating that all the works have beenexecuted to his satisfaction.




10.2.13 Method of Canal crossings

10.2.13.1 Canal under crossing

The cable crossings of rivers and small creeks or waterways shall be underground pipes. Alternatively,horizontal drilling technology can be used.

A typical canal crossing arrangement is can be summarized as follows:

Bearing structure : Reinforced concrete channel encased with HDPE pipes. Support structure : Support structure and intermediate pillars with reinforced pile Foundation Erosion protection : Foundation backfill forming the canal bank shall be protected by stone

gabions with Geo textile.

Also the foundation backfill forming the canal bank and the area damage due to construction operation shallbe protected from erosion by stone gabions with Geo textile. The canal area protected according to theregulation and specification in Iraq or international norms.

10.2.13.2 Canal overcrossing

If the existing road bridge has no more space available in its service ducts, a separate bridge shall beconstructed for carrying the HV cables, which will be located parallel to the existing road bridge. The bridgeconstruction is part of this bid document and can be summarized as follows:

Bearing structure : Self-supporting lattice steel girder parallel chart l = 25m / h = 2m / w =1.5m

Bearing material : Hot dip galvanized L-sections, bolted joints and joint plates.

Girder deflection : Final deflection after cable installation dv ≤ 10 cm

i.e. Bolt hole position to offset slip and elastic deformation

Support structure : Reinforced concrete pillar of approximately 4m in height set on a steppedraft foundation of approximately 4m width.

Erosion protection : Foundation backfill forming the canal bank shall be protected by stonegabions with Geo textile.

The area damage due to construction operation shall be protected from erosion by stone gabions with Geotextile. The canal area protected according to the regulation and specification in Iraq.

The Gabions where specified in this chapter conform to the following specifications;

Hexagonal Wire Mesh - Mesh Type 8Mesh Wire 2.7 mmSelvedge Wire (edges) - 3.4mmSupplied with Tie Wire – 2.2mm

5% of Gabion weight

Mesh Strength shall be greater or equal to the following table;

Mesh Type Wire Diameter Mesh Strength8 2.7mm 47kN/m8 3.0mm 58kN/m

All wire conforms to BS 1052 / 1980 – having a tensile strength not less than 380 N/mm2 and notexceeding 500 N/mm2




All wire is Heavily Galvanized to BS 443 /1982 - according to the following table:

Wire Diametermm

Weight of Coatingg/m2

2.20 2402.70 2603.00 2753.40 2753.09 290

Gabions longer than 1.5m shall have partition panels at 1.0m centers. All material supplied must be accompanies by a manufacturer’s certificate from the factory for quality

control and quality management purposes. The material must come from an ISO 9001 certifiedfactory.

The Gabion shall bear the marking of the manufacturer’s name along the selvedge wire to enablevisual inspection.

The manufacturer shall provide an internationally acceptable certification for his products covering allaspects of design, Installation and durability.

The Geo-textile where specified in this chapter conform to the following specifications

Property Test Method Unit Typical Roll ValuesPhysicalMass Per Unit Area

Thickness

MechanicalGrab Tensile Strength(Elongation @ Break)Wide Width Tensile Strength

(Elongation @ Break)Trapezoidal Tear

Mullent Burst

Puncture StrengthCBR Burst

Cone Drop

HydraulicPore Size (095)Permeability

Permittivity

ASTM D5261ISO 9864AS 3706-1

ASTM D5199AS3706-1

ASTM D4362AS 2001.2.3 method B

ASTM D 4595BS 6906-1AS 3706-32

ASTM D4533AS 3706-3ASTM D3786

AS 2001.2.4 method BASTM D4833GRI-GSIBS 6906-4

AS3706-4DIN 54307

BS 6906-6AS 3706-5

ASTM D4751 (Dry)

g/m2

mm

N

%KN/m

%N

Kpa

NN

mm

mm

cm/s

280

2.5

1090

6017.5

50445

3030

6203780

162450

0.1500.48

0.




Water flow rate

EnduranceUV Resistance (% retained @ 500hours)

ASTM D4491BS 9606-3

ASTM D4491BS 9606-3ASTM D4355

s-1

1/min/m2

%

1.8

48859370

70

All material supplied must be accompanies by a manufacturer’s certificate from the factory for quality controland quality management purposes. The material must come from an ISO 9001 certified factory

10.2.14 Cable route survey

10.2.14.1 General

The Contractor shall carry out a survey on the as-installed cable route considering the geographical positionof the cables and the thermal soil conditions of the soil and media along the cables.

The geographical data of the cable route and especially the location of joints shall be determined and shownin the route maps Section 17.

Measurement of the thermal conditions of the soil along the trenches and media at other cable sections arerequired to confirm the minimum assumptions for determination of the transmission capacity.

10.2.14.2 Measurement of thermal conductivity along cable route

The Contractor shall carry out a detailed survey on the thermal conditions along the cable route. This surveyinclude cable sections with thermal stable backfill material in the trenches for direct burying and laying inpipes, laying in pipes at river crossings, laying in pipes at road bridges, laying in special troughs and otherssuggested by the Contractor.

The results shall confirm that the thermal conditions of the different laying methods and surrounding media atany point along the route meets the minimum requirements which have been assumed for the calculation ofthe cable rating. Most critical conditions such as drying out of the soil due to minimum ground water table,dry season, maximum ambient temperature, maximum load, etc. have to be taken into account.

10.2.14.3 Geographical survey data

The Contractor shall carry out the geographic survey with state-of-the-art geodetic equipment. The geodeticinstrument has to be connected to an electronic data logger for further data processing on the graphicalinformation systems (GIS) which is to be supplied. The required accuracy shall be less than ≤0.15 m. Thesurvey equipment and details of the survey procedure have to be approved by the Employer and/orEngineer.Sufficient measuring points shall be recorded in order to produce precise cable lines, especially at turningpoints of the cable route.

The survey shall cover the following: Cable trench width with location of joint pits and cubicles for surge diverters (over- and underground

installations) Position of fibre optic cable Situation of entering substations Situation around the cable terminal point at the dead end tower of the overhead line Installation on bridges or alternatively beside of the bridge through pipes Begin and end of special laying methods such as pipes, ducts, troughs, etc. Parallel running MV and LV power cables and other cables (telephone etc. ) Any technical installation which is of interest for electro-magnetic interference Crossings with major installations and objects Major objects within a survey corridor of 15 m at both sides of the centre line of the trench




The Contractor shall prepare the route drawings and maps with AutoCAD program, Version 10 or latestversion.

After finalizing the survey works the basic data bank, developed AutoCAD files and survey report includingdrawings shall be made available to the Engineer.

10.2.14.4 Mapping requirements

The Contractor has to process the field data of the survey with AutoCAD program.The Contractor has to submit at least the following information and documents:

• Alignment of as-installed cable system• Geographic key route map containing the required information• Total cable length between the terminations• Cross section of each type of trench including cable arrangement• Cross sections of other cable laying methods• Detailed views and sections at 132kV GIS and outdoor substation building and its surroundings• Details of joint pits and cross-bonding and earthing arrangements• Drawings of particular locations (major road crossings, bridges, channels etc. )• Cross-bonding scheme with length of individual cable sections.

All drawings shall be clearly numbered for easy reference and identification.The drawing shall show all three 132kV cables, the fiber optic cables, spare pipes and earthing conductors.The drawing shall contain all information related to the cables and arrangement such as cable type, contractnumbers, joint number, etc.

Additional explanations, legends and exploded views of details shall be included in the survey documents.

10.3 DETAILS OF DESIGN WORKS

10.3.1 Standards and Codes of Practice

Civil engineering works and services shall be designed and constructed in accordance with BritishStandards, International Standards and/or Iraqi Standards and Codes of Practices.

The Standards and/or Codes of Practice employed throughout the works should in no case conflict with thelocal by-laws.

As far as practicable, the standards or codes adopted shall be consistent throughout all chapters of theworks except when they meet superior specified requirements.

The valid international standards as mentioned shall have priority even when they have not been specificallyindicated.

BS 1377:Part4 Test method for soil for civil engineering purposesBS 3882 Recommendations and classifications for topsoilBS 4019 Core drilling equipmentBS 5930 Code of practice for site investigationsBS 6031 Code of practice for earthworksDIN 1054 Sub-soil, permissible loading of sub-soil

DIN 4017 Sub-soilPart 1 Analysis of bearing capacity for footing with vertical and central loadingPart 2 Bearing capacity calculations of spread foundations in the case of eccentricand inclined application of the load; recommendations.

ASTM D1194 – 94 Test method for Bearing Capacity of Soil for Static Load and SpreadFootings




BS 4449 Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concreteBS 449 and/or 5950 The use of structural steelBS 5328 Concrete mixesBS 8100 Structural use of concreteBS 12 Portland cement

ASTM D1195 - 93 Standard Test Method for Repetitive static Plate Load Tests of Soilsand Flexible Pavement Components, for Use in Evaluation and designof Airport and Highway Pavements.

ASTM D1196 – 93 Test method for Non repetitive Static Plate Load Tests of Soils andFlexible Pavement Components, for Use in Evaluation and of designAirport and Highway Pavements.

It should be noted that the safety factor (SF) applies to the deterministic design method where the workingloads are factored with the safety factor (SF). Standards edited in the recent years however are based onthe probabilistic method where the maximum loads in terms of return period and characteristic value ofmaterials are factored by partial safety factors (PSF). Either one of the above methods shall be adoptedthroughout all civil design parts of soil, concrete and steel, but not applied in combination.

The Contractor shall investigate the existence of any regulations and local by-laws governing the proposedworks in Iraq which are valid max. 30 days prior to the date of Bid submission and he shall be deemed tofully comply with such requirements.

The Bid shall include with his offer a list of standards and codes to be followed in design and construction ofthe works.

Copies of these codes and standards shall be made available to the Engineer/Employer during the designand construction period. In addition, the Contractor shall have available in his offices (or in his supplier’soffices) and on the site copies of all standards.

The failure of the Contractor to provide a list of standards and codes be interpreted that he intends his worksto fully comply with the standards and codes referred to in this specification.

10.3.2 Structure Type of Cable Bridge

The cable bridge component types shall be as follows:

Bearing structureSelf-supporting lattice steel girder, parallel chorts

Structures materialGalvanized L-sections, bolted joints and joint plates

Structure sectionRectangular, accommodating 2 circuits 132kV cables with associated optical fibre cables and spacefor future service lines

Support structureReinforced concrete pillar of approximately. 4m. high set on a stepped raft foundation

Erosion protectionFoundation backfill forming the channel bank / bed shall be protected by stone gabions.

10.3.3 Design Criteria of Cable Bridge

The following structure loadings and displacement limits shall be considered for designing the steel girderand concrete supports:




Dead loadDead load is defined as the weight of all permanent structures, i.e. slab foundation, overburden soil,support column, steel girder, cables (2 circuits 132kV), conducts, bentonite filling, spacers,allowance load for future service lines of 3 kN/m1

Soil loadSoil loads consist of lateral earth pressures and vertical loads of structures and soil. Active andpassive coefficients for lateral pressures and bearing capacity for vertical pressure shall be obtainedfrom the soil investigation respective its evaluation of engineering properties. The weight of soil shallbe considered as dead load

Hydrostatic loadHydrostatic load is the load due to water pressure. The design of structures shall include hydrostaticloads. The buoyancy load due groundwater is equal to the weight of the volume of displaced water.The buoyancy load shall be considered as dead load (highest / lowest channel water level)

Wind loadAll wind calculations shall be made in accordance with the specific local standards. If the max. 1 to3 sec. gust wind speed of 145 km/h is higher than the corresponding value specified in the relevantstandard, then this value specified above shall be taken. The wind load shall be considered as liveload superimposed to the dead load with regard to the member shape and structure panel spacing.

Earthquake loadThe local earthquake standards and rules have to be observed. If the intensity of 0.2g horizontalacceleration is higher than the corresponding value specified in the relevant standard, then this valuespecified above shall be taken

Erection loadErection / maintenance load is defined as live load superimposed to the dead load of structure butnot permanently attached to it, i.e. Loads imposed by lifting / temporary anchoring of pre-assembledstructure parts; erection equipment placed / anchored temporary on structure parts; personnelstanding on structure members.

Thermal loadThermal loads shall be defined as forces caused by changes in material temperature due to theexpansion or contraction of the entire structure or individual structural components.

Impact loadAny live load that can produce dynamic action (such as a moving load or a short circuit impulse )shall be described by static models in which the dynamic effects are included, e.g. increase by animpact factor

Allowable displacementThe maximum permissible residual settlement of the bridge foundation during its design life time ofsay 50 years shall be

- overall settlement os < 20 mm- differential settlement ds < 1/500 rad

The maximum permissible girder deflection out of the horizontal / vertical alignment of girder spanafter complete bridge installation (current and future cables) shall be

- Final deflection fs < 10 cm (l/250)

This requires the bolt hole positions of vertical diagonals to offset from its true positions as toachieve an initial elevated (arc – formed) girder shape compensating bolt slip and elastic sag aftermax. Load is imposed.




Above tolerances shall include the foundation setting out allowances and steel membermanufacturing tolerances.

Member design

Steel members shall be of ordinary L-shaped single or double section. The member capacity ontension shall be designed applying the net-cross section (area reduced by the bolt holes). Membercapacity on compression shall be designed observing the following slenderness limits

- Main members λ ≤ 120- bracing members λ ≤ 200- redundant members λ ≤ 250

Bolt design

Steel members shall be connected by hexagonal structural bolts, galvanized and fitted each withone spring washer and one ordinary washer. The bolt length shall accommodate that no threadsare located within the shear plane of the members / plates being connected maintaining the followingbolt end projection after tightening the nut

- min. projection 2 threads- max. projection 10mm

Packing (filler shims) shall be applied for compensating member thickness variation of- space ∆t > 2mm

Material strength

The following specified characteristic strength of material shall be the minimum grade required:

- foundation concrete C25 Ccyl ≥ 25 N/mm2 Ccube ≥ 25 N/mm2

- reinforcing steel BSt 420 Б yield ≥ 420 N/mm2 Бtensile≥ 500 N/mm2

- structural steel Fe 360 Fyield ≥ 240 N/mm2 Fult ≥ 360 N/mm2

- bolt class Kl 5.6 Ryield ≥ 300 N/mm2 Rult ≥ 500 N/mm2

Reinforcing steel shall be of hot rolled deformed round bars. Structural steel shall be of hot rolledmild steel and / or high strength steel with the surface galvanized by hot dip process. The design ofsteel components shall take the yield point of the corresponding steel grade as the characteristicmaterial ultimate value.

Corrosion protection

The cable bridge is located in an urban area overspaning a water channel. Both, air and waterpollution may create a corrosive environment to the structure being installed. The followingcorrosion protection shall be considered as the minimum:

- concrete cover of reinforcing bars c ≥ 40 mm- sulphate resistant cement by aggressiveness of- soils with sulphate SO4

2 ≥ 5000 mg/kg- water with magnesium Mg2 ≥ 1000 mg/l- water with sulphate SO4

2 ≥ 600 mg/l- steel members having galvanized coating mass t ≥ 600 g/m2

- fastener components having galvanized coating t ≥ 350 g/m2

10.4 DETAILS OF TESTING REQUIREMENTS

10.4.1 General on Testing




All design, details, materials, fabrication and tests shall be in compliance with the approved drawings andrelevant standards.

Chemical composition and mechanical properties of the concrete class and steel grade selected shall besuitable for its intended use in the project area.

The quoted prices of civil works shall include all costs for the required material / soil tests, fabricationinspection, shop assembly, facilities / equipment provision and material packing / storage.

The Contractor shall submit relevant mill test / laboratory test certificate and site test reports to the Employer/ Engineer for verification / approval. The passing of the inspection or test will not, however, prejudice theright of the Employer / Engineer to reject the equipment components if they do not comply with theSpecification when erected, or do not give complete satisfaction in service. Where the Contractor desires touse stock material, not manufacture especially for this Contract, satisfactory evidence shall be submitted thatsuch material conforms to the requirements of this Contract. In this case tests on these materials are waivedand certificates shall be submitted instead. Routine and sample tests shall be performed as per IEC 60840.Valid type test report as per IEC 60840 shall be submitted.

10.4.2 Particulars of Testing

The tests shall be conducted in accordance with the relevant standards. Measuring instruments used intesting shall be regularly calibrated at the expenses of the Contractor / Laboratory and records shall beavailable for examination by the Employer / Engineer. The tests to be conducted shall include but not belimited to the following:

Records of ground drilling and trial excavations as well as the results of in – situ tests and laboratory tests todetermine the physical and chemical properties of the soil and groundwater samples shall be documented ina comprehensive sub-soil investigation report. This shall include:

- record of penetration value- stratification of soil- level of groundwater- type of soil- distribution of grain size- state of consistency- index and engineering property of relevant soil strata- proposed foundation type

Concrete testingThe contractor shall submit not less than 1 month before commencement of the concreting operationthe following information to the Employer / Engineer for approval:

- trial design mix composition and achieved concrete strength- site concrete testing procedures- laboratory concrete testing procedures- ready-mixed concrete testing procedures

In order to achieve uniformity, the same standard applied for the concrete structural design shall beadopted for the concrete quality control.

Steel testingThe Contractor shall be responsible to provide documentation and / or undertake the followingactivities:

- tensile tests on profile / bar samples- brittleness tests on profile / bar samples- mill test certificates of steel and bolt batches- galvanizing tests on profile and bolt samples




- uniformity and thickness tests of zinc coating

Coating imperfection such as dull grey, rough surface, lumpiness and runs may be acceptedwhereas wet storage stain or bulky white deposits, dark spots or flux staining, bare or rust stains willgenerally not be accepted.

Shop assemblyBolted structures shall be tested for dimensional accuracy before dispatch to site by complete or partassembly of the girder / truss in the manufacturer’s work shop. If a horizontal part-assembly of agirder is adopted, blocking and adequate support simulating the actual support conditions shall beapplied. Test working vertical loads shall be applied (e.g. sand bags) according to the loadingdesign of the girder to verify the actual deflection and compare with the allowable displacement. Allsteel works shall be fabricated to the following tolerances:

- member length ∆ l ≤ + 0.0015٠√l (l < 10m)- member alignment ∆ f ≤ 0.001٠l (l member length)- hole position ∆ z ≤ + 1 mm- bolt clearance Φ n + 1.5 mm + 0.2 mm (n nominal bolt Φ)- structure dimension ∆ s ≤ + 0.001 ٠ d (d ≥ 10m ≤ 30m)- structure alignment ∆ g ≤ + 0.002٠ d (d structure length)- section width ∆ a ≤ 1.5 mm ( L 60 – L 100)

∆ a ≤ + 2.0 mm ( L 110 – L 160)- section thickness ∆ t ≤ + 0.7 mm ( L 60 – L 100)

∆ t ≤ + 1.0 mm ( L 110 – L 160)

Any member distorted, twisted or bent due incorrectness of detailed drawing shall be corrected.Welding to compose individual tower members or fill of mismatched bolt holes will not be permitted.Reaming of mismatched holes will not be permitted. All matching holes for bolts shall pass freelythrough the assembled members in a direction at right angles to such members. A reasonableamount of drifting will be allowed in assembling. If any errors on the drawings or fabrication arediscovered, all incorrect drawings shall be revised and submitted for approval by the Employer /Engineer and the corrected part shall be re-fabricated and re-assembled at the Contractor’sexpenses.

10.5 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXECUTION OF CIVIL WORKS

All design, details, materials, fabrication and tests shall be in compliance with the approved drawings andrelevant standards.

Chemical composition and mechanical properties of the concrete class and steel grade selected shall besuitable for its intended use in the project area.

The quoted prices of civil works shall include all costs for the required material / soil tests, fabricationinspection, shop assembly, facilities / equipment provision and material packing / storage.

The Contractor shall submit relevant mill test / laboratory test certificate and site test reports to the Employer/ Engineer for verification / approval. The passing of the inspection or test will not, however, prejudice theright of the Employer / Engineer to reject the equipment components if they do not comply with theSpecification when erected, or do not give complete satisfaction in service. Where the Contractor desires touse stock material, not manufacture especially for this Contract, satisfactory evidence shall be submitted thatsuch material conforms to the requirements of this Contract. In this case tests on these materials are waivedand certificates shall be submitted instead.

10.5.1 Sub-soil investigations

The Contractor shall ascertain for himself the effective nature of the sub-soil conditions of the sites by means




of boreholes and trial excavations, etc. Samples shall be taken as necessary and tested to determine thephysical and chemical characteristics of the various strata and of the ground water. The extent of the sub-soil investigations shall be such as to permit the satisfactory determination of the sub-soil conditions andreasonable foundation proposals. The following should be considered as a minimum requirement, assuminguniform conditions over the site, but should be extended if inconsistencies are encountered.

Boreholes shall be drilled down to the bedrock if they do not encounter the hard stratum with an N-value more than 50. The boreholes shall be 12 cm in diameter.

Borehole records shall describe and state the levels of all soils encountered with the natural watertable level. Rock core records shall specify total core recovery, solid core recovery and quality of therock cored.

Where applicable, samples of soil shall be obtained from all soil strata or at 1.5 meters intervals in asingle stratum and tested to determine physical and chemical properties, particularly with respect tosubstances which would react with concrete or other materials to be used for the foundation works.

Where applicable, in situ soil tests shall be applied to all soil strata or at 1 meter intervals in a singlestratum. Standard penetration test in non-cohesive soils, field vane tests in sensitive cohesive soils.(BS 1377:PART4:1990 , ASTM D 1194 and/or other relevant International Standard )

Disturbed and undisturbed samples shall be collected for visual examination and laboratory testing.

Groundwater samples shall be obtained from each borehole and tested in accordance with approvedpractice.

The electrical resistively of the soil shall be verified with four samples, in accordance with approvedpractice (e.g. IEEE 80)

Records of ground drilling and trial excavations as well as the results of in – situ tests and laboratorytests to determine the physical and chemical properties of the soil and groundwater samples shall bedocumented in a comprehensive sub-soil investigation report. This shall include:

- record of penetration value- stratification of soil- level of groundwater- type of soil- distribution of grain size- state of consistency- index and engineering property of relevant soil strata- proposed foundation type

10.5.2 Site clearance, and earthworks

10.5.2.1 Site clearance

The Contractor shall clear all areas required for the work. All unwanted materials, debris, etc. shall beremoved from the site. But shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to existing roadconstruction and to existing surfaces, buildings and other facilities in the area which do not need to bedemolished.




Bushes, undergrowth, trees and hedges which are not specifically noted on the drawings or in the contractfor preservation shall be uprooted and burnt or otherwise disposed of. Holes left by uprooting shall bepromptly filled with suitable material and compacted.

10.5.2.2 Earth works

a).ExcavationThe whole of the excavations shall be carried out to the widths, lengths and depths shown on the approveddrawings and in accordance with BS CP-8004 and BS 6031. No unlicensed or indiscriminate digging will bepermitted.

The Contractor may excavate by any method considered suitable, subject to the Engineer’s approval, andshall allow for the use of types of Project most suited for excavation in any location and at any time.

The Contractor is to provide all strutting and shoring necessary for the safe execution of the Works.

The Contractor shall allow for risk of meeting and having to excavate through any sort of soil, which may beencountered, including rock.

Materials from the excavation may, if approved by the Engineer, be used by the Contractor in theconstruction Works. Other excavated material shall be back filled where required or deposited wheredirected anywhere on site. Surplus materials shall be removed from the site by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall at all times keep the site free from all surplus materials, rubbish and offensive matter.

In foundation bottom 150mm layer of excavation in thickness shall be left undisturbed and subsequentlyremoved only when the concrete is about to be placed in order that softening or deterioration of the surfacesof the bottom of the excavated area by exposure may be avoided as far as possible The bottom of allexcavated areas shall be trimmed, levelled and well rammed. Concrete shall not be deposited thereon untilthe bottom has been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

b).Filling and reinstatementFilling for trenches, excavations and levelling of the site shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 250 mmun-compacted thickness, each layer watered when necessary and well rammed or otherwise compacted towithin 90% of the maximum dry density obtained by the use of a Proctor Standard Compaction Test.

Any fill material used within 500mm of concrete structures cement bound materials shall not have a solublesulphate content exceeding 2.5 g per litre when tested in accordance with BS 1377, special precautions shallbe taken to protect the concrete or cement bound materials to the approval of the Engineer.

Where excavations whether in rock or other material, are made to a greater depth than detailed, theintervening space shall be brought up to the proper level in plain concrete at the Contractor’s expense.

Any formation encountered in the excavations which, in the opinion of the Engineer is not sufficiently strongto carry the loads which will be imposed on it, shall be excavated to an adequate load bearing stratum andreplaced with mass concrete.All equipment for determination of the density of filled areas shall be supplied by the Contractor. All testsshall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer. The Bided price is deemed to include for this.

Unless otherwise described, directed or permitted, imported filling shall consist of pervious naturallyoccurring material, free from mud, silt, clay, peat, vegetable or injurious matter and water soluble saltsharmful to copper and other metals. Filling shall be imported only from approved areas.

c).Stability of fill and embankmentThe Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of embankments, which formed either by cutting or filling,and precautions taken to protect the earthworks from deterioration under adverse weather conditions.Wherever applicable the recommendations contained in the following codes of practice shall be followed incalculations, detailing and performance of the earthworks and drainage.




Earthworks – British Standard Code of Practice BS 6031-1981

Embankments shall not be formed over inclined ground surfaces without previously forming the foundingsurface, on which the fill material will be placed, to a benched profile.

All top surfaces of earthwork shall be finished off level and regular and the sides of cuttings andembankments shall be properly trimmed to the detailed slopes. The soil stability of such slops etc. shall beensured.

The Contractor is to allow for embankments and cutting slopes to be well forked, raked and stabilized asprotection from erosion to the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall construct where necessary open ditches, bunds, culverts, etc. , to divert and protect thesite in both the short and long-term form flash floods.

If any slips occur in the excavations, banks or filling during the execution of the Works or during the period ofmaintenance form any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall execute the necessary remedial work in suchmanner, and with such materials as approved by the Engineer, at the Contractor’s expense.

The Contractor shall make good all settlement of filling that may occur up to the end of the period of defectsliability at his own expense.

10.5.2.3 Explosives

Explosives may only be used when specified or approved by the Engineer. If approved, their use shallcomply with the following:

(1) all local by-laws and regulations & under the scrutiny of security forces.

(2) The Contractor shall store explosives in a licensed store or magazine provided with aseparate compartment for detonators. Explosives shall be handled only by currentlylicensed shot fires. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no unauthorized issue orimproper use of explosives brought on the Site.

(3) Explosives shall be used in the quantities and manner recommended by the manufacturers.The written approval of the Engineer shall be obtained for each location or series oflocations where the Contractor wishes to use more than 5 kg of explosives in one blast.Such approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under theConditions of Contract.

(4) When blasting is carried out the Contractor shall ensure, by adherence to proper safetydistances and by the use of heavy blasting mats where necessary, to prevent the dispersalor material, that no damage is caused to persons, animals or property on or off the Site.Special care shall be taken when blasting in wet ground to ensure that individual explosionsare reduced to such a size as to preclude damage to any buildings or structures.

10.5.3 Concrete

10.5.3.1 General

Standards of design, materials and workmanship are to be equal to or better than those laid down in BritishStandard CP 8110.

10.5.3.2 Trial mixes

The Contractor shall submit not less than 21 days before the commencement of manufacture of preliminarytrial design mixes the following information to the Engineer in respect of each grade of concrete.

(1) Grade of concrete

(2) Title of particular trial mix




(3) The grading of the aggregates

(4) The ratio by weight of all the constituents of the concrete

(5) The expected compacting factor and slump

(6) Full details of the proposed site quality control

(7) Full details of the proposed laboratory for testing

The Contractor shall also confirm his proposed testing regime and acceptance criteria for the PreliminaryTrial Mixes. Should the proposals not be approved by the Engineer, then the Contractor shall comply withthe paragraph on preliminary test cubes and the two following paragraphs

At least 28 days before commencing any Concreting in the Works, the Contractor shall make trial mixesusing samples of aggregates and cements typical of those to be used. If possible, the Concreting Projectand the means of transport to be employed in the Works shall be used to make the trial mixes and totransport them a representative distance. A clean dry mixer shall be used to make the trial mixes and thefirst batch shall be discarded.

Preliminary test cubes shall be taken from the proposed mixes as follows:

For each grade a set of 6 cubes shall be made from each of 3 consecutive batches. Three from each set ofsix shall be tested at an age of seven days and three at an age of 28 days. The cubes shall be made, cured,stored, transported and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881. The test shall be carried out in alaboratory shall be approved by the Engineer.

If it is proposed to use an admixture in the mix then for each grade of concrete a batch shall be made with adouble dose of the additive. For each of these batches 3 cubes shall be made and one tested at 7 days and2 at 28 days to determine the likely effect of error in dispensing.

The trial design mix proportions shall be approved if the average strength of a set of 9 cubes tested at 28days exceeded the specified characteristic compressive strength by current margin less 3.5 N/sq.mm. Theresults of the seven-day cube tests shall be used to give an indication for future use of the strengths likely tobe achieved at 28 days. They shall not be used to satisfy the 28 days preliminary test cube strengthrequirements.

The current margin for each particular type of concrete mix should be determined; it may be taken as havingthe smaller of the values given by (1) or (2).

i. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate batches of concrete ofnominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period not exceeding 12months by the same Project under similar supervision, but not less than 1/6 of the characteristicstrength for concrete of grade 7, 20 or 15, or 3.75 N/sq.mm for concrete of grade 20 or above.

ii. 1.64 time the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate batches of concrete ofnominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days butnot exceeding 6 months by the same Project under similar supervision, but not less than 1/3 of thecharacteristic strength for concrete of grade 7, 10 or 15, or 7.5 N/sq.mm for concrete of grade 20 orabove.

Where there are insufficient data to satisfy (1) or (2) above, the margin for the initial mix design should betaken as two-thirds of the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 7, 10 or 15, or 15 N/mm2 for concreteof grade 20 or above. This margin should be used as the current margin only until sufficient data areavailable to satisfy (1) or (2) above. However, when the required characteristic strength approaches themaximum possible strength of concrete made with a particular aggregate, a smaller margin but not less than7.5 N/mm2 may have to be permitted for the initial mix design.

At each test no cube strength shall fall below the appropriate minimum specified in the Contractor’s designs.Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval full details of themixes he proposes to use, with their anticipated average strength, which must be based on the satisfactory




results of these preliminary tests.

The Engineer shall if he so desires be present at all preliminary tests. The Contractor shall inform theEngineer of his intention to carry out such tests and the time and place of the tests at least 24 hours beforethey take place.

Neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of materials shall be altered without the prior approval ofthe Engineer except that the Contractor shall adjust the proportions of the mix as required to take account ofpermitted variations in the materials. Such approval shall be subject to the execution, to the Engineer’ssatisfaction, of trial mix procedures set out herein.

10.5.3.3 Ready-mixed concrete

Ready-mixed concrete as defined in BS 5328, which batched off the Site, may be used only with theagreement of the Engineer and comply with all requirements of the Contract.

The concrete shall be carried in purpose made agitators operating continuously, or truck mixers. Theconcrete shall be compacted and in its final position within 2 hours of the introduction of cement to theaggregates, unless a longer time is agreed by the Engineer. The time of such introduction shall be recordedon the delivery note together with the weight of the constituents of each mix.

When truck-mixed concrete is used, water shall be added under supervision, either at the Site or at thecentral batching Project, as agreed by the Engineer but in no circumstances shall water be added in transit.

Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge performanceshall comply with the requirements of BS 5328 part 3.

10.5.3.4 Materials

a).CementsNormal Portland cement complying with all the requirement of BS 12 shall be used in this project. Onlywhere the sulphate content in soil and ground water exceed the specified values in table 7 of BS 5328 part 1,the sulphate resisting cement complying with all the requirements of BS 4027 shall be used.

The Bidder shall indicate on the schedule C the brand name, manufacture and source of the cement whichhe proposes to use in the Works and the method of delivery. The Contractor shall not place the order forcement before the Engineer’s approval is obtained. All cement shall be obtained from the same source forany particular part of a structure.

The Contractor shall not use cement varying from that used in the preparation of trial mixes until any furthertrial mixes required by the Engineer have been made and tested and shown to comply with the specification.

The cement shall be tested to determine the total alkali content in accordance with ASTM C114-69(Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement) or BS 4550: Part 2. The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shallbe calculated from the formula given in BS 5328 part 4.

The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shall not exceed 0.6% of the weight of cement. The above restrictionshall be waived if the proposed aggregate is proved without doubt to be non-reactive.

The cement shall be delivered to site packed in sealed bags or proper containers, of which there shall be 20to the ton, bearing the name of the brand and manufacturer and the number of the consignment. Theapproximate weight of the cement shall be legibly marked on each bag. The Contractor shall make thenecessary arrangements for deliveries to be made sufficiently frequently to ensure freshness and in sufficientquantities to ensure that there is no suspension or interruption of the concreting work at any time.

The Contractor may use cement delivered in bulk; delivery arrangements shall be to the Engineer’s approvaland each delivery must be accompanied by a manufacturer’s test certificate.

Each consignment of cement shall be brought to the site in sufficient time to allow any tests to be carried outbefore the cement is used.




Cement in bags shall be unloaded under cover and stored in a well-ventilated and weatherproof buildingused exclusively for this purpose. The floor of the building shall be at least 150 mm off the ground and an airspace shall be left between the floor and bottom layer of bags.

If delivered in bulk an approved type of cement silo shall be used.

Each consignment shall be stacked separately so as to permit easy access for inspection and a record shallbe kept so that each consignment may be identified. Storage shall be arranged so that the cement is used inorder to delivery.

Cement which is more than 12 weeks old from the date of manufacture shall be retested on site for fineness,setting time, strength and soundness in the presence of the Engineer’s representative and full test reportsshall be submitted within 24 hours.

b).Sulphate – resisting Portland CementSulphate-Resisting is designed to prevent the rapid deterioration of concrete made from Portland cementswhich occurs in structures exposed to certain types of soils and ground-waters.

Portland cements can contain up to 14% of tricalcium aluminate (known as C3A). This compound isattacked by sulphates found in certain types of soils and ground-waters, causing concrete/mortar todeteriorate at an unacceptably rapid rate. The tricalcium aluminate content of Sulphate-Resisting is keptbelow the maximum level of 3.5% permitted by BS 4027 : 1996 to produce Sulphate -resisting Portlandcement”.

In accordance with the soil investigation report Especially for underground stricture Sulphate-resistingPortland cement concrete recommended and shall be approved by the Engineer.

c).Test certificates and samplesAll cement shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with the requirements of the appropriatespecification. The Contractor shall, when required by the Engineer, obtain for him the manufacturer’s testcertificate for any consignment as soon as possible after delivery.For every 50 tones of cement delivered to site and whenever required by the Engineer the Contractor shalltake samples, under supervision, from the cement stored on, or delivered to the site. The Contractor shalltest such samples as specified in this document.

d).AggregatesBefore the Engineer can approve any aggregate source, the Contractor shall furnish the following data.

(1) geological group of rock

(2) rock type within the group

(3) shape

(4) surface texture

(5) silt content

(6) grading curves

(7) specific gravity

(8) impact value

(9) water absorption

(10) soundness

(11) salt content

(12) alkali reactivity

The fine and coarse aggregates shall comply with BS 882.




The sources for all aggregates shall be approved by the Engineer.

e).Physical requirements

(1) The weight of voided shells in fine aggregate shall not exceed 5%.

(2) The weight of the clay and fine silt fraction (smaller than ASTM sieve No. 200) shall notexceed 5% by weight of coarse aggregates or 10% by weight for fine aggregates.

(3) Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate shall not exceed 5% as measured in accordancewith BS 812 or similar standard.

(4) The soundness of all aggregates shall be proved by a sodium Sulphate test in accordancewith ASTM C88-73, from which the loss over 5 cycles shall not exceed 10% for fineaggregates or 12% for coarse aggregates.

(5) The apparent specific gravity of aggregates as determined by an approved test, such as inBS 812, shall not be less than 2.5.

(6) Los angles abrasion shall not exceed 37%.

Where quarries with aggregate from bedrock, especially limestone of the Dolomite type, the rock shall bechecked for surface alteration to hardpan. This may affect the surface for well over a meter depth and resultin salt concentrations near the surface. Such rocks are also prone to other undesirable characteristicsincluding pockets of clay, salt, chalk or other friable material. Rigorous initial physical inspection is essential.

f).Chemical requirements

(1) Fine and coarse aggregates shall not be potentially reactive with alkalis, and shall be testedin accordance with BS 812.

(2) Fine and coarse aggregates shall not contain more than 0.5% by weight of acid solublesulphates (as S03).

(3) Fine aggregate shall contain no more than 0.1% by weight of chlorides (as NaCl) and coarseaggregate more than 0.03%. Should these figures be exceeded the aggregate may still beconsidered acceptable in this respect provided the total sodium chloride concentration is notgreater than 0.32% by weight of cement in the mix, irrespective of the origin of the chloride.

The aggregates shall be stored at mixer positions in such a manner that intermingling of different sizes andtypes of aggregates is prevented. The stockpiles are to be protected from rubbish or windblown dust.

Heaps of fine aggregate shall be capable of draining freely. Wet fine aggregate shall not be used until, in theopinion of the Engineer, it has drained sufficiently to ensure proper control of the water/cement ratio.

g).Sampling and testingThe Engineer shall have the right to request the Contractor, at any time, to draw samples of aggregates fromstockpiles on the Site or any other location to be indicated by the Engineer. All sampling and testing shall bein accordance with BS 812 or to American standards when no appropriate BS exist.

For each new source of aggregate and for each class of aggregate to be used sampling and testing shall bedone at the rate of six samples and set of test for each new source and each new class. The Contractorshall allow for the whole range of tests to be carried out. For routine sampling and testing from an approvedsource the rate shall be sample per 50 cubic meter of aggregate to be used or sample per month whicheveris greater. Such testing shall include those tests form BS 812 as are considered useful by the Engineer forcomparison with the results of the initial set of tests but the Contractor shall allow for the full range to carriedout.

Testing is to be carried out at an independent laboratory approved by the Engineer or else on the site in thepresence of the Engineer’s

h).WaterThe water used for making concrete, mortar and grout shall be clean, fresh and free from injurious amounts




of soil, vegetable or organic matter or any other substance in suspension or solution. The mix water shall becontinually monitored for salt content and the concrete mix designed accordingly to limit total salt content.

i).AdmixturesAdmixtures shall not be used without the approval of the Engineer.Before the use of any admixture can be approved the Contractor must prove by trial mix procedures that theconcrete will in no way be adversely effected even when twice the recommended dose is batched.

10.5.3.5 Workmanship

a).ProjectThe concreting Project shall be suitably in type, capacity and design for its purpose. The performance of theProject and its disposition shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Project shall be maintainedregularly and stand by Project shall be available to avoid any delay in the progress of the works.

b).Concrete strength requirementsAll concrete mixes shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 5328 and BS 8110 as designated ondrawings approved by the Engineer.

The strength requirements for each grade of concrete proposed in the design shall be proven by means ofpreliminary trial tests as specified in BS 5328 and BS 1881. The minimum cement content and the maximumfree water-cement ratio shall be in accordance with BS 8110 and BS 5328.

The Contractor’s designs and drawings shall show clearly the characteristic strengths, and permissibledeviation proposed for each grade of concrete to be used.The Contractor shall carry out frequent tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer to check the relationship ofthe strength of concrete cured under site conditions to that cured under laboratory conditions.

c).MixingAll concrete except where specifically permitted by the Engineer in writing shall be mixed in weigh batchmixing machines. The machines shall have a large water storage tank with a gauge or that a predeterminedquantity of water can be injected direct into the mixer drum. The dry concrete ingredients shall be mixed untila uniform color is obtained after the addition of the water the concrete shall be mixed for a further 2 minutesor until a uniform color is achieved. The total water in the mix shall not exceed the amount used in the trialmix.

In computing the quantity of water to be added, due account must be taken of the water contained in theaggregates. The amount of water shall be sufficient to ensure through hydration, good workability and highstrength.

The Contractor shall take all precautions to the satisfaction of the Engineer to protect the concrete from theinjurious effects of the elements.

d).WorkabilityThe concrete shall be of such consistency that it can be readily worked into the corners and angles of theframework and around reinforcement without segregation of the materials or bleeding of free water at thesurface. On striking the framework it shall present a face which is uniform, free from honeycombing, surfacecrazing or excessive dusting, and which shall not, in the opinion of the Engineer, be inferior to the standardslaid down in later clauses in this Chapter. In order to satisfy the Engineer that adequate for the requirementsof the Specification, the Contractor shall carry out a series of workability tests on the preliminary trial mixesrequired elsewhere in this Chapter. These tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881, or suchother procedure as approved by the Engineer.

The samples to be tested shall be obtained from the batches used for the preliminary test cubes. In additionthe Contractor shall supply for each of the grades of concrete a section of framework complete withreinforcement fixed in position and generally representative of the sections commonly to be employed in theWorks. The capacity of this trial section of formwork shall be at least half a batch of concrete but in any casenot less than 1/4 cubic meter. The formwork shall comply with the requirements of this Specification forformwork. The mould shall be filled in the presence of the Engineer with concrete of the same mix and batchfrom which the preliminary test cubes are made and shall be compacted in the same manner with the same




equipment as are proposed for the Works. This procedure shall, if necessary, be repeated with modifiedmixes until the appearance of the concrete after striking the mould is acceptable to the Engineer, after whichit shall be used as the standard for that grade.

When specific workability is called for a check it shall be maintained by measuring slump at the rate of onetest for each 10 cubic meters of concrete or three tests for each day of concreting.

e).TransportationThe concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the Works by means that shall beapproved by the Engineer and which shall prevent adulteration, segregation or loss of ingredients, andensure that the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing.

The concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequences indicated on approved drawings, in theSpecification or as directed by the Engineer, within one hour of mixing.All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be clean and free from standing water, immediatelybefore the placing of concrete.The Engineer shall be given 24 hours’ notice in order that he may check the work.

Except where otherwise directed, concrete shall not be placed unless the Engineer or his representative ispresent or he has previously examined and approved the positioning, fixing and condition of thereinforcement and of any other items to be embedded, the cleanliness, alignment and suitability of thecontaining surfaces, and the adequacy and condition of Project.

The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position and in such a manner as to avoidsegregation displacement of the reinforcement, formwork or other embedded items. Placing shall becontinuous between specified or approved construction joints.All small concrete pours shall be carried out in the late afternoon.

Where chutes are used to convey the concrete, their slopes shall not be such as to cause segregation andsuitable spouts or baffles should be provided to obviate segregation during discharge. Concrete shall not beallowed to fall freely more than 1.5 meters except with the approval of the Engineer. Where pneumaticplacers are used the velocity of discharge shall be regulated by suitably baffles or hoppers where necessaryto prevent segregation damage and distortion of the reinforcement, other embedded items and formwork,caused by impact.Upon arrival at the place of deposition the concrete truck driver must present to the Engineer’sRepresentative a chit from the concrete batcher stating (a) the grade of concrete,

iii. the workability (c) the aggregate size (d) type of cement and € time of batching of the concrete.

If concreting is not started within 24 hours of approval being given, approval shall again be obtained from theEngineer. Concreting shall then proceed continuously over the area between construction joints. When in-situ concrete has been in place for 4 hours, or less as directed by the Engineer depending upon the mix,type of cement and weather conditions, no further concrete shall be placed against it for a further 20 hours.

Concrete, when deposited, shall have a temperature of not less than 5°C and not more than 32°C. It shallbe compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer when the time shall be within2 hours of the introduction of cement to the mix and within 20 minutes of discharge from the agitator.

Except where otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to acompact depth not exceeding 450 mm where internal vibrators are used or 300mm in all other cases.When trucking or chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid segregation.

f).CompactionThe concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the layer. It shall be thoroughly workedagainst the formwork and around reinforcement and other embedded items, without displacing them.Successive layers of the same lift shall be thoroughly worked together.

All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. Unless otherwise agreed by theEngineer, it shall be compacted with the assistance of vibrators. Sufficient vibrators in serviceable conditionsshall be on site so that spare equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns.




Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. Where vibrators of the immersion type are used,contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided, so far as is practicable.

Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 1 and 10 hours after compaction.

Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, approved power driven vibrators of the immersion type shall beused. They shall be inserted at such distances apart or applied in such a manner as will ensure that theconcrete being placed.

Vibrators shall penetrate the fully depth of the layer and where concrete is placed over previously placedconcrete not more than 4 hours old the vibrators shall enter and re-vibrate that layer to ensure thatsuccessive layers are well knitted together.

Over-vibration, causing segregation, surface laitance or leakage through formwork, shall be avoided.Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation of voids. Vibrators shall not keepdamage to formwork or other parts of the structure, or displace the reinforcement or other embedded items.

Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than 10,000 cycles per minute and external vibratorsnot less than 3,000 cycles per minute.

g).Joining new concrete work to existingExisting concrete shall be broken out as described or directed and scrabbled to form a suitable key for thenew concrete. Where necessary the reinforcement in existing concrete shall be exposed, cleaned and bentto its correct shape. New reinforcement shall be securely wired to the existing.

Immediately before new concrete is poured, a cement wash shall be applied to the existing concrete faces.

h).CuringConcrete shall be protected during the first stages of hardening from the harmful effects of sunshine, dryingwinds, cold, rain or running water. The protection shall be applied as soon as practicable after completion ofplacing by a method to be approved by the Engineer.The Contractor shall put forward his proposals for curing concrete to the Engineer for approval, before anyConcreting work commences.

On vertical surfaces, the curing membrane shall be applied immediately after removing the formwork.

No concrete shall be allowed to become alternately wet and dry. The temperature of curing water shall besame as the concrete + 5 0 C. General concrete shall be wet-cured for at least 7 days with a further 4 daysof dry protection.

i).Additional requirements in hot weather

GeneralIn hot weather the Contractor shall present for the Engineers approval his proposals for dealing with thefollowing problems:

(1) Reduced workability(2) Excessive Plastic shrinkage(3) Rapid strength gain but possible low final strength(4) Rapid drying-out of concrete

10.5.3.6 Testing

Testing methods are to be in accordance with the relevant BS or ASTM standard except as approved orrequested by the Engineer.

The Engineer shall have the right to order that any materials which, do not meet with his approval shall notbe used in the work. The Contractor shall have the right to sample, test and give his opinion on such




materials. If after this, the materials which, are rejected by the Engineer shall be immediately removed fromthe Site by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with facilities for materials testing on Site. The facilities may bethose normally used by the Contractor.

All testing facilities on site shall be calibrated at regular intervals in the presence of the Engineer, andwhenever deemed necessary by the Engineer.

Works test cubesBefore commencing any Concreting work, the Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed testingregime for the Works concrete. If the proposals are not approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shallcomply with the next two paragraphs below.

For the first 10 days that a particular grade of concrete is produced, or where there is a lapse of two weeksor more between successive pours of the same grade of concrete, three samples shall be taken on each dayand three cubes shall be made from each sample. Two shall be tested at 7 days and the other at 28 days.

After the initial 10 days, samples of designed mixed shall be taken at the reduced rate given in Table below,with the provision that at least one sample shall be taken on each day that concrete of that grade is used.Three cubes shall be made from each sample, one being tested at 7 days and the remaining two at 28 days.

Surface treatmentsWhere concrete is to be treated with sodium silicate or a similar dust preventive coating this must be carriedout within 14 days of the Concreting of the foundation and be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions. The methodology shall be provided for approval of Engineer.

10.5.3.7 Reinforcement

Steel reinforcement shall be one of the following:

iv. Hot rolled mild steel round bars complying with BS 4449 or equivalent standard, as approved by theEngineer.

(2) High tensile steel either

(a) Cold worked deformed bars complying with BS 4461 (or 4482) or(b) Hot rolled deformed bars complying with BS 4449, or approved by the Engineer.

(3) Welded steel mesh reinforcement complying with BS 4483 or similar approved.

(4) Bars greater than 40mm diameter will not generally be used.

Reinforcement shall be stored clear of the ground on sufficient supports to prevent distortion of the bars.Mild steel and high tensile steel are to be stored separately.

The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a certificate for each consignment from the steelmanufacturers showing that the steel meets the requirements of the Specification. One tension test and onebond test shall be made for each lot of 50 tonnes of less supplied for the permanent Works.

Steel reinforcing bars shall be kept clean and shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, oil, grease,mortar earth, paint or any material which may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement,or which may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete.

Reinforcement may be bent on site, or alternatively off the site, by an approved method. The Contractorshall arrange for bending equipment suitable for bending both mild steel and intermediate grade bars. Mildsteel shall be bent at temperatures in the range 50C to 1000C. High tensile steel shall only be heated orwelded when the manufacturer given written guarantees as to its subsequent performance. The shapes ofthe bends and lengths must comply as specified on the Drawings and Bending Schedules as approved by




the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide any chairs or other subsidiary reinforcement necessary to keep thereinforcement in its correct position. The concrete cover over such subsidiary reinforcement shall not be lessthan that over the reinforcement generally.

The Contractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards to ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced bybeing walked upon during the placing of the concrete or other operation.

Mesh reinforcement shall be fixed flat in the works over the whole of the areas indicated on the approveddrawings. Adjoining sheets of mesh shall overlap by at least 300 mm.

Loose small pieces of fabric shall only be used where they are essential for fitting into small confined parts ofthe Works. Areas of fabric reinforcement shall be net with no allowance included for laps or waste. Fabricreinforcement shall be delivered to site only in flat sheets.

Bends, cranks and other shapes of reinforcement shall be to the dimensions specified; otherwise all barsshall be truly straight. Bending of reinforcement shall be carried out round a former having a diameter of atleast four times the diameter of the bar.

The bending dimensions shall comply with BS 4466 unless otherwise specified on the bending schedules.Cover blocks used for the correct positioning of reinforcement shall be of a type approved by the Engineer.They shall be rigid, inert and capable of supporting the reinforcement in its correct position with the requiredcover without deforming. They shall not impair the finish on the concrete no cause the formwork to deformlocally.

Reinforcing bars shall be tied together at every intersection using 16 SWG soft pliable annealed steel wire.Immediately prior to Concreting all reinforcement shall be wire brushed to remove all wind-blowncontaminates such as salt.

Concrete cover to all reinforcement (including stirrups) shall be as specified in BS 8110 and BS 8004. Inaddition, the cover should never be less than the diameter of the main bar or nominal maximum size of theaggregate.

Testing of reinforcementThe Engineer shall have the right to select at any time samples of steel reinforcement for testing inaccordance with the relevant approved standard.

Bar bending schedulesThe Contractor shall provide fully dimensioned bending Schedules giving the location and bending of everybar shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise stated on the Bending Schedules all bars shown will bedimensioned in accordance with the national or international standard to be approved by the Engineer, e.g.British Standard 4466.

Prevention of corrosion below groundThe Contractor is to ascertain whether or not the sub-strata contain any corrosive qualities, which will have adeleterious effect on reinforced concrete. If such conditions are evident, only an additive approved by theEngineer is to be incorporated in the concrete mix in the proportions according to the manufacturer’srecommendations.

TENDER NO: P.C . 35 / NT/ 2013GENERAL DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION PROJECTS


Section 12– Employer’s Requirements: Technical Specifications Supplementary Information 12 - 201

SECTION 11: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS SUPPLEMENTARYINFORMATION

11.1 NOTES ON TECHNICAL SCHEDULESThe schedules are intended to provide the Employer with essential supplementary information in an organisedformat. The examples of more commonly used schedules are given herein. Others may be devised and addedin accordance with the requirements of the instructions to bidders.All the schedules are essential for the bid evaluation and some in contract execution; they should all beincorporated in the contract, and appropriate changes introduced with the approval of the employer or itsrepresentative.The schedules are to be completed and submitted as part of the technical proposal in accordance with theinstruction to bidders.There shall be no equipment offered without filling these schedules. These sheets to be copied and filled inseparately for each different type of equipment offered.

11.2 TECHNICAL PERTICULARS AND GURANTEES

11.2.1 Schedule A: General Description of Work

Section for purposes ofpayment and taking over conductors Optic fiber Type of

constructionEstimated route

Length inkilometres

AL Zawraa s/s - AL Hurryia s/s

AL Yarmook s/s - ALRasheed s/s

AL Kazale s/s - AL Amean400 kV substation

XLPE insulated132kV Aluminium

Singe Core2000mm2 CableDouble Circuit

+DTS System (notapplicable)

SeparateOptical Fiber

CableTwo cables

Each Circuit, Flatformation

13 km

18.250 km

16.250 km




11.2.2 Schedule B: Times for Delivery & Completion and Contract Completion TimeThe Schedule shall be completed by the contractor and the times entered shall be binding on the contractor andsigned by him. The latest date by which an order must be placed to permit completion by the specified datesshall be entered, together with the guaranteed periods in weeks from placing of order to the completion of thelines.All periods shall be in weeks, calculated from the latest date for placing the order and shall show thecommencement and completion for each item. The Contractor shall refer to the construction program notingkey dates and periods. Based on the figures inserted in this Schedule, a Gantt Chart showing the tasks shouldalso be submitted)

Commencement Date:

Completion Date:

Total period of Contract:

AL Zawraa Substation - AL Hurryia substationAL Yarmook substation - AL Rasheed substationAL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation

DescriptionWeeks

Start Complete

Survey and profilingCable route and Joint locations finalizationAccess for Commencement of erection

Cable joint box132kV Cable, manufacture and inspectionOptical Fiber, manufacture and inspectionJoints and accessories, manufacture and inspectionEarthwire, manufacture and inspectionOPGW conductor, manufacture and inspectionGrounding materials, manufacture and inspection

Shipment of 132kV CableShipment of Optical Fibre cableShipment of Joints and accessories(Please note Particular Condition 37 for shipment date and valuerequirements and penalties)

Excavation of trenchesLaying of Conduits132kV cable layingOptical Fibre cable layingJointing works and end worksTesting and commissioning of 132kV CablesTesting and commissioning of Fiber optic cables




11.2.3 Schedule C: Manufacturers and Places of Manufacture, Testing and Inspection

ITEM DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER PLACE OFFACTORY

PLACE OFTESTING

1 XLPE power cables

2 DTS System (not applicable)

3 joint for XLPE power cables

4 conventional termination for XLPE power cables

5 Stranded copper conductor

6 Cross-bonding cable

7 Grillage PVC,

8 Marking tape PVC

9 Special tools complete for jointing andterminating 132kV power cable

10 Cross bonding Box suitable for C. Bjoints and cable

11 Digital differential protection relayaccording to technical specifications

12 Portable AC high voltage cable for AC test cables& equipment up to 190kV AC.

13 Witnessing according to schedule NoError!Reference source not found.

14 Training according to schedule NoError!Reference source not found.

15 Power cable clamps casting with twostainless steel screws and rubber sole

16 Power cable clamps casting with sixstainless steel screws and rubber sole .

17 Optical Fiber

18 Optical fiber cable joint with enclosures

19 Optical fiber accessories




Contd. .

ITEM DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER PLACE OFFACTORY

PLACE OFTESTING

20 ODF: Optical Distributed Frame

21 Typical cable jet

22 Compressor Machine

23 Multiplexer

24 Cabinet for Multiplexer

25 Instruments & Commissioning equipment

Signature of Bidder:

Name of Bidder:

Note : Only one manufacturer should be indicated against each item




11.2.4 Schedule D 5: 132kV Power Cable – General Particulars and GuaranteesThe bidder is required to fill the spaces in this schedule

Itemno. Particulars and grantees Units Type/Value

1- Section area of conductor Sq. mm 2000

2- Metal Aluminium

2a Water resistant Powder should be provided to preventwater movement through the conductor strands.

3- External diameter of conductor mm

4- Maximum resistance of conductor of completed cable at20°C( D.C. Resistance) Ohms/km

5- Star reactance of 3 phase circuit a 150 H Ohms/km

6- Capacitance between conductor and screen F/km

7- Maximum charging current per 1000 m of completedcable at normal voltage frequency Amps

8-

Inner semi conducting sheatha) construction

Extruded

b) material SemiconductingCompound

c ) thickness mm

9-

a) Minimum thickness of insulation for XLPE betweeninner and outer semi – conductor mm

b) Average thickness of insulation for XLPE betweeninner and outer semi – conductor mm

10-

Outer semi conducting sheatha) construction

Extruded

b) material SemiconductingCompound

c ) thickness mm

10-

Longitudinal water tight barrier between semi –conductor & Al wiresa) material Semiconducting Water

Swellable Tape

bn ) nominal thickness mm 0.3mm (Approximately)

12-

Metallic screen

- material Copper Wire or tape

- nominal thickness mm

- number of wires pcs

- total cross sectional area mm2

- arrangement

13- Equalizing tape




- material


14-

Longitudinal water tight barrier between Equalizingtape & lead sheath or LAT

- material


15- Nominal thickness of lead sheath or LAT mm

16-

Diameter over lead sheath or LAT

a) Maximum mm

b) Minimum mm

17-

Composition of lead sheath (by weight)a) lead %b) tin %c) cadmium %d) antimony %

18-

External covering

a) construction

b) materialc) thickness mm

19- Overall cable diameter mm

20- Weight per meter of completed cable kg

21- Minimum radius of bend around which cable can bebent during installation m

22- Nominal internal diameter of duct or pipe through whichcable can be pulled mm

23-

a) Nominal drum length m

b) Drum dimensions (w × d ) m

c) Nominal drum weight (gross) kg

24-

Maximum continuous current carrying capacity for aDouble circuit in flat formation axial phase distance asper drawings and single point/cross bondinga) Direct buried circuit at 1.3 m depth to group centre,

35°C soil temperature, 2.0°C.m/W soil thermalresistivity

Amps

b) when drawn into pipes or ducts of length more than15 m for one 3- phase circuit in a condition similar toa) as per drawing 003 in Section 17

Amps

c) when cleated to sealing end structure( ambient max . 50° C ) Amps




d) when laid direct in trench inside concrete trough asper drawing 001 in Section 17 ground temp. 35°C. g-120 for one 3 phase circuit per trench

Amps

25-

Maximum continuous current carrying capacity for asingle circuit in flat formation with 300 mm axial phasedistance and single point/cross bondinga) Direct buried circuit at 1.3 m depth to group center,

35°C soil temperature, 2.0°C.m/W soil thermalresistivity

Amps

b) when drawn into pipes or ducts of length more than15 m for one 3- phase circuit in a condition similar toa)

Amps

c) when cleated to sealing end structure( ambient max . 50° C ) Amps

d) when laid direct in concrete trough with 1.3 m to topof protective cover ground temp. 35° C. g-120 forone 3 phase circuit per trench

Amps

26-

Maximum Conductor TemperatureAssumed max. conductor temp. fora) cable laid in trench inside the concrete trough 0C

b) cable draw into pipes or ducts 0C

c) cable laid on racks in air 0C 90

27-Maximum dielectric loss of completed cable at normalvoltage and frequency and at max conductor temp (seeitem above )

kW

28 -

Maximum power factor of charging kVA of completedcable when laid direct in the ground at normal voltageand frequency and conductor temperature of :a) 150C %

b) 300C %

c) 40 0C %

d) 500 C %

e) 60 0C %

f) 70 0C %

g) 80 0C %

h)Max . temp. %

29-

Maximum power factor of charging kVA of completedcable at normal frequency and conductor temperature of25 C & at:a) 50 % normal voltage %

b) 100 % normal voltage %

c) 150 % normal voltage %

d) 200 % normal voltage %

30 -

Sheath loss of complete cable per 1000 m of 3 phasecircuit at normal voltage & frequency & at max currentrating when:

a) laid direct in ground with current per phase as initem 24 (a )




b) draw in to pipes or with current perphase as in item 25 (a )

31 -Impulse puncture voltage

a)positive 1/50 waveb)negative 1/50 wave

32-Maximum conductor temperature after passage of acurrent of 40, 000 Amps. For 1 second subsequent tocontinues full load current

ºC

33-Maximum pressure for which cable is designed kg/sq. cmMaximum Side Wall N/m

34-

Maximum dielectric stress:

a) at conductor kV/mm

b) at screen or sheath kV/mm

35-

Total loss of completed cable per 1000 m of 3 phasecircuit at normal voltage, frequency max. current rating.a) laid direct in trefoil touching (solid bonded)b) laid direct in flat formation (single point bonded)c) in ducts in trefoil touching (solid bonded)d) in ducts in flat touching formation

(single point bonded)e) in air in trefoil touching (solid bonded)f) in air in flat formation (single point bonded)

kW

W/mW/mW/mW/m

W/mW/m

36

Installation of CableMaximum permissible pulling force of total cableMinimum cable bending radius when laid:

During installationAdjacent to joints and terminations

Minimum internal diameter of pipes or ducts

kN

mmmmmm

37

Commissioning TestsRecommended tests after all terminating and jointinghas been completed but before connection to thesystem.

38 Current Rating required for both circuits (Continuous) 350 MVA

Note: We have no objection to study any proposal submitted from the bidder for metallic screen toverify 40kV short circuits

Actual Manufacturer Vendor/Supplier/of Equipment/Material Contractor

Name of the Company ……………….. …………………Location and address

Official Seal/Stamp of the Company ………………… …………………& Date




11.2.4.1 Differential Protection Relay for two line ends with software and connection cables

Required Features Offered

1 Protection functions

Type of multiplexer

Complying to ITU-T rec.

Transmission CapacityDifferential protection for universal use with power lines and cables on allvoltage levels with phase-segregated measurement (87L)Two line ends capability

Suitable for transformers in protected zones (87T)

Restricted earth-fault protection (87N) if a transformer is within the protectionzoneWell-suited for serial compensated lines

Two independent differential stages:: one stage for sensitive measuring forhigh-resistance faults and one stage for high-current faults and fast faultclearance

Breaker-failure protection (50BF)Phase and Earth overcurrent protection Directional element (50, 50N, 51,51N,67, 67N)

Phase-selective intertripping (85)

Overload protection (49)

Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)

Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U)

Auto-reclosure single/three-pole (79)

2 Control functions

Command and inputs for ctrl. of CB and disconnectors (isolators)

3 Monitoring functions

Self-supervision of the relay

Trip circuit supervision (74TC)

8 oscillographic fault records

CT-secondary current supervision

Event logging / fault logging

Switching statistics

4 Front

User-friendly local operation

PC Front access




Required Features Offered

5 Communication interfaces

Serial protection data (R2R) interface

Front interface for PC connection

6 System interface

IEC 61850 Ethernet

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

PROF1BUS-DP, DNP 3.0 and MODBUS

Service / modem interface (rear)

Time synchronization via IRIG-B, DCF77 or system interface

7 Features

Browser-based commissioning tool

Direct connection to digital communication networks

11.2.5 Schedule D 6: Fiber Optic CableThe bidder is required to fill the spaces in this schedule

Data about offered integrated equipment to be filled in by the bidder.Name of Manufacturer: .Model :Type:

1. General Required Offered

Type of multiplexer SDH: ADM

Complying to ITU-T rec. Yes

Transmission Capacity Mbit/s STM-1: 155

Access capacity on 64 kbit/s channels to be state by the bidder

Access capacity on 2 Mbit/s channels Minimum 40

Equipment used in substation environment List of 10 referencesubstation projects

Redundant central processor Shall be available

Digital cross connect function Fully non-blocking

The equipment is KEMA type tested Yes

2. Tele-protection functionality:

Integrated distance teleprotection functionality Yes

Integrated optical teleprotection functionality

Addressing system for commands Yes

Loop test for delay time Yes

Switch-over less than 10ms Yes

3. Available AGGREGATES:





Optical SDH aggregates (ITU-T G. 957) S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2

4. Available TRUNK INTERFACES:

Optical 8Mbit/s interface Yes

Electrical 34/35 Mbit/s interface Yes

HDB3, 2 Mbit/s interfaces per module No. Minimum 8

Complying to ITU-T rec. G. 703, transparent G.704, selectable

HDSL, 2Mbit/s interface: no of copper wiresCapacity on 2Mbit/s or on 1Mbit/s Capacityselectable

No. chch / pair of

wire

4 or 230 or 1530 / 2 pairs30 / 1 pair

HDSL line codesCAP, PAM16, G. SHDSL All codes available

5. Available USER INTERFACES

5.1 Voice interfaces for trunk lines:

1 + 1 com path protection, available for all Yes

Analogue, 4wire with E&M:Input level Output level

dBdB

to be stated by thebidder according tostandardrecommendationinternational

Analogue, 2wire with E&M:Input levelOutput level

dBdB

+6. 5 . . –12. 5–1. 0 . . -20

Digital, 2Mbit/s CAS or PRI Yes

5. 2 Voice interfaces for remote subscriber:

2wire, subscriber side dBr -5 . . +4 / -7. 5 . . -1

Minimal number of subscriber No. 10

2wire, PABX side dBr -5 . . +4 / -7. 5 . . -3

Minimal number of PABX No. 10

6. Integrated teleprotection

6.1 Interface for Commands:

Number of independent commands No. 4

Transmission time max. ms to be stated by thebidder

Signal voltage V peak 250

1 + 1 com path protection Yes

6. 2 Interface(s) for Differential Protection:

Electrical interface: G. 703 kbit/s 64

Optical Interface kbit/s to be stated by thebidder

7. Data: channels per module

1 + 1 com path protection, available for all Yes

V. 24/V. 28 (RS-232): up to 38. 4kbit/s No. to be stated by thebidder

V. 11/X. 24 (RS-422): 64kbit/s No. to be stated by thebidder





V. 35: 64kbit/s No. to be stated by thebidder

V. 36 (RS-449): 64kbit/s No. to be stated by thebidder

G. 703: 64kbit/s No. to be stated by thebidder

Ethernet:: 10BaseTWAN capacityProtocols

No.

Mbit/s

to be stated by thebidderMin: 2x 2Mbit/s Min. :IP

Integrated Ethernet Hub 10/100 Base T No. Min. 5

8. Integrated alarm gathering module:

Number of external alarms per module No. Min. 20

Auxiliary power supply for ext. contacts Yes

9. Configuration Management

Type/Name of configuration tool

For local / remote operation Yes / yes

Data communication network(DCN)

Ethernet / IP orEthernet / OSI

Integrated Management of Tele-protectionCommands

Yes

10. Network Management System

Type/Name of configuration tool

For fault / configuration management Yes / yes

For local / remote operation Yes / yes

Data communication network(DCN)

Ethernet / IP or theEthernet / OSI

Graphical network representation Yes

Integrated Management of TeleprotectionCommands

Yes

Synchronization view option Yes

Networking Package option(end to end configuration)

Yes

11. Technical Requirements

11.1 Ambient Conditions:

Storage: ETS 300 019-1-1, class 1. 2 °C / % hum -25 . . + 55 / class 1.2

Transport: ETS 300 019-1-2, class 2. 2 °C / % hum -25 . . + 70 / class 2.2

Operation: ETS 300 019-1-3, class 3. 1E °C / % hum -5 . . +45 / class 3. 1E

11. 2 Power Supply

Operation VDC 48 / 60 (-15/+20%)

Fully redundant power supply Yes

Dual power feeder Yes

11. 3 Optical amplifier

Minimal Launched power (A) dBm to be stated by thebidder




1. General Required OfferedMinimum sensitivity (B) dBm to be stated by the

bidderAvailable bit ratesPDH: 8 and 34 Mbit/s,SDH: STM-1 (155 Mbit/s),STM-4 (622 Mbit/s)

All bit ratesavailable

Dispersion limits for STM-4 application(on SM Standard fibre G. 654)

km >250

Optical connectors E2000 Yes

Alarm output Yes

LAN management interface Yes

Bidder shall provide all necessary information which deemed to be necessary to complete the project inall respects.




Specification table( should be filled by the bidder )

Item No. Particular & guarantees Unit Standards NOTES

1 Manufacturer

2 Type reference

3 Place of Manufacture

4 Type of optical fiber Single mode

5 Construction Loose tube

6 StandardsAccording to

IEC60793/60794 & ITU-TG652

7 Wave length Nm 1310 or 1550

8 No. of fibers No. 24

9 Transmission attenuation db/km <0. 25 at 1550<0. 4 at 1310

10 Transmission band width MHz/km > 10000

11 Splicing loss Db < 0. 1

12 Chromatic dispersion Ps/nm. km < 18

13 Min. bending radius mm

14 Type of armouring PE

15 Max. applicable tension KN

16 Operating temp. range c -10 to 60

17 Mass of cable kg/km

18

Manufacturer quality system inaccordance with ISO9000, 9001, 9002, 9003&9004

Y/N

19 Type test certificate




11.2.6 Schedule D 3: International Standards

Particulars Required IEC/ISO/BS ENStandards

Required or alternativeequivalent NationalStandard offered by Bidder

Quality assurance ISO 9001

Drawings BS PD 6031

Steel bolts and nuts BS 90/BS EN 20898-1

Steel plain washers BS 4320

Steel spring washers BS 4464

Stainless steel BS 970 Pt 1

Galvanizing BS EN ISO 1461, BS 7371Pt 6, BS EN 10244 Pt 2

Aluminium-clad steel wires for electricalpurposes BS EN 61232

Galvanized steel wire strand BS 183

Optical cables to be used alongelectrical power lines (OCEPL)

BS EN 187200ISO 9223IEC 60693IEC 60793-1IEC 60794-1CCITT G. 651CCITT G. 652CCITT G. 653CCITT G. 703ANSI 455-37ANSI 455-85ANSI 455-91ANSI 455-14ANSI 455-89BS EN 50189BS EN 50183BS 4803BS1559

Batteries IEC 60623

IEC 61284

Soils testing BS 1377

Foundation testing IEC 61773BS 4027

Sulphate resistant BS 882 / BS EN 12620

cement Aggregate

Concrete BS 8500 / BS EN 206 Pt 1BS 1881

Reinforced concrete BS 8110

Reinforcement for concrete BS 4449Test method for soil for civil engineeringpurposes BS 1377:Part4

Recommendations and classificationsfor topsoil BS 3882




Core drilling equipment BS 4019

Code of practice for site investigations BS 5930

Code of practice for earthworks BS 6031

Sub-soil, permissible loading of sub-soil DIN 1054Sub-soilPart 1 Analysis of bearing capacity forfooting with vertical and central loadingPart 2 Bearing capacity calculations ofspread foundations in the case ofeccentric and inclined application of theload; recommendations

DIN 4017

Test method for Bearing Capacity of Soilfor Static Load and Spread Footings ASTM D1194 – 94

Carbon steel bars for the reinforcementof concrete BS 4449

The use of structural steel BS 449 and/or 5950

Concrete mixes BS 5328

Structural use of concrete BS 8100

Portland cement BS 12Standard Test Method for Repetitivestatic Plate Load Tests of Soils andFlexible Pavement Components, for Usein Evaluation and of Airport andHighway Pavements

ASTM D1195 - 93

Test method for Non repetitive StaticPlate Load Tests of Soils and FlexiblePavement Components, for Use inEvaluation and of Airport and HighwayPavements.

ASTM D1196 – 93

Conductors of Insulated Cables IEC 60228

Power Cables with Extruded Insulationand their Accessories forRated Voltages Above 30kV (Um=36kV) up to 150 kV(Um=170kV) - Test Methods andRequirements.

IEC 60840

Calculation of Thermally PermissibleShort-Circuit Currents,Taking into Account Non-AdiabaticHeating Effects

IEC 60949

Carbon Steel Pipes ASTM A53




11.3 DEPARTURES FROM THE SPECIFICATION(To be completed by the contractor)

Clause No.. Departures from the requirements of this specification with details of alternative




11.4 MANUFACTURER’S AND SUBCONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE

11.4.1 Site Organization

11.4.1.1 Field Staff Details (Supervisory Staff and Erection Gangs)

Survey

Number of Survey Parties

Estimated Total Route - km Surveyed per month

Expatriate Field Staff.

Supervising Engineers

Foremen and Other Grades

Maximum Local Labour Force

Skilled

Unskilled

Cable Trench Excavation and Conduit laying

Estimated Number of Excavation and Conduit Laying Gangs

Estimated Peak Total Rate Excavation and Conduit laying perMonth

Cable Installation

Estimated Number Gangs

Estimated Peak Total Rate installation of cables

Cable Jointing

Estimated Number of Jointing Gangs

Estimated Peak Total of jointing per Month




11.4.1.2 Key Personnel’s Details

ationName ofNomineeAlternate

Summary ofQualification

Experience & PresentOccupation

Year of Birth

Headquarters

Project Director

Project Manager

Engineering Staff

Other key Staff(Give ation)Site Office

Project Manager

Site Manager

Deputy Site Manager

Supervising Engineers

Construction Supervisors

Other Key Staff

The Bidder shall list in this schedule the key personnel (including first nominee and the second choice alternate)he will employ from headquarters and from site office to direct and execute the works.




Bidder's Experience (New Construction)(If Bidder wishes to supply details of more than one Contract additional pages should be attached).Bidder is to complete this schedule giving details of supply and erection of transmission lines of the same typewhich they have completed or which are in the course of completion by them.

1 Name and Address of ClientContact PersonTelephone and Facsimile number

2 Country

3 Voltage and Length of the cable

4 Brief description of terrain

5 No. of circuits and No. and size of cables

6 Type of Optic Fiber and length

7 Type of construction

8 Technical co-ordination by

9 Optic fiber supplier

10 Power Cable supplier

11 Installation of Cables by

12 Installation of Optic Fibre by

13 Cable Jointing by

14 Site supervision by

15 Max. No of expatriate supervisors

16 Max. No of local employees

17 Date of award

18 Target completion date

19 Actual completion date

20 Name & address of consultant (if any)




Volume of Construction Work In Each of the Last Five Years

Year Description of the Work Volume of constructionwork in US $

11.4.2 Details of Other Work In Hand & Contractual Commitments

Description of Other Work In Hand Contractual Commitments




11.4.3 Schedule of Sub Contractors

Item Element Approximate Name and addressof Statement of

of work Value in percentage Sub-Contractor Similar Works executed

The Bidder shall enter in this schedule a list of the sections and appropriate value of the work forwhich the purposes to use sub-contractors, together with the names and addresses of the proposedsub-contractors. The bidder shall also enter a statement of similar works previously executed by theproposed sub-contractors, including description, location and value of works, year completed, andname and addresses of the Employer Notwithstanding such information the bidder, if awarded thecontract, shall remain entirely and solely responsible for the satisfactory completion of the Works.




11.5 DOCUMENTS, DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE BIDThe following documents & drawings shall be submitted with the BID.

6.1 Duly signed Scope of Works in Section 7: – Employer’s Requirement in Part II – Requirements.6.2 Duly signed – Technical Specification in Section 8: Section 12: – Employer’s Requirement in Part II

– Requirements.6.3 Duly signed – Drawings in Section 16: – Employer’s Requirement in Part II – Requirements.6.4 Duly completed and signed Supplementary Information,

1 Manufacturers and place of manufacture and testing.2 Technical particulars and guarantees3 Times for delivery and completion and contract completion.4 Departures from the Specification.5 Manufacturers’ and subcontractors’ statement of experience.6 Documents, drawings and information to be submitted.7 Adherence to the Environmental Acts, Regulations and/or Guidelines

6.5 Duly signed Section 14: - General Conditions of Contract6.6 Duly signed Section 15: - Particular Conditions of Contract6.7 Duly signed Section 13: –Contract Forms .6.8 All documents required to demonstrate bidder’s ability and capability as specified in Section 3: –

Evaluation and Qualification Criteria– Bidding Procedures.6.9 This shall include but not limited to, verifiable evidence to prove that Bidder meets the qualification

requirements in Item 2 of Section 3: – Evaluation and Qualification Criteria– Bidding Procedures. .6.10 Verifiable evidence of manufacturers’ experience in manufacturing comparable type of equipment

offered under this bid to meet the criteria stated in Item 2. 7 of Section 3: – Evaluation andQualification Criteria– Bidding Procedures.

6.11 Verifiable evidence of service experience of equipment offered under this bid to meet the criteriastated in Item 2. 7 of Section 3: – Evaluation and Qualification Criteria– Bidding Procedures. .

6.12 Verifiable evidence of Bidder’s subcontractor’s experience in works similar to those subcontracted tomeet the criteria stated Item 2. 7 of Section 3: – Evaluation and Qualification Criteria– BiddingProcedures. .

6.13 If a bidder appoints a local agent or sub-agent, representative or nominee to act for or on behalf ofthe bidder, such a local agent or sub-agent, representative or nominee shall register himself with anappropriate authority (registrar) if any.

6.14 Certificates issued by an independent international organization to ensure compliance with the ISO9001:2000 standards by the Bidder and Manufacturers of all main equipment.

6.15 Authorization letters shall be provided with the bid in respect of main equipment not manufactured bythe bidder,

6.16 The manufacturer’s guarantee that they have an established department that will serve the Ministryof Electricity, Iraq in supply of spares for at least 10 years for all main equipment.

6.17 Type Test certificates in accordance with standards specified in relevant Chapters, issued by anindependent laboratory or Type Tests witnessed by MOE for,- 132kV cables and accessories.- Optic Fiber cable and fittings.

6.18 Descriptive information for equipment being offered including;1. List of recommended spare parts with prices.2. List of special tools or fixtures required for installation, testing, maintaining and operating the

equipment. (inculuding manufacturer’s specifications and documentations)3. List of cost of special tools, lifting devices required for installation, operation and maintenance.

6.19 The documents and drawings which are of a sufficient standard to indicate clearly all manufacturingand structural details must be prepared by Contractor and accompany each Technical Bid:-Drawings need have leading dimensions only.The Contractor will be required at the time of the letting of the Contract to supply additional copies ofsuch drawings submitted with his Bid as may be selected by the Employer’s Representative. These




drawings together with copies of the drawings originally issued with the Bid documents will then bebound up either in the Contract document or in a separate folder and will be signed both by theEmployer and the Contractor for purposes of identification.

6.20 General bar chart of the , manufacturing, shipping, erection and commissioning schedule clearlyshowing the transmission line outages.

6.21 List of standards the Bidder intends to follow, for the electrical and for the civil works.6.22 All the literature with respect to GIS System: software and hardware and Cable software6.23 Any other material required to be completed and submitted by bidders in accordance with the

Instruction to Bidders.

11.6 SUBMITTALS DURING CONTRACT PERIOD

11.6.1 Programme of submittalsThe Contractor shall arrange his and drawing programme so that the works can be properly coordinated by theEngineer. He shall provide the documentation as specified below within 4 weeks of the award of Contract,together with any drawings and information considered necessary by the Contractor or Engineer.a. Confirmation of contract documentationb. A detailed schedule of all Project to be supplied under the Contract. This schedule shall have space for

the following information as a minimum requirement in respect of each item (The previously submittedManufactures or country of origin or work program dates shall not change:-

i. manufactureii. Country of originiii. Planned 'free on board ' (FOB) delivery date.iv. Planned date of arrival on site v. Sub-order number (as applicable)vi. Allocated drawing numbers

c. A preliminary schedule of drawings to be submitted to the Engineer for approval in respect of all items ofequipment to be supplied under the Contract. The schedule shall include a programme for submittal ofall drawings required by the Specification. The schedule shall have space for at least the followinginformation to be added at a later date:-

i. Drawing numberii. Drawing titleiii Proposed date of submissioniv. Actual date of submissionv. Resubmissionvi. Revision numbersvii. Date of approvalviii. Release as a working drawingix Date to sitex. Date to Engineerxi. Date of as-built drawing

11.7 DRAWING NUMBERSThe Contractor will apply drawing numbers to all drawings, including those from sub-contractors and thoseissued for information before they are submitted to the Engineer. The Contractor’s drawing office will beexpected to issue the numbers in batches which will cover broad subject areas. . The Contractor shall submit tothe Engineer for approval the subject areas he proposes to use prior to the issue of any drawing. TheContractor shall each month issue an up-to-date drawing list to the Engineer.

11.7.1 Documents & Drawings to be submitted during the contract periodThe following is a list of drawings and documents to be submitted by the Contractor, for approval, within twomonths from the Commencement Date or such later date as may be approved.a. Detailed project programme:

To cover all aspects of the Contract: , procurement, manufacture, testing, shipment and transport,delivery to site, all site operations related to construction, erection and installation, testing at site,commissioning and completion of the transmission line project.

b. drawings and documents detailing:Calculations giving the basis to be employed

c. Arrangement drawings of:




Cable pulling methods, joints terminations etc.d. Detail drawings of:

Route plans, schedules profile drawings all in accordance with the Specification.

11.8 CONTRACT RECORD DRAWINGSAfter completion of work on site and before release the C.O.C. 3 set, one of them transparent copy and threesoft copies (Drawing in Auto Cad, calculations in Excel or MS Word in editable in format) for all the contract asbuilt record drawings as required by the specification of:

As a minimum, the following drawings shall be submitted with the Tender:a. Cable routeb. Cable connection and earthing schemesc. Construction of 132 kV XLPE single core cablesd. Construction of SF6 terminations at GIS (if applicable)e. Jointing box of 132 kV cablesf. Earthing system at jointing box including construction of earthing wire and Link Boxg. Cross-bonding system at jointing box including construction of cross-bonding wire and Link Boxh. Detailed system of Temperature monitoring systemi. Cable arrangement on routej. Construction of optical fiber cables for temperature monitoring system and telecommunication system.k. Construction of HDPE Pipe including jointsl. River crossing details if anym. Railway crossings if anyn. Road crossingso. Bridge crossings if anyp. Culvert crossings

Drawings show details of construction, site organization, proposed personnel, location and dimensions ofstockyards, etc.

Type test certificates issued by independent authorities for 132 kV XLPE cables and accessories and opticalfiber cables and accessories

General bar chart of the , manufacturing, shipping, erection and commissioning schedule clearly showing thetransmission line outages

Evidence of Bidder's experience in works similar to this project

Evidence of Bidder's subcontractor's experience in works similar to those subcontracted

Certificates issued by an independent international organization to ensure compliance with the ISO 9001Quality Assurance standards by Bidder and manufacturer.

List of standards the Bidder intends to follow, for the electrical and for the civil worksEvidence of Manufacturer's experience in manufacturing comparable type of equipment or equivalent as offeredunder this contract

Descriptive information for equipment being offered including:List of recommended spare parts with pricesList of special tools or fixtures required for installation, testing, maintaining and operating the equipmentList and cost of special tools, lifting devices required for installation, operation and maintenance

DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS TO BE SUBMITTED AFTER THE CONTRACT

As a minimum, the following drawings shall be submitted after the Contract (refer to Technical Specification of132 kV Underground Cable System):

a. Cable routeb. Cable route and the existing underground installationsc. Cable connection and earthing schemesd. Detailed construction of 132 kV XLPE single core cables




e. Detailed construction of SF6 terminations at GISf. Detailed jointing box of 132 kV cablesg. Earthing system at jointing box including construction of earthing wire and Link Boxh. Cross-bonding system at jointing box including construction of cross-bonding wire and Link Boxi. Detailed system of Temperature monitoring systemj. Cable arrangement on routek. Construction of optical fiber cables for temperature monitoring system and telecommunication system.l. Construction of HDPE Pipem. River crossing details if anyn. Railway crossing at Baseline Road, under Fly Over Bridgeo. Road crossingsp. Bridge crossing detailsq. Culvert crossings

Drawings show details of construction, site organization, proposed personnel, location and dimensions ofstockyards, etc.

Type test certificates issued by independent authorities for 132 kV XLPE cables and accessories and opticalfiber cables and accessories

General bar chart of the , manufacturing, shipping, erection and commissioningschedule clearly showing the transmission line outages

After completion of work of contractor shall provide a 3 set of work shop drawing ( one of them transparent ) forall the relevant items mentioned above.

All drawing mentioned above (submitted to the engineer or employer) shall become property of the employerwho shall have full rights to reproduce drawing and use them as the owner sees fit including submitting them toother vendors for the purpose of obtaining bids on future projects.




11.9 SAMPLESThe Contractor shall submit samples of material as required from time to time by the Engineer.




11.10 ADHERENCE TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL ACTS, REGULATIONS AND / OR GUIDELINES

A. Throughout performance of the Facilities, the Contractor shall abide by the applicable rules and regulationsof the Iraqi Department of Environmental Protection and Pollution Control, and shall otherwise conduct alloperations in such a way as to minimize impact upon the natural environment and prevent any spread orrelease of contaminated or hazardous substances.

B. The Contractor shall:1. Identify and comply with all other applicable laws, regulations, ordinances, statutes, rules, and codes

governing environmental requirements and conduct the Facilities based on the requirements of thisContract and the requirements of the Equipment Supplier as set forth in the Equipment Contract,including compliance with permit requirements and Project plans and approvals. The Contractor shallhave sole responsibility for compliance of the Facilities with environmental requirements.

2. Provide documentation required by the governing authority or the Employer concerning environmentalrequirements.

3. Provide and maintain effective planning and field control measures appropriate for the scope of workwhich may include:

Wastewater discharges to land, surface water, or groundwater,

Extraction/supply of water,

Storm water management,

Spill prevention and response,

Unanticipated discoveries [e.g., Unexploded ordnance (UXO), cultural sites]

Erosion and sedimentation control,

Air emissions and dust control,

Sound level control,

Waste and hazardous waste management,

Hazardous material management; and

Work area restoration,

This shall include obtaining certifications and conducting analyses and monitoring of such activities asrequired by the Contract Documents, environmental requirements or other applicable law; and utilizingappropriate equipment.

4. Comply with all access restrictions, including prohibitions on access to certain areas on or adjacent tothe Site and require its personnel and those of its suppliers and Subcontractors to comply with allsignage and flagging related to such restricted areas.

5. Require that its personnel do not hunt, fish, feed, capture, extract, or otherwise disturb aquatic, animal,or vegetative species within the Project boundary or while performing any tasks in performance of theFacilities without prior approval from the Employer.

6. Not proceed with any renovation or demolition work until inspections and notifications have beencompleted in accordance with the process outlined in the Project’s Environmental requirements.

7. Promptly stop work in the immediate area where contaminated soil indicators (such as odour orappearance), unknown containers, piping, underground storage tanks, or similar structures arediscovered; or any other materials which are reasonably suspected to be toxic or hazardous. TheContractor shall then immediately notify the Employer and the Project Manager, and the stop workarea shall be determined by the Employer. The implementation of the Facilities will remain stoppeduntil the discovery is properly characterized by the Employer and adequate information is known toassess the hazard(s) to recommence work in a manner that will not pose unnecessary hazard(s) topersonnel and/or the environment. The Contractor is entitled to treat any such discovery and




necessary measures to characterize and abate such discovery as a change affecting cost or schedule,consistent with GCC Clause 40.

8. Promptly stop work in any area where potential cultural resources, artefacts with archaeological orhistorical value, or human remains are discovered, and immediately notify the Employer and theProject Manager. The stopped work shall proceed in the manner set forth in sub clause 7 above. Noartefacts, items, or materials shall be disturbed or taken from the area of discovery. Neither theContractor nor any of its suppliers and Subcontractors shall have property rights to such artefacts,items, or materials, which shall be secured and guarded by the Contractor until turned over to theEmployer or the appropriate authorities. The Contractor shall also require that its personnel and thoseof its suppliers and Subcontractors comply with this provision and respect all historic andarchaeological sites in the area. The Contractor is entitled to treat any such discovery of potentialcultural resources, artefacts with archaeological or historical value, or human remains and necessarymeasures to appropriately manage such issues as a change affecting cost or schedule, consistentwith GCC Clause 40.

9. The Contractor is required to reject any plan, transaction, or arrangement involving unlawful orunethical practices in connection with such unanticipated discovery.

10. Manage, store, and dispose of all hazardous waste generated or hazardous materials brought to thesite (this excludes pre-existing toxic or hazardous materials found on the site) and used by theContractor during its execution of the Facilities in accordance with national, regional, and localrequirements and as required. This includes, but is not limited to: (i) waste minimization; (ii)hazardous materials inventory with material safety data sheets (MSDS), or equivalent document, foreach hazardous material on site; (iii) employee training; (iv) hazardous waste spill management andreporting; (v) proper storage of hazardous waste; (vi) hazard communication/signage; (vii) equipmentdecontamination; (viii) onsite and offsite transport of hazardous waste; and (ix) selection and use ofoffsite final disposal facilities. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, the Contractor shallwork with the Employer and the Project Manager to determine the most appropriate actions to take forthe handling, removal or other disposition of any hazardous materials present at the Site before theContractor commenced the implementation of the Facilities. The Contractor shall in no event beconsidered the owner or generator of any pre-existing hazardous materials.

11. The Contractor shall train personnel in spill prevention. The Contractor shall ensure that adequateand sufficient supplies of spill response materials are available in the event that during the executionof work a spill to the environment occurs.

12.. In addition to the Contractor’s other indemnity obligations, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend andhold harmless the Employer and its subsidiaries and affiliates and the officers, agents, employees,successors and assigns and authorized representatives of all the foregoing from and against anyfines, penalties or other damages to the extent arising from the Contractor’s failure to comply with therequirements of this Clause.



Section 13– Employer’s Requirements: Bank Guarantees, Certificates and Change Orders 13 - 230

SECTION 12: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS: BANK GUARANTEES,.CERTIFICATES

12.1 BANK GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATES

12.1.1 Form of Performance Security (Performance Bond)

Performance Bond

STANDARD WORDING

Please very urgently issue under our risk and responsibility your Performance Bond for an amount of(amount in numbers) (amount in words) for account of (the Customer) and in favor of [theBeneficiary), valid until (date) and covering (description).

Please issue in the following forma:

QUOTE

To: (Beneficiary). Date:

We Trade Bank of Iraq, are issuing this Performance Bond guarantee to you at the request of (name ofCustomer) (the "Customer") for a maximum aggregate amount of up to (amount in numbers) (amountin words) between you and' the Customer relating to (description)

We hereby guarantee to pay to you such amount as you may claim from us hereunder upon presentationof your first written demand at our counters purporting to be signed by your authorized signatoryspecifying the amount claimed hereunder, certifying that the Customer has failed to fulfill its obligations toyou under (the Contract and that accordingly you are entitled to receive payment under the PerformanceBond provided that:

1. Only one demand may be made hereunder/more than one demand may be made hereunder prior tothe Expiry Date (as defined below).

2. The payment of any claim should be made on first demand regardless of any contestation betweenthe parties concerned.

3. We confirm to you that the necessary approval of the Foreign Exchange Authorities has beenalready obtained for issuing this Performance Bond.

4. The payment of any claim should be made according to the prevailing exchange rate at the actualdate of payment.

5. In case of dispute, (this Performance Bond is subject to Iraqi law.6. This Performance Bond is not subject to any conditions other than those conditions stated above.

Let it be known that this Performance Bond being solely in your favour as Beneficiaries is not assignable ortransferable to any third party, (likewise it is not transferable by the principal to any other beneficiary or thirdparty whom so ever is not permissible), as same being personal to all parties concerned.

By this Performance Bond, we undertake to pay to you any amount or claim not exceeding under anycircumstances the above mentioned amount, provided the claim falls within the direct scope of the matter tobe indemnified and is irrelevant to any other matter even if these matters resulting from the subject to beindemnified or relevant thereto, when particular to any party, whatsoever its origin, since this PerformanceBond is in your favour as the sole Beneficiary and subject to our receipt of your claim in this office not laterthan the official working hours of day xxx of the month xxx in the year xxx (the "Expiry Date"), otherwise,should we not receive any claim from you by that date our liability will cease and the present PerformanceBond will become null and void and it will be removed from our records.

In any event or for any reason our maximum liabilities under this Performance Bond will not exceed the sum




to be indemnified shown here above.

Yours faithfully, AUTHORISED SIGNATURE UNQUOTE

In consideration of you issuing your Performance Bond as requested above we hereby open in your favourour Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit number XXX for an amount of (amount in numbers) (amount inwords) available against your claim transmitted by authenticated SWIFT / that you have duly issued yourPerformance Bond as requested by ourselves and that you have received a claim in accordance with theterms of the Performance Bond.

This Standby Letter of Credit expires on (Performance Bond Expiry Date+15 days) and is subject toUniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits (Revision) International Chamber of CommercePublication No, 600.

In the event of a drawing under this Standby Letter of Credit our maximum aggregate liability is restricted to(amount in numbers) (amount in words).

We undertake to pay to you on your first authenticated SWIFT / Tested Telex demand any amount that youmay claim not exceeding the total value of the said Performance Bond provided that such demand is inaccordance with our Standby Letter of Credit.




12.1.2 Form of Advance Payment Security (Not applicable as there is no Advance payment)

.................................Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing Branch or Office..................................

Beneficiary: ...................................Name and Address of Employer .................................................

Date: .........................................................................................................................................................

Advance Payment Guarantee No.: .......................................................................................................

We have been informed that . . . . . name of the Contractor. . . . . (hereinafter called "theContractor") has entered into Contract No. . . . . . reference number of the Contract. . . . . dated . .. . . . . .with you, for the execution of . . . . . . name of contract and brief description of Works. . . . .(hereinafter called "the Contract").

Furthermore, we understand that, according to the Conditions of the Contract, an advance paymentin the sum . . . . . (the Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the amount of theadvance payment denominated either in the currency(ies) of the advance payment asspecified in the Contract, or in a freely convertible currency acceptable to the Employer.). . . . .. (. . . . . amount in words. . . . . ) is to be made against an advance payment guarantee.

At the request of the Contractor, we . . . . . name of the Bank. . . . . hereby irrevocably undertake topay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of . . . . . name of the currency andamount in figures*. . . . . . (. . . . . amount in words. . . . . ) upon receipt by us of your first demandin writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligationunder the Contract because the Contractor used the advance payment for purposes other than thecosts of mobilization in respect of the Works.

It is a condition for any claim and payment under this guarantee to be made that the advancepayment referred to above must have been received by the Contractor on its account number . . . . .Contractor’s account number. . . . . at . . . . . name and address of the Bank. . . . . .

The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amount of the advancepayment repaid by the Contractor as indicated in copies of interim statements or payment certificateswhich shall be presented to us. This guarantee shall expire, at the latest, upon our receipt of a copyof the interim payment certificate indicating that eighty (80) percent of the Contract Price has beencertified for payment, or on the . . . day of . . . . . . (insert the expected expiration date of the Timefor Completion. The Employer should note that in the event of an extension of the time forcompletion of the Contract, the Employer would need to request an extension of thisguarantee from the Guarantor. Such request must be in writing and must be made prior to theexpiration date established in the guarantee. In preparing this guarantee, the Employer mightconsider adding the following text to the form, at the end of the penultimate paragraph: “TheGuarantor agrees to a one-time extension of this guarantee for a period not to exceed [sixmonths][one year], in response to the Employer’s written request for such extension, suchrequest to be presented to the Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee"). , . . . . .,whichever is earlier. Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be receivedby us at this office on or before that date..

This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 458.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Seal of Bank and Signature(s)




12.1.3 Form of Completion Certificate

Contract: [. . . . .insert name of contract and contract identification details. . . . . ]

Date: ......................................

Certificate No.: ......................................

To: [. . . . .insert name and address of Contractor. . . . . ]

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,

Pursuant to GC Clause 24 (Completion of the Facilities) of the General Conditions of the Contractentered into between yourselves and the Employer dated [. . . . .insert date. . . . . ], relating to the [. . ..brief description of the Facilities . . . .], we hereby notify you that the following part(s) of the Facilities was(were) complete on the date specified below, and that, in accordance with the terms of the Contract,the Employer hereby takes over the said part(s) of the Facilities, together with the responsibility forcare and custody and the risk of loss thereof on the date mentioned below.

1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: [. . . .description . . . .]

2. Date of Completion: [. . . .date . . . .]

However, you are required to complete the outstanding items listed in the attachment hereto as soonas practicable.

This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities inaccordance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.

Very truly yours,

[. . . .Signature . . . .]

Project Manager




12.1.4 Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate

Contract: [. . . . .insert name of contract and contract identification details. . . . . ]

Date: ......................................

Certificate No.: ......................................

To: [. . . . .insert name and address of Contractor. . . . . ]

Pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 25.3 (Operational Acceptance) of the General Conditions of the Contractentered into between yourselves and the Employer dated [date], relating to the [brief description of theFacilities], we hereby notify you that the Functional Guarantees of the following part(s) of the Facilitieswere satisfactorily attained on the date specified below.

1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: [description]

2. Date of Operational Acceptance: [date]

This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities inaccordance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.

Very truly yours,

[. . . .Signature . . . .]

Project Manager




12.2 CHANGE ORDERS

2.1 Change Order Procedure2.1.1 General

2.1.2 Change Order Log

2.1.3 References for Changes

2.2. Change Order Forms2.2.1 Request for Change Proposal

2.2.2 Estimate for Change Proposal

2.2.3 Acceptance of Estimate

2.2.4 Change Proposal

2.2.5 Change Order

2.2.6 Pending Agreement Change Order

2.2.7 Application for Change Proposal




12.2.1 Change Order Procedure

12.2.1.1 General

This section provides samples of procedures and forms for implementing changes in theFacilities during the performance of the Contract in accordance with GC Clause 39 (Changein the Facilities) of the General Conditions.

12.2.1.2 Change Order Log

The Contractor shall keep an up-to-date Change Order Log to show the current status ofRequests for Change and Changes authorized or pending, as Annex 8. Entries of theChanges in the Change Order Log shall be made to ensure that the log is up-to-date. TheContractor shall attach a copy of the current Change Order Log in the monthly progressreport to be submitted to the Employer.

12.2.2 References for Changes(1) Request for Change as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CR-X-

nnn.

(2) Estimate for Change Proposal as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be seriallynumbered CN-X-nnn.

(3) Acceptance of Estimate as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CA-X-nnn.

(4) Change Proposal as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CP-X-nnn.

(5) Change Order as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CO-X-nnn.

Note:(a) Requests for Change issued from the Employer’s Home Office and the Site

representatives of the Employer shall have the following respective references:

Home Office CR-H-nnnSite CR-S-nnn

(b) The above number “nnn” is the same for Request for Change, Estimate for ChangeProposal, Acceptance of Estimate, Change Proposal and Change Order.




12.2.3 Change Order Forms

12.2.3.1 Request for Change Proposal Form

[ Employer’s Letterhead ]

To: [ Contractor’s name and address ] Date:

Attention: [ Name and title ]

Contract Name: [ Contract name ]Contract Number: [ Contract number ]

Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:

With reference to the captioned Contract, you are requested to prepare and submit a ChangeProposal for the Change noted below in accordance with the following instructions within [ number ]days of the date of this letter [or on or before ( date )].

1. Title of Change: [ Title ]

2. Change Request No./Rev.: [ Number ]

3. Originator of Change:Employer: [Name]Contractor (by Application for Change Proposal No. [Number Refer to Annex 5.2.7]

4. Brief Description of Change: [ Description ]

5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change: [ Description ]

6. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the request of Change:Drawing No./Document No. Description

7. Detailed conditions or special requirements on the requested Change: [ Description ]

8. General Terms and Conditions:

(a) Please submit your estimate to us showing what effect the requested Change will haveon the Contract Price.

(b) Your estimate shall include your claim for the additional time, if any, for completion of therequested Change.

(c) If you have any critical opinion regarding the adoption of the requested Change inconnection with the conformability to the other provisions of the Contract or the safety ofthe Project or Facilities, please inform us of your opinion in your proposal of revisedprovisions.

(d) Any increase or decrease in the work of the Contractor relating to the services of itspersonnel shall be calculated.

(e) You shall not proceed with the execution of the work for the requested Change until wehave accepted and confirmed the amount and nature in writing.

[ Employer’s Name ][ Signature ][ Name of signatory ][ Title of signatory ]




12.2.3.2 Estimate for Change Proposal Form

[ Contractor’s Letterhead ]

To: [ Employer's name and address ] Date:




With reference to your Request for Change Proposal, we are pleased to notify you of the approximatecost of preparing the below-referenced Change Proposal in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 39.2.1of the General Conditions. We acknowledge that your agreement to the cost of preparing theChange Proposal, in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 39.2.2, is required before estimating the costfor change work.


2. Change Request No./Rev.: [ Number ]


4. Scheduled Impact of Change: [ Description ]

5. Cost for Preparation of Change Proposal: [ insert costs which shall be in the currencies of theContract ]

(a) Engineering (Amount)

(i) Engineer hrs x rate/hr =

(ii) Draftsperson hrs x rate/hr =Sub-total hrsTotal Engineering Cost

(b) Other Cost

Total Cost (a) + (b)

[ Contractor's Name ][ Signature ][ Name of signatory ][ Title of signatory ]




12.2.3.3 Acceptance of Estimate Form

[Employer’s Letterhead]


Attention: [Name and title]

Contract Name: [Contract name]Contract Number: [Contract number]


We hereby accept your Estimate for Change Proposal and agree that you should proceed with thepreparation of the Change Proposal.


2. Change Request No./Rev.: [ Request number/revision ]

3. Estimate for Change Proposal No./Rev.: [ Proposal number/revision ]

4. Acceptance of Estimate No./Rev.: [ Estimate number/revision ]


6. Other Terms and Conditions: In the event that we decide not to order the Change accepted,you shall be entitled to compensation for the cost of preparation of Change Proposal describedin your Estimate for Change Proposal mentioned in para. 3 above in accordance with GCClause 39 of the General Conditions.

[ Employer’s Name ][ Signature ][ Name of signatory ][ Title of signatory ]




12.2.3.4 Change Proposal Form






In response to your Request for Change Proposal No. [Number], we hereby submit our proposal asfollows:

1. Title of Change: [ Name ]

2. Change Proposal No./Rev.: [ Proposal number / revision ]

3. Originator of Change: Employer: [ Name ] / Contractor: [ Name ]


5. Reasons for Change: [ Reason ]

6. Facilities and/or Item No. of Equipment related to the requested Change: [ Facilities ]

7. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:[Drawing/Document No./Description]

8. Estimate of increase/decrease to the Contract Price resulting from Change Proposal:

Amount[ insert amounts in the currencies of the Contract ]

(a) Direct material

(b) Major construction equipment

(c) Direct field labor (Total hrs)

(d) Subcontracts

(e) Indirect material and labor

(f) Site supervision

(g) Head office technical staff salaries

Process engineer hrs @ rate/hrProject engineer hrs @ rate/hrEquipment engineer hrs @ rate/hrProcurement hrs @ rate/hrDraftsperson hrs @ rate/hrTotal hrs

(h) Extraordinary costs (computer, travel, etc. )

(i) Fee for general administration, % of Items




(j) Taxes and customs duties

Total lump sum cost of Change Proposal [Sum of items (a) to (j)]

Cost to prepare Estimate for Change Proposal [Amount payable if Change is not accepted]

9. Additional time for Completion required due to Change Proposal

10. Effect on the Functional Guarantees

11. Effect on the other terms and conditions of the Contract

12. Validity of this Proposal: within [Number] days after receipt of this Proposal by the Employer

13. Other terms and conditions of this Change Proposal:

(a) You are requested to notify us of your acceptance, comments or rejection of this detailedChange Proposal within [Number] days from your receipt of this Proposal.

(b) The amount of any increase and/or decrease shall be taken into account in theadjustment of the Contract Price.

(c) Contractor’s cost for preparation of this Change Proposal: [ . . . .insert amount. This cost shallbe reimbursed by the Employer in case of Employer’s withdrawal or rejection of this Change Proposalwithout default of the Contractor in accordance with GC Clause 39 of the General Conditions . . . . ]

[ Contractor's Name ][ Signature ][ Name of signatory ][ Title of signatory ]




12.2.3.5 Change Order Form






We approve the Change Order for the work specified in the Change Proposal (No. [ number ]), andagree to adjust the Contract Price, Time for Completion and/or other conditions of the Contract inaccordance with GC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.


2. Change Request No./Rev.: [ Request number / revision ]

3. Change Order No./Rev.: [ Order number / revision ]

4. Originator of Change: Employer: [Name] / Contractor: [ Name ]

5. Authorized Price:

Ref. No.: [ Number ] Date: [ Date ]

Foreign currency portion [Amount] plus Local currency portion [ Amount ]

6. Adjustment of Time for Completion

None Increase [ Number ] days Decrease [ Number ] days

7. Other effects, if any

Authorized by: Date:Employer

Accepted by: Date:Contractor




12.2.3.6 Pending Agreement Change Order Form






We instruct you to carry out the work in the Change Order detailed below in accordance with GCClause 39 of the General Conditions.


2. Employer’s Request for Change Proposal No./Rev.: [ number/revision ] dated: [ date ]

3. Contractor’s Change Proposal No./Rev.: [ number / revision ] dated: [ date ]


5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change: [ Facilities ]

6. Reference Drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:

[ Drawing / Document No. / Description ]

7. Adjustment of Time for Completion:

8. Other change in the Contract terms:

9. Other terms and conditions:

[ Employer’s Name ]

[ Signature ]

[ Name of signatory ]

[ Title of signatory ]




12.2.3.7 Application for Change Proposal Form






We hereby propose that the below-mentioned work be treated as a Change in the Facilities.


2. Application for Change Proposal No./Rev.: [ Number / revision ]dated: [ Date ]


4. Reasons for Change:

5. Order of Magnitude Estimation (amount in the currencies of the Contract): [ Amount ]

6. Scheduled Impact of Change:

7. Effect on Functional Guarantees, if any:

8. Appendix:

[ Contractor's Name ]

[ Signature ]

[ Name of signatory ]

[ Title of signatory ]



Section 14 – Contract Forms 14-245

SECTION 13: CONTRACT FORMSThis Section contains the Letter of Acceptance, the Contract Agreement and Appendices to theContract Agreement which, once completed, will form part of the Contract.

13.1 NOTIFICATION OF AWARD

[ Employer's letter head ]

Letter of Acceptance

[ date ]

To: [Name and address of the Contractor]

This is to notify you that your Bid consisting of the Technical and Price Bids dated [date] for executionof the [ name of the Contract and identification number, as given in the Contract Data ] for the Contract Price inthe aggregate of [ amounts in numbers and words ] [ name of currency ], as corrected and modified inaccordance with the Instructions to Bidders is hereby accepted by The Ministry of Electricity Republicof Iraq.You are requested to furnish the Performance Security within 14 days in accordance with theConditions of Contract, using for that purpose one of the Performance Security Forms included inSection 12: Employers Requirements (Bank Guarantees and certificates) of the Bidding Document

[ Authorized Signature ][ Name and Title of Signatory ]

Ministry of Iraq

Republic of Iraq

Attachment: Contract Agreement




13.2 CONTRACT AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT made the ________ day of ________________________, _____,

BETWEEN

(1) [ name of Employer ], a corporation incorporated under the laws of Republic of Iraq and having itsprincipal place of business at [ address of Employer ] (hereinafter called “the Employer”), and (2) [ nameof Contractor ], a corporation incorporated under the laws of [ country of Contractor ] and having itsprincipal place of business at [ address of Contractor ] (hereinafter called “the Contractor”).

WHEREAS the Employer desires to engage the Contractor to , manufacture, test, deliver, install,complete and commission certain Facilities, viz. [ list of facilities ] (“the Facilities”) and the Contractorhave agreed to such engagement upon and subject to the terms and conditions hereinafterappearing.

NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED as follows:

Article 1ContractDocuments

1.1 Contract Documents (Reference GCC Clause 2)The following documents shall constitute the Contract between theEmployer and the Contractor, and each shall be read and construed asan integral part of the Contract:

(a) This Contract Agreement and the Appendices hereto(b) Letters of Technical Bid and Price Bid and Price Schedules

submitted by the Contractor(c) Particular Conditions(d) General Conditions(e) Employer’s requirements (Specifications, Drawings, Schedules

etc)(f) Other completed Bidding Forms submitted with the Letters of

Technical Bid and Price Bid.(g) Any other documents that are part of the Employer’s

Requirements.(h) Any other documents that shall be added here(i) General Conditions of Civil, Electrical Mechanical and Chemical

Works 1987, issued by the Ministry of Planning, Iraq(j). The contract will be subjected to the instructions of the executing

governmental contracts No.1, 2008Also in the event of any ambiguity or conflict between this Contract and

items listed in 1.1.i and 1.1.jl then the contract will be powerful.

Items listed in 1.1.i and 1.1.j will be applied only for the scope of worksand activities indicated in this Contract .

1.2 Order of Precedence (Reference GCC Clause 2)In the event of any ambiguity or conflict between the ContractDocuments listed above, the order of precedence shall be the order inwhich the Contract Documents are listed in Article 1.1 (ContractDocuments) above.

1.3 Definitions (Reference GCC Clause 1)Capitalized words and phrases used herein shall have the samemeanings as are ascribed to them in the General Conditions.




Article 2Contract Price andTerms of Payment

2.1 Contract Price (Reference GCC Clause 11)The Employer hereby agrees to pay to the Contractor the ContractPrice in consideration of the performance by the Contractor of itsobligations hereunder. The Contract Price shall be the aggregate of: [.. . amounts of foreign currency in words . . . ], [. . . amounts in figures. .. ] as specified in Price Schedule No. 6 (Grand Summary), [. . .amounts of local currency in words . . . ], [. . . amounts in figures. . . ],or such other sums as may be determined in accordance with theterms and conditions of the Contract. The abase prices will beaccording to the LME prices in the closing date.

2.2 Terms of Payment (Reference GCC Clause 12)The terms and procedures of payment according to which theEmployer will reimburse the Contractor are given in the Appendix(Terms and Procedures of Payment) hereto.

The Employer shall instruct its bank to issue an irrevocabledocumentary credit made available to the Contractor in a bank in thecountry of the Contractor. The credit shall be for an amount of [. . .amount equal to the total named in Schedule 1. . . ]; and shall be subject tothe Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits 1993Revision, ICC Publication No. 500.

In the event that the amount payable under Schedule No. 1 isadjusted in accordance with GCC 11.2 or with any of the other terms ofthe Contract, the Employer shall arrange for the documentary credit tobe amended accordingly

Article 3Effective Date

3.1 Effective Date (Reference GCC Clause 1)The Effective Date upon which the period until the Time for Completionof the Facilities shall be counted after 24 days from opening L.C andthe following conditions have been fulfilled:

(a) This Contract Agreement has been duly executed for and onbehalf of the Employer and the Contractor; by signing by bothparties;

(b) The Contractor has submitted to the Employer the performancesecurity;

(c) 24 hours after Opening the LC) in the name and favour ofsecond party.

(d) The site is handed over officially.

Each party shall use its best efforts to fulfil the above conditions forwhich it is responsible as soon as practicable.




Article 4Communications

4.1 The address of the Employer for notice purposes, pursuant to GCC 4.is: AL MANSOUR, P O BOX 55243, BAGHDAD, REPUBLIC OFIRAQ.

4.2 The address of the Contractor for notice purposes, pursuant to GCC 4.is: [ Contractor's address ].

Article 5.Appendices

5.1 The Appendices listed in the attached List of Appendices shall bedeemed to form an integral part of this Contract Agreement.

5.2 Reference in the Contract to any Appendix shall mean the Appendicesattached hereto, and the Contract shall be read and construedaccordingly.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Employer and the Contractor have caused this Agreement to be dulyexecuted by their duly authorized representatives the day and year first above written.

Signed by, for and on behalf of the Employer

[ Signature ]

[ Title ]

in the presence of

[ Signature ]

[ Title ]

Signed by, for and on behalf of the Contractor

[ Signature ][ Title ]

in the presence of

[ Signature ][ Title ]

APPENDICES

Appendix 1 - Terms and Procedures of PaymentAppendix 2 - Price EscalationAppendix 3 - Insurance RequirementsAppendix 4 - Time ScheduleAppendix 5 - List of Major Items of Project and services and List of Approved SubcontractorsAppendix 6 - Scope of Works and Supply by the EmployerAppendix 7 - List of Documents for Approval or ReviewAppendix 8 - Functional Guarantees




13.2.1 Appendix 1 - Terms and Procedures of Payment

In accordance with the provisions of GCC Clause 12 (Terms of Payment), the Employer shall pay theContractor in the following manner and at the following times, on the basis of the Price Breakdown givenin the Schedule 6 on Price Schedules. Payments will be made in the currencies quoted by the Bidderunless otherwise agreed between the parties. Applications for payment in respect of part deliveries maybe made by the Contractor as work proceeds.

a. Once the contract is signed, the Employer shall open an irrevocable, Letter of Credit (LC) with(100 % ) of contract value. (in favour to the Contractor at their nominated international bankthrough the Trade Bank of Iraq (TBI).

b. The LC will be valid for (630) days period.

c. Payment conditions to be by irrevocable, L/C issuing by first class international bank throughTrade bank of Iraq ( TBI ) as follows:

1 for supply materials

- 35% (thirty five percent) of each shipment price to be paid upon arrival of goods at Iraqi bordersand payable at sight against presentation of the following shipping documents at Iraqi port/boarder

a- Original (1) and Copy (2) of Commercial invoiceb- Original (1) and Copy (2) of packing listc- Copy of CMR documents stamped by (MOE) representative at Iraqi border.d- Original (1) and Copy (1) of Certificate of Origine- Original of Insurance certificatef- Original of Third party's inspection certificate and copy (2).

- Ministry of Electricity (MOE) customs clearing office on the border shall be responsible for collectingstamps from Iraqi customs on CMR documents when the goods enter the Iraqi border.

- 60% (sixty percent) of each shipment

Price of material value to be paid after arrival of goods to the site/warehouse in compliance with ourspecifications and requirements and received by employer committee upon presentation ofphotocopy of CMR documents and approve the receiving of material according to shippingdocuments mentioned in the above item.

2 for execution works and services (training and witness)

* 95% of invoice amount to be paid upon presentation of attendance sheets singed by the first party'srepresentatives and approved by first party.

- 5 % as retention payment for total contract price should be released as follows:- 2.5% of total price will be released after issuing (PAC) (Provisional Acceptance Certificate)which means {energizing the cable and In case the substations are not ready for operation whencables projects are completed, the cables are tested by AC Resonant system (with suitableaccessories for GIS and outdoor termination) and the awarded company takes the responsibilityof providing the system and bears all expenses}-2.5% after issuing on (FAC) (Final acceptance certificate) - of total price will be released at the endof the warranty period.




13.2.2 Appendix 2 - Price Escalation

The Contract Prices shall be CIP ( as defined in the latest INCOTERMS) the prices of the powercables in Price Schedule No. 1 are variable and will be adjusted according to the below metal fixationformula after Clause 3.1 of the Contract Agreement is fulfilled.

NSP = OP. + V.F. Cu ( LME2 – LME1 ) for Copper+ V.F. Al ( LME2 – LME1 ) for Aluminium+ V.F. Pb ( LME2 – LME1 ) for Lead

NSP = Net Selling Price USD/ km after metal fixationOP= (at the closing date).LME1= Price in USD/ MT (one day before closing date) based on:

(Cu) = USD/MT (metric tonne)(Al) = USD/MT(Pb) = USD/MT

V.F.Cu = variation factor MT/km for CopperV.F.Al = variation factor MT/km for AluminiumV.F.Pb = variation factor MT/km for Lead

LME2 = Price per MT of copper / Aluminium / lead in USD/MT (cash settlement ) ruling on thenext working day after fulfilment of the condition in Clause 3.1of the Contract Agreement

Metals fixation will be effected by Contractor on the next LME working day after (24) hours from thedate which TBI informed the Advising Bank by swift copy of LC. The Contractor will inform theEmployer about the final LME prices for Copper, Aluminum and Lead, and will submit adjusted unitprice calculations and will request L/C amendment accordingly as per above formula. Then theEmployer will amend the L/C. The adjusted prices will be firmed and fixed all through the Contract.Total Contract Price will be firmed and fixed and the quantity will be changed according to metalfixation.




13.2.3 Appendix 3 - Insurance Requirements

Insurances to be Taken Out by The Contractor

In accordance with the provisions of GCC Clause 34, the Contractor shall at its expense take out andmaintain in effect, or cause to be taken out and maintained in effect, during the performance of theContract, the insurances set forth below in the sums and with the deductibles and other conditionsspecified. The identity of the insurers and the form of the policies shall be subject to the approval ofthe Employer, such approval not to be unreasonably withheld.

(a) Cargo InsuranceCovering loss or damage occurring, while in transit from the supplier’s or manufacturer’s works orstores until arrival at the Site, to the Facilities (including spare parts therefore) and to the constructionequipment to be provided by the Contractor or its Subcontractors.

Amount Deductible limits Parties insured From To[in currency(ies)] [in currency(ies)] [names] [place] [place]

Full value ofshipment Nil Employer

supplier’s ormanufacturer’sworks or stores

Site

Contractor

(b) Installation All Risks InsuranceCovering physical loss or damage to the Facilities at the Site, occurring prior to completion of theFacilities, with extended maintenance coverage for the Contractor’s liability in respect of any loss ordamage occurring during the defect liability period while the Contractor is on the Site for the purposeof performing its obligations during the defect liability period.


Contract value Employer Site SiteContractor

Sub Contractors

(c) Third Party Liability InsuranceCovering bodily injury or death suffered by third parties (including the Employer’s personnel) and lossof or damage to property (including the Employer’s property and any parts of the Facilities that havebeen accepted by the Employer) occurring in connection with the supply and installation of theFacilities.


Sub Contractor Site SiteContractorThird Party(Including

Employer’sPersonnel)

(d) Automobile Liability InsuranceCovering use of all vehicles used by the Contractor or its Subcontractors (whether or not owned bythem) in connection with the supply and installation of the Facilities. Comprehensive insurance in




accordance with statutory requirements.

(e) Workers’ CompensationIn accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in any country where the Facilities or anypart thereof is executed.

(f) Employer’s LiabilityIn accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in any country where the Facilities or anypart thereof is executed.

(g) Other InsurancesThe Contractor is also required to take out and maintain at its own cost the following insurances:

Details:


Nil

The Employer shall be named as co-insured under all insurance policies taken out by the Contractorpursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 34.1, except for the Third Party Liability., The Contractor’sSubcontractors shall be named as co-insureds under all insurance policies taken out by theContractor pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 34.1, except for the Cargo, insurances. All insurer’s rightsof subrogation against such co-insureds for losses or claims arising out of the performance of theContract shall be waived under such policies.




13.2.4 Appendix 4 - Time Schedule

The overall project delivery and execution period is 630 days from the contract effective date. No alternativetime schedules are acceptable. Refer GCC Clause 8.

The supply of material for Power cables, Optical Fibre cables and accessories shall be made as follows(value of shipments to reach Iraq)

40% of the Total value or more of above materials within 180 days from the contract effective date.

Total 70% of the total value or more of the above materials within 270 days of the contract effective date

Full 100% of the total value of the above materials within 360 days of the contract effective date.

For any delays in shipments beyond those above times, penalties will be made on the outstanding amount

(example if 30% of the value of material has reached Iraq, before the end of 180 days, penalty will be

calculated for the balance 10%, for the number of days delayed. If another shipment with 6% arrives after 20

days of delay, only 4% is subjected to the penalties after 20 days. Once the 270 days period is passed any

amount less than 70% of total value of material will be considered as outstanding). A similar procedure is

followed for the 360 days time period.

Penalty shall be calculated as follows starting after 120 days from the contract effective date.

[Outstanding Value due to delay in Shipments (US $) x 10% x No of days] / 360

The total Penalty shall not exceed 10% of total value of shipments of Power cables, Optical Fibre cables andaccessories.




13.2.5 Appendix 5 - List of Major Items of Project and Services and List of ApprovedSubcontractors

A list of major items of Project and services is provided below.

The following Subcontractors and/or manufacturers are approved for carrying out the item of thefacilities indicated. Where more than one Subcontractor is listed, the Contractor is free to choosebetween them, but it must notify the Employer of its choice in good time prior to appointing anyselected Subcontractor. In accordance with GCC Sub-Clause 19.1, the Contractor is free to submitproposals for Subcontractors for additional items from time to time. No Subcontracts shall be placedwith any such Subcontractors for additional items until the Subcontractors have been approved inwriting by the Employer and their names have been added to this list of Approved Subcontractors.

Major Items ofProject and

ServicesApproved

Subcontractors/Manufacturers Nationality

132kV Power Cables

Optical Fiber Cable

Relays




13.2.6 Appendix 6 - Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer

The following personnel, facilities, works and supplies will be provided/supplied by the Employer, andthe provisions of GCC Clauses 10, 21 and 24 shall apply as appropriate.

All personnel, facilities, works and supplies will be provided by the Employer in good time so as not todelay the performance of the Contractor, in accordance with the approved Time Schedule andProgram of Performance pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 18.2.

Unless otherwise indicated, all personnel, facilities, works and supplies will be provided free of chargeto the Contractor.

Personnel Charge to Contractor (if any)Nil

Facilities Charge to Contractor (if any)Nil

Works Charge to Contractor (if any)Nil

Supplies Charge to Contractor (if any)Nil




13.2.7 Appendix 7 - List of Documents for Approval or Review

Pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 20.3.1, the Contractor shall prepare, or cause its Subcontractor toprepare, and present to the Project Manager in accordance with the requirements of GCC Sub-Clause 18.2 (Program of Performance), the following documents for

(A) Approval

1. Construction drawings

2. Test reports, standards certificates, quality control reports etc.

3. reports

4. Method statements

5. Any other documents specified in the specification/ Employer’s Requirements or as request bythe Engineer

(B) Review

1. As built drawings

2. Operation and maintenance manuals

3. Any other documents specified in the specification/ Employer’s Requirements or as request bythe Engineer




13.2.8 Appendix 8 - Functional Guarantees- Not Applicable



Section 15 – General Conditions of Contract 15-258

SECTION 14: GENERAL CONDITONS OF CONTRACT

14.1 ATTACHED SEPARATELY



Section 16 – Particular Conditions of Contract 16-259

SECTION 15: PERTICULAR CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

15.1 ATTACHED SEPARATELY



Section 17 – Employer’s Requirements: Drawings 17-260

SECTION 16: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS: DRAWINGS

Cable Line Route Maps

o AL Zawraa Substation–AL Hurryia Substation

o AL Yarmook substation – Al Rasheed Substation

o AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation

Typical Cable Layout – Cable Trench (For General route)

Typical Cable Layout – Cable Pipes (For Road Crossings)

Marker Blocks

Cable Joint Caravan

(See the following drawings)




16.1 CABLE ROUTE MAPS

16.1.1 AL Zawraa Substation–AL Hurryia Substation































16.1.2 AL Yarmook substation – Al Rasheed Substation




























16.1.3 AL Kazale 132 kV substation - AL Amean 400 kV substation
















16.2 DRAWING NO 001: TYPICAL DRAWING FOR FLAT FORMATION – GENERAL CABLE ROUTE




16.3 DRAWING NO 002A: TYPICAL DRAWING FOR CROSS SECTION VIEW HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING




16.4 DRAWING 002B TYPICAL DRAWING FOR HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRAWING




16.5 DRAWING NO 003: TYPICAL DRAWING FOR ROAD CROSSING (OPEN CUT)




16.6 DRAWING 004A POWER CABLE JOINT CHAIMBER




16.7 DRAWING 004B POWER CABLE JOINT CHAIMBER PLAN




16.8 DRAWING R005 LINK BOX PIT




16.9 DRAWING 006 TYPICAL DRWING FOR FLAT FORMATION CONCRETE TROUGH




16.10 DRAWING R002 CARAVAN FOR CABLE JOINTING




16.11 DRAWING 0011CRC JOINT CHAIMBER




16.12 FIG (2) MULTIPLE PRECAST MOULDING MACHINE SPECIFICATION




16.13 DRAWING 021T – CONCRETE TROUGH & MARKER BLOCK1




16.14 DRAWING 001M – CONCRETE TROUGH & MARKER BLOCK2




16.15 DRAWING F1: MARKER TAPE

Length (250 m )Thickness (1.0 mm)Width ( 150 mm)




16.16 DRAWING 0010F: FOUNDATION OF GANTRY STEEL STRUCTURE SUPPORTS FOR 132KV CABLE SEALING ENDS




16.17 DRAWING 0010G: GANTRY STEEL STRUCTURE SUPPORTS FOR 132KV CABLE SEALING ENDS




16.18 DRAWING CB: CROSS BONDING FOR LONG DISTANCE




16.19 TYPICAL CROSS SECTION OF A 132KV XLPE ALUMINIUM CABLE